P. 1
TM 1-1520-256-23.pdf

TM 1-1520-256-23.pdf

|Views: 101|Likes:
Published by Eagle1968
Technical manual
Technical manual

More info:

Published by: Eagle1968 on Nov 08, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

06/04/2014

pdf

text

original

TM 1-1520-256-23

TECHNICAL MANUAL

AVIATION UNIT MAINTENANCE(AVUM) AND AVIATION INTERMEDIATE MAINTENANCE (AVIM) MANUAL

NONDESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION PROCEDURES FOR UH-1 HELICOPTER SERIES

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approved for Public Release; Distribution Unlimited

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

30 NOVEMBER 1996

TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING SUMMARY Personnel performing inspections involving operations, procedures, and practices, which are included or implied in this technical manual, shall observe the following instructions.

WARNING Highlights an operation, procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., if not strictly observed, could result in injury to, or death of, personnel. CAUTION Highlights an operation, procedure, practice, condition, statement;, etc., if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment or loss of mission effectiveness. NOTE Highlights an essential operation, procedure, condition, or statement. The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedures and, therefore do not appear elsewhere in this publication. These are recommended precautions that personnel must understand and apply during many phases of nondestructive inspections. GENERAL Assure compliance with safety requirements in Technical Manual, Nondestructive Inspection Methods, TM 55-1500-33523. Assure compliance with the safety and precautionary measures addressed in the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to these manuals for detailed information relating to safety considerations for the specific area or system on which the nondestructive inspection procedure is to be performed. WARNING

Aircraft Grounding All aircraft shall be grounded in accordance with FM 55-41 at all times.

a

TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Electrical Hazard

Assure that all safety precautions for using electrical equipment near aircraft fuel cells, oxygen systems, and stores have been met. WARNING Solvents Most solvents are flammable. Keep away from heat and open flame. Vapors may be harmful. Use with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged or repeated breathing of vapor. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Do not take internally. Comply with pollution control rules concerning photochemically reactive solvents. WARNING Keep Away From Live Circuits Inspection personnel must at all times observe all safety regulations. Do not replace components or make adjustments inside equipment with a high voltage supply turned on. Under certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist even when the power control is in the off position, due to charges retained by capacitors. To avoid injuries, always remove power. Discharge and ground a circuit before touching it. Make sure that equipment is grounded to same earth ground as aircraft. WARNING Electrical and Electronic Equipment Do not wear rings, watches, or metal jewelry when working around electrical equipment. RESUSCITATION Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation. information may be obtained from the Office of Bioenvironment Health or is listed in FM 21-11. Such

b

TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Cleaning Solvents • • • • Those areas where skin and clothing come in contact with cleaning solvents should be washed thoroughly and immediately after contact. Saturated clothing should be removed immediately. Areas where cleaning solvents are used should be adequately ventilated to keep vapors to a minimum. In case of contact with eyes, nose, or ears, flush them with generous quantities of water and then seek medical attention immediately. WARNING Foreign Object Damage • • Make sure area is clear of foreign objects before closing access doors, panels, and fairings. If area is not clear, damage to components or systems could result in personal injury or death. WARNING Lifting Components with Hoist • • • • • Lifting or hoisting of components shall be done only by designated personnel. Before lifting, alert personnel in immediate areas. Before lifting, balance the load. Do not stand under load while it is being moved from one area to another on a hoist. Do not stand under load to do inspection work. WARNING Compressed Air • • Do not use more than 30 PSIG compressed air for cleaning purposes. Use eye protection to prevent injury to personnel.

c

TM 1-1520-256-23 The following are warnings and cautions related to specific procedures that appear elsewhere in this publication. These are precautions that personnel must understand and apply during nondestructive inspections. WARNING To prevent injury to personnel and damage to helicopter, stand only on designated surfaces. These areas are reinforced to withstand frequent use and are treaded to prevent slipping. All other surfaces are NO STEP areas. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms, workstands, or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Otherwise, personnel injury could result from accidental falls. WARNING Cleaning solvents P-D-680, Type II and MIL-C-38736 are flammable. Avoid eye and skin contact or breathing vapors. Protective equipment consisting of goggles, gloves, and respiratory protection is required. WARNING Electrical equipment shall not be operated in areas where combustible gases or vapors may be present, unless the equipment is explosion proof. WARNING • • • Black lights generate considerable heat during use. Extreme care must be exercised to prevent contacting the housing with any part of the body. To prevent injury to eyes, do not look directly into black light. Prolonged direct exposure of hands to the filtered black light's main beam may be harmful. Suitable gloves shall be worn when exposing hands to the main beam.

d

TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Prolonged or repeated inhalation of vapors or powders may result in irritation of mucous membrane areas of the nose. WARNING Continual exposure to penetrant inspection material may cause skin irritation. WARNING Temperatures in excess of 49° C (120° F) may cause bursting of pressurized cans and injury to personnel. WARNING Volatile fumes may occur, creating both a fire and health hazard. WARNING Prolonged breathing of vapor from organic solvents, degreasers, or paint thinners is dangerous. Use respirators in confined areas per Occupational and Environmental Health Respiratory Protection Program (TB MED 502 (DLAM 1000.2)). Have adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged skin contact. Wear rubber gloves and goggles. WARNING Radiation Hazard Assure compliance with all applicable safety precautions set forth in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) listed in Table 1-1. A hazard associated with exposure to ionizing radiation is that serious injury can be inflicted without pain, burning, or other sense of discomfort during the exposure period. Radiation protection shall be utilized in accordance with AR40-14/DLAR 1000.28.

e

TM 1-1520-256-23 CAUTION Do not use cleaning solvent MIL-C-38736 on acrylic lacquer, as it may soften finish. CAUTION Penetrant-Emulsifier/Remover Combinations (lipophillic/hydrophilic) from one manufacturer may not be mixed or used in conjunction with materials from a different manufacturer. CAUTION Do not operate magnetic particle equipment within 36 inches of aircraft instruments. CAUTION Misinterpretation of indications can result in rejectable parts being accepted and acceptable parts being rejected. Only NDI personnel trained and qualified in accordance with applicable military standards and technical manuals shall perform and interpret nondestructive inspections.

f

TM 1-1520-256-23 TECHNICAL MANUAL No. 1-1520-256-23 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Washington, D.C. 30 November 1996

Aviation Unit Maintenance (AVUM) and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance (AVIM) Manual Nondestructive Inspection Procedures for UH-1 Helicopter Series

REPORTING OF ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or DA Form 2028-2 located in back of this manual direct to: Commander, U.S. Army Aviation and Troop Command, ATTN: AMSATI-MP, 4300 Goodfellow Boulevard, St. Louis, MO 63120-1798. A reply will be furnished to you. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approved for Public Release; Distribution Unlimited TABLE OF CONTENTS Section/Paragraph WARNING SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS .............................................................................................................................. LIST OF TABLES ............................................................................................................................................ I INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 GENERAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................. Special Terms, Abbreviations, and Acronyms .................................................................. How to Use This Manual .................................................................................................. Inspection Item Code ........................................................................................................ Use of NDI Symbols ......................................................................................................... Use of Reference Publications ......................................................................................... Related Publications ........................................................................................................ Description ....................................................................................................................... Configuration ................................................................................................................... Station, Water, Buttock, and Fin Station Lines ................................................................. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................ Rotor Group...................................................................................................................... Transmission/Drivetrain Group ......................................................................................... Airframe and Landing Gear Group ................................................................................... Engine Group ................................................................................................................... Flight Control Group ........................................................................................................ Page a ix xv 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-8 1-8 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-13 1-13

i

TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Section/Paragraph 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.6.1 1.4.6.2 1.4.7 1.4.7.1 1.4.7.2 1.4.8 1.4.8.1 1.4.8.1.1 1.4.8.1.2 1.4.8.2 1.4.9 1.4.9.1 1.4.9.2 1.4.10 1.4.10.1 1.4.10.2 1.4.11 1.4.11.1 1.4.11.2 1.4.11.2.1 1.4.11.2.2 1.4.11.2.3 1.4.11.3 1.4.11.4 1.4.12 1.4.12.1 1.4.12.2 1.4.13 Access Panels, Doors, and Fairings ................................................................................. Steps, Handholds, and Walkways .................................................................................... MARKING AND/OR RECORDING OF INSPECTION RESULTS ..................................... NONDESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION METHODS ............................................................... Purpose of Nondestructive Inspection (NDI) ..................................................................... Selecting the NDI Method ................................................................................................ Preparation of Helicopter for NDI ..................................................................................... Preparation of Part or Area for NDI .................................................................................. NDI General Safety Precautions ...................................................................................... Bond Testing (BT) Method ............................................................................................... Bond Testing Equipment .................................................................................................. Safety Precautions During Bond Testing .......................................................................... Fluorescent Penetrant (PT) Method .................................................................................. Safety Precautions During Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection ........................................... Controlling Excess Fluorescent Penetrant ........................................................................ Magnetic Particle (MT) Method ........................................................................................ Magnetic Particle Inspection Equipment ........................................................................... Magnetic Yokes and Probes ............................................................................................. Hand-held Coil .................................................................................................................. Safety Precautions During Magnetic Particle Inspections ................................................. Demagnetization of Inspection Parts ................................................................................ Demagnetization Using AC .............................................................................................. Demagnetization Using DC .............................................................................................. Radiographic (RT) Method ............................................................................................... Safety Precautions During Radiographic Inspections ....................................................... Mixing of Radiographic Film Processing Chemicals ......................................................... Eddy Current (ET) Method ............................................................................................... Safety Precautions During Eddy Current Inspection ......................................................... Eddy Current Scanning Techniques ................................................................................. Scanning Around Fasteners, Inserts, and Edges of Parts ................................................. Bolthole Inspection ........................................................................................................... Scanning Fillets and Radii ................................................................................................ Eddy Current Instrument Standardization ......................................................................... Sorting Metal Using Eddy Current .................................................................................... Ultrasonic (UT) Method .................................................................................................... Safety Precautions During Ultrasonic Inspection ............................................................... Ultrasonic Instrument Standardization .............................................................................. Acceptance/Rejection Criteria ........................................................................................... Page 1-13 1-13 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-22 1-22 1-27 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-30 1-30 1-30 1-30 1-31 1-31 1-31 1-31 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-33 1-33 1-33 1-33 1-33 1-35 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37

ii

TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Section/Paragraph 1.4.14 1.4.15 1.4.16 II 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 Equipment Used for NDI .................................................................................................. Materials Used for NDI ..................................................................................................... Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI .................................................. CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR HUB GRIP (ET)......................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR HUB PILLOW BLOCK (ET) ....................................................................... MAIN ROTOR PITCH HORN (ET) ................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR DRAG BRACE ASSEMBLY (MT) ............................................................. MAIN ROTOR BLADE BOLT (MT) ................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR HUB PLATE ASSEMBLY (ET) .................................................................. GRIP RETENTION NUT (MT) .......................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR HUB SHIELD ASSEMBLY (MT) ............................................................... YOKE (MT) ...................................................................................................................... TRUNNION (MT) ............................................................................................................. STRAP FITTING (MT) ..................................................................................................... MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (ET) .............................................................................. MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (BT) .............................................................................. MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (RT) .............................................................................. COMPOSITE MAIN ROTOR BLADE (BT) ....................................................................... STABILIZER BAR CENTER FRAME (ET) ....................................................................... STABILIZER BAR SUPPORT (ET) .................................................................................. STABILIZER BAR LEVER (ET) ........................................................................................ STABILIZER BAR TUBE ASSEMBLY (MT) ..................................................................... DAMPER LEVER ARMS (ET) .......................................................................................... ROTOR MAST ADAPTER SET (ET) ............................................................................... DAMPER WINGSHAFT SPLINES (MT) ........................................................................... SWASHPLATE INNER RING (ET) ................................................................................... SWASHPLATE OUTER RING (ET) ................................................................................. SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (ET) ............................................................................................ COLLECTIVE LEVERS (ET) ............................................................................................ SCISSORS ASSEMBLY (ET) .......................................................................................... DRIVE LINK (ET) ............................................................................................................. COLLECTIVE SLEEVE ASSEMBLY (MT) ....................................................................... NUT, RETAINER (MT) ..................................................................................................... NUT, COLLECTIVE SLEEVE BEARING RETENTION (MT) ............................................ SCISSORS AND SLEEVE HUB (MT) .............................................................................. TAIL ROTOR HUB GRIP ASSEMBLY (ET) ..................................................................... iii Page 1-37 1-37 1-41 2-1 2-1 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-11 2-13 2-15 2-18 2-19 2-21 2-23 2-24 2-26 2-28 2-32 2-36 2-40 2-43 2-45 2-47 2-49 2-51 2-53 2-55 2-57 2-60 2-62 2-64 2-67 2-69 2-70 2-73 2-75 2-77

ROTOR GROUP ....................................................................................................................................

............................... TRANSMISSION CASE (TOP) (ET) ...TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS ....... MAIN DRIVESHAFT INNER COUPLINGS (MT) ............................................................38 2.......................................................................................1 3...........................13 3........................................................... HYDRAULIC PUMP AND TACHOMETER GEAR TEETH (PT) ......................................................................................... MAIN DRIVESHAFT SPLINED NUTS (MT) .............2 3.......4 3.......................................... MAIN TRANSMISSION CASE (ET) ......................18 3................... TRANSMISSION SUPPORT CASE (ET) ..........................................24 3.40 2...16 3......................................5 3.........42 2...................................... HYDRAULIC PUMP AND TACHOMETER QUILL CASE (ET) ...37 2............................... .................................................... ADAPTER BOLT (MT) ................................................11 3.. TAIL ROTOR BLADE (BT) ................................................. TAIL ROTOR HUB RETAINER RING (PT) ...... TAIL ROTOR HUB TRUNNION (MT) ................................................ TAIL ROTOR HUB YOKE (MT) ........ ADAPTER NUT (MT) .................................................................22 3....................... PYLON MOUNT BOLTS (MT) ........................................................................... TAIL ROTOR BLADE (RT) ................................................................... FRICTION DAMPER (MT) .........12 3........ GENERATOR DRIVE QUILL CASE (ET) .................................... OIL JETS (PT) .... MAIN DRIVESHAFT CLAMP SETS (MT) ....................28 TAIL ROTOR HUB RETAINER NUT (MT) .....................................................................8 3..................................................... OIL PUMP DRIVESHAFT (MT) .........Continued Section/Paragraph 2..............GEAR CASE (MT) ................................................................................................................................................36 2..................................................6 3...9 3...................................27 3.........................................................................................................................................................................26 3..35 2................................ TAIL ROTOR BLADE (ET) ............. TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL SLEEVE SPACER (MT) ............................. iv Page 2-79 2-81 2-82 2-84 2-86 2-88 2-90 2-93 2-95 3-1 3-1 3-5 3-6 3-8 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-15 3-16 3-18 3-19 3-21 3-25 3-28 3-29 3-31 3-32 3-35 3-36 3-38 3-41 3-43 3-44 3-46 3-48 3-49 3-51 3-53 TRANSMISSION/DRIVETRAIN GROUP .........................17 3......................................... TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL BEVEL GEAR TEETH (MT) ......................................................................... MAIN DRIVESHAFT OUTER COUPLINGS (MT) ............ TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL SLEEVE ASSEMBLY (ET) .................................................................................21 3...........................................19 3......................41 2........................ RING........................................... MAIN DRIVESHAFT GREASE RETAINERS (PT) ....................... FIFTH MOUNT SUPPORT FITTING (PT) ...........7 3............ MAIN DRIVESHAFT (MT) ......................................................................................... CONTENTS ......25 3...........................................................3 3....................................................23 3........................................................10 3............................................20 3....................................................................................................................................................................................... THREADED FITTINGS (PT) .................................................................43 III 3.......... TAIL ROTOR CROSSHEAD (ET) .....14 3.................................................................... MAIN ROTOR MAST NUT (MT) ....... INPUT DRIVE QUILL WEAR SLEEVE (PT) .................................................. LIFT LINK BUSHING HOLE (PT) ...... MAIN DRIVESHAFT ENGINE ADAPTER (MT) ........................................................15 3..............................39 2............................................................................

................ AFT FUSELAGE STRUCTURAL TUBE (ET) ......46 IV 4....8 4....... TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX OUTER COUPLING (MT) .....11 4............................................................32 3....................................... INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX INNER COUPLING (MT) .....................Continued Section/Paragraph 3......................................42 3.................................................................................38 3..........................................................31 3............ LIFT BEAM CAP AND ADJACENT STRUCTURE (ET) ....................... HINGED PANEL AND HINGES (ET) ................. AND MOUNT ASSEMBLY (ET) .17 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT (ET) .......... TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT COUPLING SHAFT (MT) ........................................15 4...................................... TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX SLEEVE (MT) ............................................................. INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX PINION SHAFT (MT) .......................................... TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX CASE (ET) ......................................... CREW DOOR HINGES (ET) ............................. v Page 3-54 3-56 3-58 3-60 3-62 3-64 3-65 3-67 3-69 3-72 3-73 3-75 3-76 3-78 3-80 3-82 3-84 3-85 4-1 4-1 4-4 4-7 4-11 4-13 4-16 4-17 4-21 4-24 4-26 4-28 4-31 4-34 4-36 4-37 4-40 4-43 AIRFRAME AND LANDING GEAR GROUP ....... CONTENTS ............................................. TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT HANGER SUPPORT FITTINGS (ET) ......................................................7 4...............................34 3..... FORWARD FUSELAGE METAL STRUCTURES (ET) ................................................. INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX SLEEVE (MT) ........................................................... ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT MOUNT (ET) ........................................................................ INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX CASE (ET) ...............................................................................................................36 3..................13 4.............................................................................................14 4.................................. TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT INNER (SPHERICAL) COUPLING (MT) ......................................................................37 3...............41 3............ HINGED PANEL ASSEMBLY HARDWARE (PT) ...... TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT REAR COUPLING (MT) .............................................................3 4........................................................................................................................ TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT FORWARD COUPLING (MT) ................................................................................................. CENTER SERVICE DECK PANEL (BT) ................................................. TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT CLAMPS (MT) ...................................................... INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX OUTER COUPLING (MT) ....................... RETAINING CLIP...................... FRICTION DAMPER MOUNT ASSEMBLY (ET) ..9 4................ FRICTION DAMPER SUPPORT.................TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS ........44 3.. REINFORCED FLOOR MOUNTING PLATES AND BASE ASSEMBLY (ET) ....................5 4.........................................45 3...33 3.... CENTER SERVICE DECK............................................................... AND MAIN BEAM CAPS (ET) .....................40 3.30 3................................................................16 4......................2 4.....43 3.......... TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT HANGERS (MT) .............................6 4...................................4 4..................... TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX INNER COUPLING (MT) .......................... HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES WITH METALLIC COVERING (BT) ..........1 4................................... TRANSMISSION AND ENGINE COWLING (ET) ....39 3.............................. ..................... HANGER BEARING BRACE ASSEMBLY...12 4....................... HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES WITH NON-METALLIC COVERING (BT) .........35 3...... CLIP.......... AFT LANDING GEAR ATTACHMENTS (ET) ....................10 4...................................................................29 3................ TRANSMISSION LIFT LINK (MT) ................

26 4..................................... CARGO DOOR RETAINERS AND RETAINER STRAP (ET) .................................35 4...................................................................11 CARGO DOOR (ET) ....................32 4........................................................ .......METAL LINES AND FITTINGS (PT) ..... TURNBUCKLES.............................................................................................. PASSENGER STEP (PT) ........................................27 4................................................. ENGINE OIL COOLER TURBO BLOWER (PT) ......................................................10 5........................28 4.........................................36 4........ vi Page 4-45 4-47 4-48 4-50 4-52 4-55 4-56 4-60 4-62 4-63 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-71 4-75 4-77 4-79 4-81 4-82 4-85 4-86 4-91 5-1 5-1 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-9 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-16 5-17 ENGINE GROUP ..........2 5........................................................... INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX SUPPORT INSTALLATION (ET) .........................39 V 5......... MISSION OPERATOR SEATS (ET) .......AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT) ....... TAILBOOM AND FUSELAGE ATTACH FITTINGS (ET) ............. NINETY DEGREE GEARBOX SUPPORT FITTING (ET) ................................... IMPROVED PARTICLE SEPARATOR (IPS) AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT) .................. ENGINE OIL TANK SUPPORT (PT) .....................37 4.................................. VERTICAL FIN (PT) ..............AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT).....19 4........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... TAILPIPE AND HEATSHIELD (PT) ..21 4..............................................................................7 5....31 4.... AND PINS (MT) ..........................................................25 4.30 4.........38 4................... NON-SELF-PURGING PARTICLE SEPARATOR ........................................................................................ ELEVATOR HORN ASSEMBLY (ET) ...................9 5............................................................................................................... PILLOW BLOCKS (MT) .......................................................................................................................................................................23 4......................... ENGINE DECK FITTINGS (MT) ...................1 5....................... LANDING GEAR CROSS TUBES (UT) .............................34 4.................. RODS..................................... ENGINE MOUNT FITTINGS (MT) ........... STANDARD CREW SEAT (ET) ................4 5.............................................................. INLET SCREEN LATCH ASSEMBLY SELF-PURGING ............ SKID TUBE SADDLES (ET) .....................................24 4.6 5............. ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY SUPPORT FITTINGS (ET) ............................................................................................................ CONTENTS ..................................................8 5..........................................18 4..............................................................................................33 4............................Continued Section/Paragraph 4............................ TAILBOOM STRUCTURE (ET) ..................................3 5.............................22 4.......................................................5 5........................................20 4............................................................ ROD ENDS.........................AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT) ........ EXHAUST TAILPIPE AND DUCT ASSEMBLIES (PT) ................................................................................................................... ENGINE OIL COOLER (PT) ................... AIR PARTICLE SEPARATOR SELF-PURGING ....... EXHAUST SYSTEM CLAMP (PT) ..TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS ............... JACK AND MOORING FITTINGS (MT) . PARATROOP STATIC LINE FITTING AND COMPRESSION TUBE (ET) .... OIL SYSTEM ................. ENGINE MOUNTS (MT) .................... BOLTS............29 4....................................................................

............................................................................. AND FITTING (PT) .19 6....................................... PRESSURE SWITCH (PT) ..........................TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS ................. HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER (CYCLIC CONTROL) CYLINDER CAPS (PT) ....................................................... COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL TUBES (ET) .................................................. GROUND TEST CONNECTIONS (PT) ................................................................................ vii Page 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-22 5-23 5-26 5-28 6-1 6-1 6-9 6-10 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-34 6-36 6-38 FLIGHT CONTROL GROUP ............18 VI 6................................. CONTENTS...... CAMBOX ASSEMBLY (ET) ........4 6...................3 6................................................6 6........................................................................................................15 5....................... COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANK (ET) .....................................................16 6.........2 6........................22 OIL SEPARATOR (PT) .............. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (STARBOARD) (ET) ........ COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM LEVER ASSEMBLY (ET) .....................................................13 5...............................................................................................................10 6................................................................................................. POWER LEVER TORQUE TUBE (MT) .... HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) BEARING HOUSING (PT) ................ HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) CLEVIS (MT) ...........................................................................14 6......................... TUBE AND LEVER ASSEMBLY (ET) ....... SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.................. HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) TUBE ASSEMBLY (PT) ... HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS (PT) .................................................. BOLT..................................................................17 6............................ HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL)........................................................................8 6............................. .......18 6........................................................................................................................................................................... SOLENOID VALVES (PT) ...12 6..................... HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) HOUSING (PT) ...................................11 6...............................20 6..7 6................................ ENGINE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER HEAD AND BOWL (PT) .......................15 6........................... COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM SUPPORT (ET) ..........................................16 5........................................................................................................................... RELIEF VALVE.. HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY (ET) ........................... HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) (PT) ................................... POWER LEVER CONTROL MOUNTING BRACKETS AND PLATES (PT) ...........................12 5.......5 6...................................................................... POWER LEVER CONTROLS (ET) .....................................................................................17 5........................................................ PISTON ROD (MT)........................................14 5............................. HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER TUBE ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) (PT) ....................................................21 6........ POWER LEVER CONTROL RODS (MT) .................. HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) CLEVIS (MT) .........................................................9 6..............Continued Section/Paragraph 5...................13 6...............................................1 6............

.............. TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL ..................CYCLIC CONTROLS (ET) ...............RETAINING NUT (MT) ... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL ............................ TAIL ROTOR HYDRAULIC POWER CYLINDER .....49 6.........TM 1-1520-256-23 TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................48 6.....................................42 6.....................BELLCRANKS (ET) . TAIL ROTOR ARM ASSEMBLIES (ET) .......47 6.....51 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY......................SPACER (MT) .......... TAIL ROTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (ET) ....40 6.CONTROL TUBES (ET) ............ HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (PORT) (ET) ............. ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ........................44 6...38 6........CONTROL TUBE (MT) ........SUPPORTS (ET) ..... TAIL ROTOR CYLINDER AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY HARDWARE (MT) ............................................... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .32 6..... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL ................29 6.................HOUSING (PT) ..........................................................28 6... ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANKS (ET) ................................. Page 6-40 6-42 6-45 6-47 6-50 6-52 6-54 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-65 6-66 6-68 6-71 6-72 6-75 6-77 6-79 6-80 6-83 6-85 6-88 6-91 6-93 6-95 A-1 B-1 C-1 APPENDIX A MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART .................... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .....CONTROL NUT (PT) ..............................SPROCKET (PT) .... AND SUPPORTS .. TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL ...LEVERS (ET) ........ TAIL ROTOR BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY (ET) ..........................50 6............BEARING RETAINER (PT) .............................................. TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .. MIXING LEVER ASSEMBLY .46 6..45 6..............26 6................................................................... ALPHABETICAL INDEX ................................................................................... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBES (ET) .........37 6............ ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY (ET) .......................... ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ..24 6................................BEARING REPLACEMENT (ET) ...... APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT LISTING .................35 6...........................31 6..................................................................................... ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ............ Index 1 viii ............... ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .................................34 6........................................23 6.....................SPROCKET GUARD (PT) ......................................................Continued Section/Paragraph 6........36 6............... LEVERS......BELLCRANKS.............................................................. TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL ....................................................PISTON ROD (MT) .........................................................................................41 6.................. CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM SUPPORTS (ET) ...........................43 6.......... APPENDIX C ILLUSTRATED FIELD MANUFACTURE ITEMS LIST ................................. TAIL ROTOR CONTROL QUADRANT (ET) .......... CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL TUBES (ET) ....................30 6.............................................................................LEVERS (ET) ...................33 6................................................................. CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANKS AND LEVERS (ET) ..........................................................................................................................................39 6....................27 6.........................................................25 6... TAIL ROTOR HYDRAULIC POWER CYLINDER ADAPTER (MT) .......................... TAIL ROTOR CONTROL SYSTEM ........ TAIL ROTOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...........

....................... Rotor Mast Adapter Set .......... Yoke ........................................................................................ Bond Testing Reference Block Displays ................................................................... Main Rotor Hub Grip ............................................................................. Station........................................................................................................... Support Assembly ..................................... Main Rotor Drag Brace Assembly .............. and Fairings ................................................................................................................................................................................... Portable Magnetic Particles Inspection Equipment ................................................................................................................................. ix Figure 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 Page 1-7 1-9 1-10 1-14 1-21 1-29 1-34 1-35 2-3 2-6 2-8 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-17 2-19 2-20 2-22 2-24 2-25 2-28 2-31 2-34 2-39 2-42 2-44 2-46 2-48 2-51 2-53 2-54 2-57 2-59 2-61 2-64 2-66 2-68 2-71 ................................................................................................................. Rotor Group ..... Stabilizer Bar Tube Assembly ........ Grip Retention Nut .................................................................. and Fin Station Lines ............................................................................................................................................ Main Rotor Blade (Metal).......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Buttock........................................................................................................................................... Swashplate Outer Ring .......... Main Rotor Hub Shield Assembly .......................................................................................................................................................................... General Configuration of UH-1 Helicopter ..................... Water................................................................................. Main Rotor Hub Plate Assembly .......................................................................... Drive Link ..... Strap Fitting .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Damper Wingshaft Splines ........................................................................................................................................................................ Swashplate Inner Ring ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Main Motor Pitch Horn ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Doors..... Composite Main Rotor Blade.... Stabilizer Bar Center Frame ........................... Collective Levers ......................... Main Rotor Blade Bolt .......................................................................................................................................................... Typical Metal Sorting Display ................................................................................................................................... Main Rotor Blade (Metal) .. Damper Lever Arms ..................................................................................................................................................................... Signatures of EDM Notches in Test Block ......................................... Stabilizer Bar Support ................................................................................................................................................................................ Main Rotor Blade (Metal) .............. Scissors Assembly ........................................... Collective Sleeve Assembly ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trunnion ........ Access Panels.........................................TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Title Nondestructive Inspection Symbols ......................... Stabilizer Bar Lever ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Main Rotor Hub Pillow Block .................................................................................

............................................ Retainer ........................................................................................................................................................................................... Threaded Fittings ................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Quill Case ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Tail Rotor Hub Yoke ......................................................................................... Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Spacer ................................................................................................................................................................... Main Driveshaft Outer Couplings ................................................. Tail Rotor Hub Trunnion .......................................................................................... Transmission Case (Top) ............................................................................................................................................................ Tail Rotor Blade (Cracks) .............................. Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Assembly ........................................................................................................................................................ Input Drive Quill Wear Sleeve ................................................................................................................................... Collective Sleeve Bearing Retention .. Fifth Mount Support Fitting .......................................................................................................................................... Adapter Bolt ...................................................................................................... Generator Drive Quill Case ..... Main Driveshaft Inner Couplings ............................................................... Tail Rotor Crosshead .................................................................................................................... Pylon Mount Bolts .............................................................................................................................................................................. Main Driveshaft Engine Adapter ............ Main Driveshaft Clamp Sets ....................................................................................................... Main Driveshaft Grease Retainers .......................................................................... Tail Rotor Blade ............................................................. Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Ring................................................ Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Gear Teeth ...................................................................... Scissors and Sleeve Hub ....................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Adapter Nut ............................................ Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Nut ...... Nut............................................... Main Transmission Case ..................................Continued Title Nut......................................................................................... Main Driveshaft Splined Nuts .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Transmission/Drivetrain Group .... Transmission Support Case .................................................................................................................................................................................. Ring Gear Case ......................................................................................................................... Figure 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-41 2-42 2-43 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 Page 2-72 2-74 2-76 2-78 2-80 2-81 2-83 2-85 2-87 2-89 2-92 2-96 2-98 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-11 3-12 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-20 3-22 3-24 3-27 3-28 3-30 3-31 3-34 3-37 3-39 3-40 3-42 3-44 3-46 3-47 x ................................... Tail Rotor Blade ................ Tail Rotor Hub Grip Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Tail Rotor Drive Quill Bevel Gear Teeth . Lift Link Bushing Hole ........................ Main Driveshaft .................................................

.......... xi Page 3-49 3-50 3-52 3-54 3-56 3-57 3-59 3-61 3-63 3-65 3-66 3-68 3-71 3-72 3-74 3-76 3-77 3-80 3-81 3-83 3-85 3-86 4-3 4-6 4-10 4-12 4-15 4-18 4-20 4-23 4-25 4-28 4-30 4-33 4-35 4-38 4-40 ................................................................ Forward Fuselage Metal Structures . Airframe and Landing Gear Group ....................TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . Aft Landing Gear Attachments .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Hanger Bearing Brace Assembly................. Intermediate Gearbox Sleeve .......................................... Friction Damper Mount Assembly ......................... Aft Fuselage Structural Tube ...................... and Main Beam Cap ................. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Rear Coupling ............................. Lift Beam Cap and Adjacent Structure............................................................................................................................................... Oil Pump Driveshaft ...................................................... Tail Rotor Driveshaft ................................................................................................................................ and Mount Assembly ................................................................................ Tail Rotor Driveshaft Inner (Spherical) Coupling ....................................................................... Tail Rotor Driveshaft Forward Coupling ..................................................... Tail Rotor Gearbox Inner Coupling ....... Oil Jets . Intermediate Gearbox Inner Coupling ................................................................................................. Main Rotor Mast Nut ............................................. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Coupling Shaft ......................................... Crew Door Hinges ............................................................. Clip.........................................................................................................................................Continued Figure 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 Title Friction Damper .... Intermediate Gearbox Outer Coupling .................................. Friction Damper Support............................................................... Intermediate Gearbox Case .................................................................................................. Retaining Clip............................................................................................................................................................. Center Service Deck........................................................................................................................................................................ Anti-Collision Light Mount ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Honeycomb Structures with Metallic Covering ...................................... Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hanger Support Fittings ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Tail Rotor Gearbox Sleeve ........................ Tail Rotor Gearbox Case........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Transmission Lift Link ......................................... Reinforced Floor Mounting Plates and Base Assembly ................................................................... Center Service Deck Panel ....... Transmission and Engine Cowling .. Tail Rotor Gearbox Outer Coupling .............................................................................................................................................................. Intermediate Gearbox Pinion Shaft ........................................................................ Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hangers .............................................................................. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Clamps ....................................................................................................................................................... Honeycomb Structures with Non-Metallic Covering ................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.............. Engine Mount Fittings .................................................................................... Elevator Assembly Support Fittings ............................... Exhaust System Clamp .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Cargo Door Retainers and Retainer Strap ................................. Paratroop Static Line Fitting and Compression Tube ...... Rods............................................................................ Improved Particle Separator (IPS) Air Induction System .................................................................. Tumbuckles.......... Skid Tube Saddles ..........................................................................................................................................Metal Lines and Fittings ................. Air Particle Separator Self-Purging .................................................................... Elevator Horn Assembly .................................................................................... Oil System ...................... Bolts..................................................................................... Intermediate Gearbox Support Installation ...................................................................................................................................................................... Engine Group ... Engine Deck Fittings ...... Pillow Block ....... Inlet Screen Latch Assembly Self-Purging .................. Tailboom Structure .........................................................................................................................................................................................Air Induction System ............................................. and Pins ... Exhaust Tailpipe and Duct Assemblies .....TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................... Mission Operator Seats ........ Landing Gear Cross Tubes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... xii Page 4-42 4-44 4-46 4-49 4-50 4-52 4-54 4-57 4-59 4-61 4-64 4-66 4-68 4-70 4-72 4-74 4-76 4-77 4-80 4-83 4-85 4-86 4-89 4-93 5-2 5-4 5-6 5-8 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-19 ............................ Vertical Fin ........................... Non-Self-Purging Particle Separator .......Continued Figure 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 Title Hinged Panel and Hinges ....................................................................................... Tailboom and Fuselage Attach Fittings ..................................................................................................... Engine Oil Cooler .................... Ninety Degree Gearbox Support Fitting ....................................................................................................... Standard Crew Seat ................................. Tailpipe and Heatshield ............................................................................................................................................. Passenger Step ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Jack and Mooring Fittings ........................................................................................................... Cargo Door ........................................ Rod Ends............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Engine Mounts ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Oil Separator ............ Engine Oil Cooler Turbo Blower .......................Air Induction System .......................................Air Induction System ........................................................................................................................................................ Engine Oil Tank Support ..................... Hinged Panel Assembly Hardware .................................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................... Cambox Assembly ..................... Support Assembly................................Control System Control Tubes ................................................................. Power Lever Control Mounting Brackets and Plates .......................................................................Control Tube ................................................................................. xiii Page 5-20 5-21 5-23 5-25 5-27 5-29 6-4 6-9 6-11 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-27 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-34 6-36 6-38 6-40 6-42 6-44 6-46 6-49 6-51 6-53 6-55 6-56 6-58 ..................................................................................... Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Clevis ................................................................................................Continued Figure 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 Title Engine External Oil Filter Head and Bowl ................................................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) ................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic System Components ............................. Hydraulic Pump Assembly ................... Collective Control System Support ................................................................................................................ Bolt...............................Cyclic Controls ................... Support Assembly.... Cyclic Control System Supports .......................... Collective Control System Bellcrank ......... Relief Valve............................................ Ground Test Connections ........................ Tube and Lever Assembly ................ Flight Control Group ............ Pressure Switch.............................................................................................................................. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Clevis ....... Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Starboard) ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Piston Rod ......................................................... Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Port) ............................................................... Solenoid Valves .................................................................. and Fitting ........... Cyclic Control System Bellcranks and Levers ............................................................................................................................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Collective Control) Tube Assembly ............................................................................................ Collective Control System Lever Assembly ................................ Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ......................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Tube Assembly (Cyclic Control) ...................... Power Lever Torque Tube ......... Adjuster Assembly ......................................................................................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Housing ........................ Collective Control System Control Tubes ................ Power Lever Control Rods .........................................................................................................Sprocket Guard..TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ............................................................... Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Bearing Housing ......................................................... Power Lever Controls ........................................................................................ Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Cyclic Control) Cylinder Caps ........................................................................................................ Cyclic ............................................................................................................................................................................................ Tail Rotor Control Quadrant .............................................................................................................. Mixing Lever Assembly .....................................

..................................................Continued Figure 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 647 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 Title Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ........................... Tail Rotor Control System ...........................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS .................................................... Tail Rotor Cylinder and Support Assembly .....................................Supports .................................. Elevator Control System ....................Levers .................Spacer ...................... Tail Rotor Arm Assemblies ...................Control Nut ................. Tail Rotor Control Tubes ......... Page 6-59 6-60 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-66 6-68 6-70 6-72 6-74 6-76 6-78 6-81 6-83 6-85 6-87 6-90 6-92 6-94 6-97 xiv ................................................................................Bearing Retainer ......................... Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ..................Sprocket ........................................................................................................................................... Tail Rotor Support Assembly .................... Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder Adapter ...........Bellcranks....................................................... and Supports Bearing Replacement ........................................................................................................................................... Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ......... Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ....................................... Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .....................Hardware .........................................................................................................................Piston Rod ........... Elevator Control System . Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ..................... Elevator Control System ....................... Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder .......................................................................................................................................................Bellcranks ..................................................................................................Bellcranks ...................................................................................................................................................Retaining Nut ....... Tail Rotor Control System ...... Levers......... Elevator Control System ......................................................................................... Elevator Control System ...........................Housing ....................... Tail Rotor Bellcrank Assembly ........................Control Tubes ......................................................Levers ......................................................

.............................. Penetrant Procedure (Type I.... Method B) ............... Method D) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Penetrant Procedure-Portable or Field Application (Type I.......................... Method C) ...........................................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 LIST OF TABLES Number 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 2-1 3-1 4-1 5-1 6-1 Title Supporting Technical Documentation ....................................... Equipment Used for NDI .............. and Fairings ................................................................................................ Airframe and Landing Gear Group Inspection Index ............................................................................... Doors. Page 1-3 1-16 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-26 1-38 1-39 2-1 3-1 4-1 5-1 6-1 xv/(xvi blank) ........................................................................................................................................... Penetrant Procedure (Type I........................... Engine Group Inspection Index ...................................................................................................... Flight Control Group Inspection Index ............................................... Method A) ............. Materials Used for NDI .................................... Transmission/Drivetrain Group Inspection Index .................................................................. Access Panels.................................................................... Penetrant Procedure (Type I...... Rotor Group Inspection Index ....................

looking forward. and increase systems operational readiness. However. Detailed acceptance and rejection criteria and instructions for correcting defective conditions are provided in applicable maintenance manuals and are. may dictate more detailed inspections. it must be emphasized that the reliability of the inspection depends upon the proper evaluation of the results obtained from the inspection equipment. 1-1 . Inspection levels and frequency are provided in the inspection requirements manuals. those requirements that are not applicable should be disregarded. and proficient technicians. INTRODUCTION. This manual may pertain to part. The procedures described in this manual are intended to provide instructions for the NDI of locations where service defects would prevent items from performing their designated functions. of a model. This manual contains instructions for accomplishing Nondestructive Inspection (NDI) of the UH-1 helicopter series at the AVUM and AVIM levels. or propulsion. and thorough study of failure data. front and rear. therefore. and of components for serviceability. e. contain requirements applicable to specific equipment that is not installed on an individual model. d. therefore. experienced. skilled. c. f. Local conditions. and clockwise and counterclockwise refer to the helicopter as viewed from the rear (aft). a. not contained in this manual. such as special utilization of climatic environment. such adjectives as left and right. the inspection procedures are designed to direct attention of maintenance personnel to components and areas where service defects can occur. The procedures also provide detailed instructions on the application of NDI in an effort to ensure the serviceability of these areas. hydraulic. experience. Decisions regarding the serviceability of components properly belong with maintenance technicians trained. forward and aft. This manual provides detailed procedures for the application of nondestructive methods to inspect specific areas or locations. b. The inspection requirements are stated in such a manner as to address the following: (1) What part or area is to be inspected? (2) What conditions are to be sought? (3) What NDI method is to be used? (4) How is the method to be performed? In scope. These procedures were developed through review of UH-1 Technical Manual inspection requirements. acceptance and rejection limitations. Commanders and their maintenance officers are expected to exercise their prerogative to increase the frequency and scope of any inspection as required. Procedures shall be reviewed and changes and additions made during the service life of the equipment by continually evaluating the following: performance of the equipment. such as airframe. nor instructions for correcting defective conditions. While using this manual. results of scheduled inspections. decrease inspection time. Also.TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION I INTRODUCTION 1. When this situation is encountered. and comparison with similar installations. it would duplicate existing information and make the task of incorporating the numerous changes to inspection frequency and repair instructions impractical. upper and lower. The goal is to upgrade these requirements wherever possible using NDI methodology to improve inspection quality. and experienced in their particular specialty. or all types and series. Nondestructive inspection methods require application by trained. and may. Other factors involved were maintenance engineering analysis. This manual does not contain inspection level or frequency.

St. All existing NDI callouts were updated. The condition that must be satisfied for accurate inspection is that the inspection equipment be adjusted to obtain the specified response from the set-up or defect standard. Suggested new or revised field developed inspection procedures or changes to this manual are encouraged and should be made by submitting -L a DA Form 2028. ATTN: AMSAT-I-MP. access panels. various NDI method descriptions. Changes and supplements to this manual will be published when necessary to add. This manual provides necessary information to enable qualified personnel to perform NDI on UH-1 helicopter series.1 GENERAL INFORMATION. MO 63120-1798. and a list of publications. Detailed inspection instructions for each main aircraft group are given in Sections II through VI of this manual. acronyms.S. h. inspect. major assemblies. Trained NDI technicians are qualified to make these adjustments. delete. due to the widely varying outputs from different inspection equipment. Army Aviation and Troop Command. Louis. stops. Section I of this manual contains a list of special terms. and rules of safety to be observed during nondestructive inspections. a. Such changes will be based on factual data accumulated as a result of maintenance experience with the equipment. The selection of components in this manual is based on a review of applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Nondestructive Inspection Methods. CAUTION Misinterpretation of indications can result in rejectable parts being accepted and acceptable parts being rejected. information on how to use the manual. New NDI procedures were developed for those parts that required check.TM 1-1520-256-23 g. Equipment settings. Section I also contains general information on the UH-1 helicopter series.. b. Only NDI personnel trained and qualified in accordance with applicable military standards and technical manuals shall perform and interpret nondestructive inspections. handholds. including descriptive data. Additional information on inspection methods can be found in the Technical Manual. when given. use of NDI symbols. are reference points only. walkways. These NDI procedures are directive in nature. abbreviations. TM 55-1500-335-23. and deviation without prior approval is limited to compensation for differences in equipment output. 1-2 . Mail to: U. 1. or change the scope of requirements. or any other NDI related actions. 4300 Goodfellow Blvd. or the specified density reading on radiographic film.

28 ASTM-E1444 DA PAM 738-751 DOD 6050.5 (HMIS) FM 21-11 MIL-STD-410 MIL-STD-453 MIL-STD-2154 MIL-STD-6866 TB MED 502 (DLAM 1000. Liquid Penetrant Occupational and Environmental Health Respiratory Protection Program Surgeon General's Hearing Conservation Criteria Nondestructive Inspection Methods Aircraft Weapons Systems Cleaning and Corrosion Control Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Instructions Army Model UH-1 HN/EH-1 H/X Helicopters Aircraft General Airframe Alighting Gear Power Plant Rotors Drivetrain System 1-3 . Wrought Metals. Ultrasonic. Supporting Technical Documentation Document AR40-14/DLAR 1000. Control and Recording Procedures for Exposure to Ionizing Radiation and Radioactive Materials Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Inspection Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System .2) TB MED 251 TM 55-1500-335-23 TM 1-1500-344-23 TM 55-1520-210-23 (Series) Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Description Medical Services. Process for Inspection.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-1. Radiographic Inspection. Personnel Qualification and Certification Inspection.Aviation (TAMMS-A) Hazardous Materials Information System (HMIS) First Aid for Soldiers Nondestructive Testing.

Continued Document Chapter 7 Chapter 11 TM 55-2840-229-23 (Series) Description Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems Flight Controls Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual Engine.1.1 Special Terms. Model T53-L-13 1. and Acronyms. Abbreviations. Supporting Technical Documentation . AC AVIM AVUM BES BL BS BT C CCW CL CRT CW DAC DC EDM ET F FS FSH FWD HdB H Pos HPF ID IFR INBD IPS IR Alternating Current Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Aviation Unit Maintenance Boom Extension Station Buttock Line Boom Station Bond Testing Method Celsius Counterclockwise Center Line Cathode Ray Tube Clockwise Distance Amplitude Correction Direct Current Electrically Discharged Machined Notches Eddy Current Method Fahrenheit Fuselage Station Full Screen Height Forward Horizontal Decibels (Gain) Horizontal Position High Pass Filter Inside Diameter Instrument Flight Rules Inboard Improved Particle Separator Infrared 1-4 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-1. Assembly.

This manual is divided into six sections as follows: Introduction Rotor Group Transmission/Drivetrain Group Airframe and Landing Gear Group Engine Group Flight Control Group Section I contains the introduction and general information pertaining to the UH-1 helicopter series and Nondestructive Inspections. 1-5 . inspection items are grouped with respect to part location and function. In general.TM 1-1520-256-23 KHz LCD LE LH LPF MAX MHz MIN MT NDI OUTBD P/N PSI PSIG PT RH ROT RT STA TM UT VdB V Pos WL 1. To use the manual.1. Sections II through VI contain detailed inspection procedures for specific items located within each group.2 I II III IV V VI Kilohertz Liquid Crystal Display Leading Edge Left-hand (left side of aircraft aft looking forward) Low Pass Filter Maximum Megahertz Minimum Magnetic Particle Method Nondestructive Inspection Outboard Part Number Pounds per Square Inch Pounds per Square Inch Gauged Fluorescent Penetrant Method Right-hand (right side of aircraft aft looking forward) Rotation Radiographic Method Station Technical Manual Ultrasonic Method Vertical Decibels (Gain) Vertical Position Water Line How to Use This Manual. it is necessary to know the group and name of the inspection item.

EH-1H. The first digit refers to the section of the manual in which the item appears.6 Related Publications. b. utility type helicopters. Turn to the applicable section of the manual covering that group.5 refers to item number 5.1. 1. 1. delta-hinged tail rotor. are grouped in one illustration. The rotor system consists of a two-bladed. fuel cells. and EH-1X are single engine.1.1. If the item is listed.5 Use of Reference Publications. the figure will be indexed using the inspection item code. the corresponding paragraph and figure number will be referenced in the table. In the main figures of each section. The EH-1H and EH-1X are especially configured for electronic countermeasures missions. Refer to the group inspection index table at the beginning of the section.TM 1-1520-256-23 When the group and part name are known: a. b. UH-1H. 1. This code consists of digits separated by dashes. transmission. landing gear. semi-rigid main rotor and a two-bladed. 1. When inspection items. Example: Paragraph 2. Turn to referenced inspection paragraph and figure for detailed inspection information. and tailboom.3 Inspection Item Code.5 is found in Section II. the inspection item is identified as follows: a. NDI symbols representing the type of inspection associated with a part will appear next to the item number on the figure. Army helicopter models UH-1V. The technician shall be responsible for using the applicable referenced TM for the helicopter being inspected. Supporting TMs and reference materials are listed in Table 1-1.7 Description. 1. 1-6 . due to their proximity. The forward section provides support for the cabin. Nondestructive Inspection symbols and their application to detail inspection figures are shown in Figure 1-1. In the text. This manual is applicable to the UH-1 helicopter series. Example: Paragraph 2. The second digit refers to the item number or order that the part procedure occurs in the manual section.1.4 Use of NDI Symbols. The fuselage is all metal construction consisting of the forward section and aft section (tailboom). power plant.1.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-1. Nondestructive Inspection Symbols 1-7 .

Stations.1. Boom extension station lines (BES) are reference lines.8 Configuration. 1. water lines. b. and fin station lines provide an accurate method of locating or installing parts and/or equipment in the airframe (Figure 1-3). except BES lines indicate the distance in inches from a line of origin approximately 17.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. the same as boom station lines. The general configuration of the UH-1 helicopter series is shown in Figure 1-2. Fuselage Station Lines.37 inches forward of the most forward surface of the boom structure. Buttock Lines. Water Lines. c. f.1. Boom Stations indicate the distance in inches from a line of origin. Boom station lines (BS) are reference lines perpendicular to the centerline of the tailboom. Fuselage station lines (FS) are vertical reference lines against the helicopter which are used to locate major assemblies and parts of the structure. which is designated at Buttock Line O. e. Water lines (WL) are horizontal reference lines (viewed from the side or front of helicopter) used to locate major assemblies and parts of the structure by a number indicating the distance in inches from a line of origin located below the lower skin contour and designated as Water Line O.60 inches aft of the most forward nose contour and designated as Station O. BES lines terminate at BES 59.0 inches above the tail rotor gearbox fitting. Boom Extension Station Lines. Fin Station Lines. d. Definitions of the reference lines follows: a. buttock lines. and Fin Station Lines.9 Station. Buttock lines (BL) are vertical reference lines used to locate major assemblies and parts of the structure by a number indicating the distance in inches on each side of the helicopter centerline.5. Water. Buttock. located approximately 7. Fin stations indicate the distance in inches from a line of origin approximately 5.5.5 inches forward of boom station 59. Fin station lines (FS) are reference lines perpendicular to the centerline of the fin. located approximately 59. FS numbers indicate the distance in inches from a line of origin. Boom Station Lines. 1-8 .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-2. General Configuration of UH-1 Helicopter 1-9 .

Station. and Fin Station Lines (Sheet 1 of 2) 1-10 . Water.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-3. Buttock.

and Fin Station Lines (Sheet 2 of 2) 1-11 . Station. Buttock. Water.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-3.

bulkheads. and pitch change links. The fuselage consists of two main sections: the forward section and aft section (tailboom). The vertical fin consists of aluminum alloy forward and aft spars. The forward section employs aluminum alloy and fiberglass skins. 1.1 Rotor Group. employing aluminum and magnesium alloy skins. fuel cells. The main rotor system includes a two-blade. rotor tachometer generator.6:1 speed reduction between the input driveshaft and its output shaft on which the tail rotor is mounted. a stabilizer bar with dampers. The pitch change mechanism controls pitch angle of the tail rotor blades by a pitch change rod mounted through the gearbox. aluminum alloy honeycomb panels. Reinforcing doublers. The forward section construction is made up of a primary structure of two main beams with transverse bulkheads. a swashplate and support. Reinforcing doublers are bonded to the blade in the area of the retention bolt holes.2. hydraulic pump. and cables extending through the tailboom from the quadrant to the pitch change mechanism. semirigid rotor.2. The primary structure provides support for the cabin section. DC generator. a crosshead. Secondary gear trains drive the tail rotor shaft. and nose block extrusion. The hub and blade assembly is mounted on the left side of the tail rotor gearbox and is driven through the gearbox. The tail rotor blades consist of an all metal shell bonded to a honeycomb core. The main rotor blades are either fiberglass composite material or all-metal bonded assemblies. longerons. transmission. honeycomb core.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. and transmission oil pump. Each blade is formed of four major sections: main spar. The forward section includes the landing gear.3 Airframe and Landing Gear Group. and interconnecting linkage. as in auto-rotational descent. The transmission is coupled to the engine by the main driveshaft and provides drive angle change and speed reduction through a train of spiral bevel gears and two-stage planetary gears to drive the main rotor mast. The pitch change mechanism is actuated by control pedals through a series of control tubes. The aft section (tailboom) is a semimonologue structure. aluminum alloy trailing edge extrusion. a hydraulic cylinder.2. 1. NOTE The following paragraphs describe the type of construction and materials used in the manufacture of the major UH-1 helicopter series components. Metal blades and composite blades have stainless strips covering the leading edges for resistance to abrasion. a quadrant. and aluminum alloy ribs and skins. and drag plates are attached on the blade buttock end. Main rotor blades are attached to grips which rotate on yoke spindles to change blade pitch. A universal transmission is used. Six driveshaft sections are incorporated in the power train aft of the transmission tail rotor drive quill. 1. A free wheel clutch in the input drive quill coupling disengages to allow the main rotor and gear train to turn freely when the engine is stopped or is idling below rotor driving speed. The rotor is mounted through two pillow blocks which provide a flapping axis. The tail rotor system consists of the tail rotor hub and blade assembly and the pitch change mechanism. 1-12 .2 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION. The blade leading edge is covered with an abrasive strip to reduce erosion. a scissors and collective sleeve.2 Transmission/Drivetrain Group. The tail rotor gearbox provides a 90°change in direction of drive and 2. trailing edge extrusion. The transmission is located directly ahead of the engine and is suspended by pylon-isolating mounts on structural supports. The rotor systems utilized are the main rotor and controls system and the tail rotor and controls system. landing gear. engine. and stringers. these driveshafts serve as a line between four bearing hanger assemblies on the intermediate gearbox on the tailboom and a tail rotor gearbox on the vertical fin. and titanium work decks and firewalls. and tailboom. grip plates.

tow ring fitting. and Fairings. 1. The power plant installation consists of a shaft turbine engine. Access panels and fairings consist of the access doors. The flight control system consists of the collective pitch control system. elevator control system. cyclic control system (pitch and roll).TM 1-1520-256-23 The landing gear assembly consists of two skid tubes attached on the ends of two arched crosstubes which are secured to the fuselage structure by font padded caps. electrical section. two saddles with sockets for forward and aft crosstubes.-The engine is mounted longitudinally on the helicopter.2. and servicing on the helicopter. a two-stage gas productor turbine that is capable of 1400 horsepower developed at takeoff (military) power rating at sea level and standard day condition. and are used to control flight attitude and direction. Inspection of the helicopter and its components can be done through principal access panels. and openings. combustor assembly. These areas are reinforced to withstand frequent use and are treaded to prevent slipping. actuated by conventional controls.2. inspections. A synchronized elevator is linked into the fore and aft control system at the swashplate. The flight control systems are a straight through system with hydraulic boost. a two piece replaceable shoe along the bottom of the skid tube. covers. and drive system. compressor assembly. WARNING To prevent injury to personnel and damage to helicopter. turbine section. connected to cyclic and tail rotor controls. lubrication system. Electrically operated force trims.4 Engine Group. screens. The flight control systems are mechanical linkages. platforms. 1. 1-13 .6 Access Panels.7 Steps. and Walkways. It is supported by a horizontal titanium deck on the upper aft area of the forward fuselage section. Steps. Principal access and inspection openings are shown in Figure 1-4 and listed in Table 1-2. and walkways aid in doing maintenance. 1. All other surfaces are NO STEP areas. All areas are accessible through left and right side access doors and panels.2. and two eyebolt fittings for mounting ground handling wheels. 1. The engine is broken down into eight areas of maintenance: accessory gearbox assembly.5 Flight Control Group. T 53-L-13B. stand only on designated surfaces.2. Doors. Crosstubes are fitted with bearing straps at fuselage attachment locations. fuel section. and tail rotor (directional) control system. handholds. induce artificial feel and stabilize the control stick and tail rotor control pedals. Each skid tube assembly is fitted with a forward end step. Handholds. a rear end cap.

Doors. and Fairings (Sheet 1 of 2) 1-14 . Access Panels.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 14.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-4. Access Panels. Doors. and Fairings (Sheet 2 of 2) 1-15 .

and Fairings Item No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Door Fairing Door Cowl Door Cowl Cowl Fairing (Upper) Door Fairing (Lower) Cover Cover Cover Cover Fairing Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Cover Plate Door Door Cover Door Door Door Cover Plate Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Item Access To Stowage Transmission Pylon Engine Fire extinguishing Upper engine Lower engine Tailpipe Driveshaft and electrical disconnect Tailpipe Forward tail rotor shaft Aft tail rotor shaft Intermediate gearbox Vertical fin driveshaft Ventral fin General Flight controls Flight controls Electrical controls External power Electronic equipment General Fuel control Lower pylon Cargo Emergency door release Lower window Crew Tail rotor chain Driveshaft General General stowage General Cargo hook mirror General General Engine oil tank Fuel cell Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls General Fuel lines External stores jettison cable 1-16 . Doors. Access Panels.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-2.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-2.Continued Item No. 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Cover Door Door Door Door Door Door Door Cover Plate Cover Plate Doors Cover Cover Cover Cover Cover Item Access To External stores disconnect Fuel lines Ammunition chute Fuel lines Cabin heater duct Fuel lines General General Cabin heater duct Ammunition chute Fuel lines External stores disconnect Fuel lines External stores jettison cable General Cabin heater duct Cabin heater duct Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls Antenna General Flight controls Controls Controls General General Fuel cell Auxiliary fuel tank fittings Gun chute tunnel Fuel fitting Dual collective stick Dual cyclic stick Cyclic stick electrical Hydraulic controls Armament 1-17 . Access Panels. and Fairings . Doors.

Type II and MIL-C-38736 are flammable. CAUTION Do not use cleaning solvent MIL-C-38736 on acrylic lacquer. It is unusual.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. or inappropriate use). Methods used in NDI are those that may be applied to inspect a structure or component to determine its ability to perform its intended function without damaging or causing any change in the characteristics of the structure or component. The most commonly used methods are magnetic particle and liquid penetrant because these two methods are bulk processes that provide 100 percent inspection coverage and they are highly effective. Mark surface with appropriate color aircraft marking pencil. The color of the markings shall contrast with the color of the part. and defects resulting from mechanical damage.3 MARKING AND/OR RECORDING OF INSPECTION RESULTS. but possible. gloves. NOTE Only approved marking pencils listed in Table 1-8 are to be used for temporary marking of indications found during an NDI inspection. as it may soften finish. Protective equipment consisting of goggles. During manufacture. Avoid eye and skin contact or breathing of vapors. fatigue cracks. a. It is important that NDI personnel shall be able " to distinguish between inherent or in-service defects. and respiratory protection is required. WARNING Cleaning solvents P-D-680. MIL-C-85043. Record inspection results as required by the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. d. It follows that nearly all maintenance nondestructive inspection requirements are to locate defects that have developed during service (i. Type II shall be used for removal of markings on acrylic lacquer surfaces. dampened with tap water.e. MIL-C-85043. P-D-680. b.. MIL-P-83953. Remove markings as soon as there is no further need for them with a low-lint cloth.1 Purpose of Nondestructive Inspection (NDI). e. NONDESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION METHODS.. A general knowledge of typical sites for in-service defect occurrence and specific knowledge of the mode and location of previous cracking problems for a particular part are relevant. Wipe the area to be marked with low-lint cleaning cloth. aircraft components are given in-process and final inspections. improper maintenance. It is allowable for a shadow of the marking to remain on the surfaces after removal. 1.4. using a light touch. for NDI personnel to locate defects that are inherent (associated with the production of the material) or related to the manufacturing operations.4 Dry-cleaning solvent. This knowledge will assure that the crack prone areas are identified for inspection and time will not be wasted inspecting areas not subject to in-service cracking. corrosion and corrosion induced cracking. 1-18 . 1. c.

3 Preparation of Helicopter for NDI. Radiographic inspection is used only to examine areas partly or totally hidden. Wear rubber gloves and goggles. painted. another method (backup) should be used to verify if a crack is actually present. A suitable nonabrasive material should be used that is soluble in oil and can be readily removed. a threaded item that may qualify for eddy current inspection may instead require the substitution of an ultrasonic inspection due to accessibility constraints. degreasers. and degree of sensitivity required for the inspection. Some inspection methods. In many cases the method selected will depend primarily on accessibility and practicality. However. NDI method to be performed. Also. safety rules to be observed. 1-19 . All NDI methods require proper cleanliness of the part or area being inspected. For a detailed description of each method and its application. and if the part is plated. Specific instructions peculiar to each part being inspected will be included in the discussion of that inspection item as it is covered in this manual.2 Selecting the NDI Method. do not use removal methods that mechanically abrade the surface of the part to be inspected since this may cause damage or mask over potential surface cracks on the part. type of suspected damage. the type of inspection desired may adversely affect adjacent parts. Use respirators in confined areas per Occupational and Environmental Health Respiratory Protection Program (TB MED 502 (DLAM 1000. refer to the Technical -Manual.4. etc. The cleaning technique to be used will be determined by the type of foreign matter present. or has a protective coating. Factors governing the selection of an inspection method are: accessibility. 1. black oxide. or paint thinners is dangerous. Inspection methods in this manual were selected in order to provide maximum detection sensitivity while requiring a minimum of removal or disassembly. the ultrasonic inspection must be capable of providing equivalent sensitivity. the helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Where one method of inspection (primary) reveals an indication of a crack.2)).TM 1-1520-256-23 This manual summarizes the steps necessary to perform satisfactory inspections. protect adjacent areas from damage.4 Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. For example. Scale and corrosion shall be removed completely before inspection.. surface condition. a crack in a spar cap may not appear clearly on radiographic film due to cloudiness caused by sealant or substructure clutter. and at the same time. and specific safety precautions for each of these methods. the inspection area for NDI. Quite often backup procedures are limited to disassembly and a good visual inspection. Certain cases may arise when another NDI method could be used to prevent needless or complicated disassembly. For example. 1. Have adequate ventilation. phosphate coatings. It includes the preparation of the helicopter.4. portability of equipment. Prior to NDI. such as in the case of engine parts. highlights of each inspection method. it shall be specified in every case where the initial damage indication may not be positive proof that a reject condition exists. or where the suspected damage is internal to the part. TM 55-1500-335-23. A backup eddy current or ultrasonic method could be used for verification and if no indications were observed. will require that small openings and/or oil holes leading to obscure passages or cavities be plugged. 1. WARNING Prolonged breathing of vapor from organic solvents. material composition of part to be inspected.4. Nondestructive Inspection Methods. disassembly would not be necessary. such as paint. Refer to Table 1-1 for the applicable cleaning and corrosion control manual. is required. by their particular nature. If removal of protective coatings. Avoid prolonged skin contact. Whenever a backup method is used.

4. such as bearings and certain nonmetallics. Mechanical Impedance Analysis. c. be sure that equipment is well grounded to prevent electrical hazards. 1-20 . Specific safety instructions for each NDI method used in this manual are contained in the paragraph immediately following the discussion of that method. each application must be considered and reference standards representative of the structure must be evaluated to verify proposed techniques. d. Measures amplitude and phase changes using a swept frequency method to detect unbonds and deeper defects. Measures the effect of generated sound waves and the effect of loading as drive frequency is swept in the range of 2.6 Bond Testing (BT) Method. that may be damaged by contact with the inspection solution or medium. survey the general area in advance. and defects on the inside of composites. and accessibility are all factors in the development of specific inspection procedures. Couplant is required. Resonance. Refer to Figure 1-5. 1. and support equipment. crushed core. Detects unbonds and delaminations by changes in phase and amplitude at probe resonance. The bond testing equipment. Eliminate possible hazards created by loose structures. delaminations. Bond Testing Reference Block Displays. operates by generating a mechanical vibration into the material being tested. Requires no couplant. Because of the many inspection methods and structural configurations.4.4. This method can be used on unbonds.TM 1-1520-256-23 Effective masking shall be used to protect those components. Variables such as skin material and thickness. protruding work stands. Requires no couplant. used in the procedures in this manual. The instrument is capable of determining bad bonds. adhesive type and thickness. 1. If AC power is supplied to equipment. unless the equipment is explosion proof. Pitch Catch Impulse.5 KHz to 10 KHz. 1. unbonds. A number of different methods of NDI can be applied to the many configurations and types of bonded structures that are in use. Bondmaster. Measures amplitude and phase changes using a short burst of energy to detect unbonds. Pitch Catch Swept. WARNING Electrical equipment shall not be operated in areas where combustible gases or vapors may be present. underlying structure. The Bondmaster has the following features: a.1 Bond Testing Equipment. and crushed honeycomb core defects. This equipment is designed to detect flaws in bonded metallic and composite structures. NOTE Inspection of bonded structures shall be performed in accordance with the general applications and techniques in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual. Prior to conducting an NDI inspection. b. Secure loose electric cords and remove toxic fluids or fumes.6. Requires no couplant.5 NDI General Safety Precautions.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-5. Bond Testing Reference Block Displays 1-21 .

the procedure in Table 1-5 will be the one most frequently referred to in this manual. For this reason. Method A. MIL-I-25135.4. This procedure supports the accomplishment of fluorescent penetrant inspection at the AVUM and AVIM levels regardless of geographic location. The area is then wiped or rinsed and a developer is added to draw the fluorescent material from the discontinuity. Refer to the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1 for more detailed instructions. Therefore. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1. a. CAUTION Penetrant-Emulsifier/Remover Combinations (lipophilic/hydrophilic) from one manufacturer may not be mixed or used in conjunction with materials from a different manufacturer. extrusions. This method is effective for detecting surface flaws in forgings. WARNING Electrical equipment shall not be operated in areas where combustible gases or vapors may be present. use a grounded power cord. castings. All four inspections shall be conducted using fluorescent penetrant. There are several ways this energy can be applied to material A and then be analyzed. C. 1. current bond testing equipment incorporates at least one or more of the aforementioned features. A flaw or crack in the part will then become visible under the influence of ultraviolet light (black light). Level 3 or 4 on a removed part or parts attached either to a component or to the helicopter. This method is performed by applying a fluorescent penetrant solution to the inspection area which enters the surface opening of the discontinuity. webs. Table 1-7 lists the equipment and Table 1-8 lists the fluorescent penetrant materials to be used. b. formed sections. B. Turn power OFF before connecting or disconnecting probe cable or power cable. The penetrant method of inspection requires that the surface of the inspection area be thoroughly cleaned. and 1-6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Mechanical vibration energy generated by resonance test equipment can be measured.4. Method C. Sensitivity Level 3 or 4. Because bonded metallic and composite material properties differ substantially. 1-4. 1. or D. Four penetrant procedures are given in Tables 1-3. then displayed on a screen. NOTE Fluorescent penetrant inspections shall be performed in accordance with the general applications and techniques in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual.7 Fluorescent Penetrant (PT) Method. unless the equipment is explosion proof.2 Safety Precautions During Bond Testing. Type I.6. Table 1-5 describes the procedure for using Type I. The basic purpose of fluorescent penetrant inspection is to increase the visible contrast between a discontinuity and its background. 1-5. If instrument is operated using AC power. analyzed by the tester. Paint on the part must be removed before inspection. no one test method will detect flaws in all types of material. 1-22 . and skins of materials.

Developer Application: h. Method A. Inspect: i. Method A) Task a. Perform inspection under black light.4. Penetrant Procedure (Type I. or dipping.4. spraying. Penetrant Dwell: e. The time in the dryer should not exceed the time necessary to completely dry the surface of the parts. Type I. Penetrant Application: d. Extended dwell time may require rewetting of parts. f. The dry developer is sprayed or dusted lightly over the part to be inspected. Materials: 1-23 . Preparation of Part: b. Precleaning Procedure: c. Shake or blow off with low. DO NOT OVERRINSE. oil-free air to remove excess developer. paragraph 1. Allow a minimum of 30 minutes dwell time to a maximum of 240 minutes. Drying Operation: g. The penetrant may be applied by brushing. Rinse the part by waterwash using a low-pressure spray (pressure not to exceed 20 PSI) and a temperature of 16° C to 38°C (60° F to 100° F). The parts should be dried in a circulating air dryer with a temperature range from 38° C to 60° C (100° F to 140° F). Penetrant Removal/Rinse: Description Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Refer to TM 1-1500-344-23.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-3. Level 3 or 4 (water-washable) Penetrant.

Materials: . Then apply the developer.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-4.) 1-24 f. Precleaning Procedure: c. Extended dwell time may require rewetting of parts. Emulsifier Application: Description Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. parts shall be removed from the drying oven as soon as they are dry. The emulsifier may be applied by dipping or spraying. then submerge the part in the developer solution immediately after washing. Allow a minimum of 30 minutes dwell time to a maximum of 240 minutes. Rinse: g. Penetrant Procedure (Type I. The preferred method of application is by dipping the part in the emulsifier. first dry the part in a drying oven at a temperature not to exceed 60° C (140° F) until dry. Method B) Task a. Penetrant Application: d. The penetrant may be applied by brushing. If a dry nonaqueous developer is to be used. Refer to TM 1-1500-344-23. Inspect: i. Penetrant Dwell: e. If an aqueous developer is to be used. paragraph 1. In either case. Follow by drying the part in a drying oven as mentioned above.4. or dipping. Method B. Preparation of Part: b. Level 3 or 4 (post emulsifiable-lypophilic) Penetrant (Refer to Table 1-8. Do not permit emulsifier to remain on the part over 3 minutes. Drying/Developer Operation: h. Type I.4. Perform inspection under black light. Rinse the part by waterwash using a low-pressure spray (pressure not to exceed 40 PSIG) and a temperature of 16° C to 38° C (60° F to 100° F). spraying.

refer to Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1 for dwell time compensations. Allow a minimum of 30 minutes penetrant dwell time. lint-free cloth. Solvent . Penetrant Removal: f.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-5. 1-25 e. In temperature below 16° C (60° F). Preparation of Part: b. Precleaning Procedure: c. Developer Application: g.4. Method C) Task a. Method C. Materials: . apply with brush to prevent overspray. Refer to TM 1-1500-344-23. Perform inspection under black light. Penetrant Dwell: Description Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Observe any obvious bleed-out as developer dries. Penetrant Application: d. Spray a light film of developer over area to be inspected. Inspect: h. In a confined area. Apply penetrant either by brushing or spraying. Penetrant Procedure-Portable or Field Application (Type I. Wipe down with a solvent-moistening cloth. Do not spray cleaner directly onto part.Removable Fluorescent Dye Penetrant (Refer to Table 1-8). Wipe dry with a dry. Type I.4. paragraph 1. Complete inspection after developer dwell time is complete. Check area to be inspected with black light to be sure oil surface penetrant has been removed before applying developer. Level 3 or 4.

Perform inspection under black light. Penetrant Prerinse: Description Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Drying/Developer Operation: i. parts shall be removed from the drying oven as soon as they are dry. DO NOT OVERRINSE. Level 3 or 4 (hydrophilic remover) Penetrant (Refer to Table 1-8). Penetrant Application: d. In either case. paragraph 1. Postrinse Operation: h. Rinse effectiveness should be checked with a black light to ensure complete removal of penetrant remover. Allow a minimum of 30 minutes dwell time to a maximum of 240 minutes. Penetrant Dwell: e. Dwell time shall be kept to an absolute minimum consistent with complete removal of excess penetrant. spraying. then submerge the part in the developer solution immediately after washing. Preparation of Part: b. Penetrant Procedure (Type I. Method D. or dipping. Postrinse part with a water spray at a temperature of 16° C to 38° C (60° F to 100° F) and a spray pressure of 40 PSIG maximum. DO NOT OVERRINSE. Inspect: j. Refer to TM 1-1500-344-23. 1-26 f.4. Prerinse part with a water spray at a temperature of 160° C to 380° C (60° F to 100° F) and a spray pressure of 40 PSIG maximum. Remover Application: g. Precleaning Procedure: c. If a dry nonaqueous developer is to be used. Then apply the developer. Method D) Task a. Follow by drying the part in a drying oven as mentioned above. If an aqueous developer is to be used. Apply a solution as recommended by manufacturer of the specific hydrophilic remover in water to surface of the part. Materials: . first dry the part in a drying oven at a temperature not to exceed 60° C (140° F) until dry.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-6. Type I. Extended dwell times may require rewetting of parts. The penetrant may be applied by brushing.4.

1 Safety Precautions During Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection. Check for traces of fluorescent penetrant materials on skin. WARNING Continual exposure to penetrant inspection material may cause skin irritation.4. clothing. Observe the following when handling cleaners. penetrants. (1) (2) (3) (4) Avoid contact with penetrant inspection materials by wearing neoprene gloves. They can contribute to improper interpretation of defects. Extreme care must be exercised to prevent contacting the housing with any part of the body. or developers. Follow manufacturer's instructions when using black lights and filter.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. b. Wash exposed areas of body with soap and water. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1. emulsifiers. a. Do not wear sunglasses or glasses with light-sensitive lenses during fluorescent penetrant inspections. Wash inside and outside of gloves. Suitable gloves should be worn when exposing hands to the main beam. penetrants. WARNING • • • Black lights generate considerable heat during use. and gloves using a black light source. 1-27 . emulsifier. To prevent injury to eyes. or developers. WARNING Prolonged or repeated inhalation of vapors or powders may result in irritation of mucous membrane areas of the body. c. d. Provide adequate ventilation when handling cleaner.7. Prolonged direct exposure of hands to the filtered black light's main beam may be harmful. do not look directly into black light.

and qualified NDI technicians are available. Store all pressurized spray cans in a cool.4. 1. Refer to TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) for stationary magnetic particle inspection techniques.8 Magnetic Particle (MT) Method. Therefore. This can be easily accomplished by performing cleaning operations under a black light. creating both a fire and health hazard. Exercise extreme caution when handling penetrants that have been heated to a point where some lighter constituents are driven off. e. dry area protected from direct sunlight.8. This dictates equipment that can be used on or off the helicopter at remote sites.4. oil. magnetic particle procedures in this manual use the electromagnetic yokes or probes and hand-held coils as shown in Figure 1-6.2 Controlling Excess Fluorescent Penetrant. provided the part is free from grease. the part shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure all excess penetrant is removed from the part. By controlling the direction of the magnetic flux. All magnetic particle inspections in this manual shall be of the wet continuous method using fluorescent magnetic particles. the inspection is accomplished by inducing a magnetic field in the part and applying a liquid suspension of iron oxide particles to the surface to be inspected. or other surface contaminants. loose scale. The purpose of this manual is to support the accomplishment of NDI at the AVUM and AVIM levels. Avoid exposure of pressurized spray cans to open flames. the lines of magnetic force shall be positioned perpendicular to the crack or flaw. As specified in the procedure. This shall include removing the penetrant from cracks as much as possible before disposition of the part. Magnetic particle is a method of detecting cracks or other flaws on the surface or near the surface of materials that are ferromagnetic.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Temperatures in excess of 49° C (120° F) may cause bursting of pressurized cans and injury to personnel. After fluorescent penetrant inspection.1 Magnetic Particle Inspection Equipment.7. 1-28 .4. This method will produce good indications of discontinuities. NOTE Magnetic particle inspection shall be performed in accordance with the general application and techniques in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual. This equipment is common and readily available to AVUM and AVIM levels. The inspection is accomplished on either assembled or disassembled parts. 1. Considerations involved in the selection of magnetic particle inspection equipment include the type of magnetizing current and the location and nature of the inspection. required shop equipment. 1. f. Stationary magnetic particle equipment can be used if facilities. WARNING Volatile fumes may occur.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-6. Portable Magnetic Particles Inspection Equipment 1-29 .

Suitable gloves should be worn when exposing hands to the main beam. cracks. Portable induced field inspection equipment is generally referred to as either a probe or a yoke.4. axles. or attract ferrous metal chips and dust into bearing surfaces. They induce a strong magnetic field into that portion of a part that lies between the poles or legs. and can be used on or off the helicopter. Follow manufacturer's instructions when using black lights and filter. After demagnetization a magnetic field strength meter shall be used to measure residual fields. 1-30 . the hand-held coil offers a simple.1.8.4. Following magnetic particle inspection of a part.4.1. easy to use. AC provides a very desirable and useful field. however. Prolonged direct exposure of hands to the filtered black light's main beam may be harmful. by turning the probe 90 degrees on the part for the second position.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. Do not wear sunglasses or glasses with light-sensitive lenses during fluorescent magnetic particle inspections. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1. To prevent injury to eyes. Yokes and probes utilizing AC for magnetization also have the additional advantage that they can be used for demagnetization. This limits the magnetization to longitudinal. 1. They are small. and similar small parts.8. Unless this is done properly.2 Safety Precautions During Magnetic Particle Inspections. Extreme care must be exercised to prevent contacting the housing with any part of the body. unnecessary wear on parts. either perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the part.1 Magnetic Yokes and Probes. common to in-service parts due to fatigue and stress cracking. shafts. 1. portable. a. WARNING • • • Black lights generate considerable heat during use. can be detected.8. the residual magnetism may cause adverse influence on instruments. All procedures in this manual use AC. Some yokes and probes have both AC and DC capabilities while others have AC only. Readings in excess of 3 units are not acceptable. b. spindles. It allows for equipment maintenance inspections wherever a coil can be applied around the part. They can contribute to improper interpretation of defects. 1. This must be done prior to returning the part to service or rejecting it as a defective part. do not look directly into black light. Parts are magnetized and demagnetized with the same coil.2 Hand-held Coil. An AC magnetic field is also used when it is necessary to reveal only surface cracks. For longitudinal magnetization of bolts.4. CAUTION Do not operate magnetic particle equipment within 36 inches of aircraft instruments. the residual magnetic field in the part shall be reduced to the lowest possible level. These terms are synonymous and differ due to manufacturer's nomenclature. The vibratory action of AC adds significantly to the magnetic particle mobility enhancing the formation and build-up of larger and sharper indications at discontinuities. convenient method of inspecting for transverse cracks.9 Demagnetization of Inspection Parts.

4. Radiographic inspection is used to detect internal and external structural details of all types of parts and materials. structure alignment. 1. A hazard associated with exposure to ionizing radiation is that serious injury can be inflicted without pain. Turn probe on and withdraw it from the part. image quality indicator. about 24 inches before turning the probe off.9. the initial demagnetizing field shall be higher than.2 Demagnetization Using DC. All parts can be demagnetized using a contour probe in the AC mode. NOTE Radiographic inspection shall be performed in accordance with the general application and techniques in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1. Radiographic inspections are accomplished by passing the X-ray beam through the part or assembly to expose a radiographic film emulsion or other sensitized medium. If AC demagnetization is selected. or other sense of discomfort during the exposure period. Place the probe against the magnetized part with the switch in AC position. Repeat process as necessary. Film processing is a series of operations such as developing. It can sometimes be used in areas otherwise inaccessible to other nondestructive inspections and to verify indications observed by other methods. The processed film shows the structural details of the part by variations in film density.4. This method is used for the inspection of airframe structure for damage. Move it slowly and steadily through the coil to at least 36 inches beyond the end of the coil while current is still flowing.1 Safety Precautions During Radiographic Inspections. and in nearly the same direction as. WARNING Radiation Hazard Assure compliance with all applicable precautions set forth in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) listed in Table 1-1. the field reached during inspection.28. parts that have been circularly magnetized shall be magnetized in the longitudinal direction before being demagnetized. hold the part about 12 inches in front of the coil. and other factors are specified in MIL-STD-453. 1-31 . Whenever possible.1 Demagnetization Using AC. and washing. Radiation protection shall be utilized in accordance with AR40-14/DLAR 1000. Rotate and tumble parts of complex configuration while passing through the coil field. or the part from the probe.10 Radiographic (RT) Method.4. The field shall then be reversed and decreased in magnitude. and foreign object intrusion. If DC demagnetization is selected.9. Requirements for film density. 1. 1. This procedure is limited to stationary equipment. identification. associated with the conversion of the latent image into a stable visible image and will be provided by manual or automatic film processing. fixing. and the process repeated (cycled) until an acceptable low value of residual field is reached. burning.10.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. detection of moisture entrapment.4.

and (3) from fastener holes and bushing/bearing bores. flanges. 1.11 Eddy Current (ET) Method NOTE Eddy current inspections shall be performed in accordance with the general application and techniques in TM 55-2500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual. but probes and techniques for inspection of magnetic materials may differ considerably from those used on nonferromagnetic materials. guide pins. Fixer solution is highly acidic and developer is highly caustic.) can be separated by their characteristic video response and are readily recognized by the trained operator. These instruments display a representation of the impedance plane which illustrates both the magnitude and direction of impedance changes.2 Mixing of Radiographic Film Processing Chemicals. 1. Eddy current method will locate surface cracking on any conductive material. all subsequent readings represent deviations from the null point and have both magnitude and direction. alloy sorting.1 Safety Precautions During Eddy Current Inspection. Careful manipulation of the controls allows the operator to separate the response (deviation from the null point) for lift-off and flaw (geometric) effects. Equipment is standardized on a test block (reference standard) which is constructed of a known material that contains known good areas. etc. The method also has wide application in confirming surface indications found by other methods. Other types of probes are used for wide area scans. The interaction of the probe coils and the part is represented by a "flying spot" (or dot) in the video display. The eddy current method is used for the detection of discontinuities in electrically conductive materials. limits the spread of eddy currents from much beyond the probe's diameter. etc. (2) at pressed-in (interference fit) grease fittings. The response of the equipment (eddy current machine and probe) to the good material is set as the starting point by nulling the equipment on the sound area of the block. Avoid contact with the skin. skin thickness comparisons. The capability and reliability of the eddy current method has been greatly enhanced by the use of modern phase analysis (impedance plane display) instruments used in conjunction with shielded probes. near edges. or crevices. permeability variations. 1-32 . This concentrated electrical field is most useful for scanning around fasteners. Flush any skin contact with water. and into specific small areas. Eddy current has great value for inspecting areas where paint stripping is not desirable and/or impossible. impedance variables (conductivity. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1..4. etc. therefore. By this action.4.4.10. Shielded probes have a cylinder of material which encircles the coil of the probe. conductivity comparisons.11. Exercise extreme care when working with film processing chemicals. and either simulated or actual defects of known size. coating thickness comparisons. probe lift-off. This serves to constrict the probes field and.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. The method is effective when inspecting for discontinuities originating: (1) at the radii of mounting lugs.

Reference blocks. should be considered typical and present a test block display shown in Figure 1-7. Inserts.3 Scanning Fillets and Radii. Using appropriate radius probe. Careful selection of probes and construction of suitable mechanical guides will make possible inspection of problem areas such as sharp edges. the use of non-conductive mechanical guides is useful for shielded and unshielded probes alike. the operator will have separated the response from lift-off and from a flaw by using the test block and manipulating the controls. 1. scan fillets and radii several times in each direction. The probe is then rotated 360 degrees around the hole at each setting until the entire surface of the bore has been inspected. and resins for casting into shapes (epoxy. Additional nulling will be required to reestablish the position of the 'flying spot" with the probe on the part/area to be inspected.4. 1. they become quite innovative in making guides that maintain constant lift-off. plugs. and Edges of Parts. Shielded probes are recommended any time that the pattern the eddy current field is likely to extend out such that it comes in contact with a feature which would mask the response from a defect.11. Instrument settings shall be made with Teflon tape on the probe.11. Such features may include edges.2. 1. phenolic impregnated materials. Manual bolthole inspection probes usually consist of a split 90 degree probe with the exposed shaft inserted in an adjustable collar.4. spacers.11. angles. polyester. An unshielded probe can be used around such features.2. instrument settings. or hot glue). Non-conductive mechanical guides (straight edges.2 Bolthole Inspection. as they are given in this manual. etc. and distance from features which may mask flaw indication. As operators gain experience. 1. are included in each eddy current procedure. the crack response will be essentially similar to the response from the known defect and different from the response from lift-off. These probes are available in federal or commercial catalogs. Instrument settings. and standardization instructions for the eddy current instrument.3 Eddy Current Instrument Standardization. Therefore.4.4. dissimilar materials attached to the test piece.4. The shaft is marked in increments and the collar secured at the desired increment by means of a set screw through the collar. Such stored responses are an invaluable teaching aid. In fact. but the effect of those features must be made constant by keeping the distance between the probe and the feature constant. etc.11.2. unless the equipment is explosion proof.2 Eddy Current Scanning Techniques. and polycarbonate).) 1-33 . fasteners. if used. acrylic. 1. tight radii.) can be used to maintain a constant distance.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Electrical equipment shall not be operated in areas where combustible gases or vapors may be present." Before beginning the inspection. small openings. wood. and areas near potentially masking features.1 Scanning Around Fasteners. Eddy current inspection is performed by moving the probe over and as close as possible to the surface of the area of interest. Common materials for mechanical guides are plastic (polyethylene.11. the impedance of the coil will change and be represented as a movement of the "flying spot. Eddy current inspection equipment and standards required by the procedures in this manual are listed in Table 1-7. If the coil(s) pass over a defect like a crack. Microprocessor controlled instruments have the ability to store responses in memory. (Use Teflon tape (listed in Table 1-8) on the probe to save wear.

Signatures of EDM Notches in Test Block 1-34 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 1-7.

Eddy current sorting will quickly determine if the part is ferromagnetic and should be inspected using the magnetic particle method. For example. a magnesium part that is experiencing severe corrosion is replaced by one made from aluminum. Typically.11. But when there are limited possibilities. Also. should be used to adjust the eddy current equipment for crack inspection/ verification. conductivity and/or permability information may permit proper classification (refer to Figure 1-8). The sorting technique cannot directly identify alloy or even the type of metal. which test block (standard) most closely matches the conductivity of the part and. Electrical conductivity and magnetic permeability are the material characteristics evaluated during this type inspection.4 Sorting Metal Using Eddy Current. and the electrical conductivity of the alloys involved may be sufficiently different to permit verification by a sorting inspection. Typical Metal Sorting Display 1-35 . if the part is nonferromagnetic. Another situation is the requirement to NDI a part to confirm a visual indication where the material is not known and cannot be easily determined. the need for alloy sorting occurs when changes to parts are made to improve performance. eddy current equipment may be used for metal sorting. NOTE Ultrasonic inspection shall be performed in accordance with the general application and techniques in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) and the specific requirements of this technical manual. but made from an alloy having improved strength or corrosion resistance. In both these examples.4. also of aluminum. Another example is the replacement of one aluminum part with another.4. therefore.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. 1.12 Ultrasonic (UT) Method. In addition to the more common usage for crack detection. there may be a need to verify that replacement has been made. Figure 1-8.

The method requires that at least one surface of the part be accessible for transducer contact in the vicinity of the area to be examined.1 Safety Precautions During Ultrasonic Inspection. The inspection is accomplished by inducing the ultrasound into the part by coupling the transducer to the part and picking up reflections of this sound from within the part. Slight adjustment to the settings may be necessary to achieve the desired CRT presentation. instrument settings. d. If instrument is operated using AC power. c. WARNING Electrical equipment shall not be operated in areas where combustible gases or vapors may be present. Use prescribed or equivalent couplant and in sufficient quantity to achieve proper coupling. Illustrations representing typical CRT presentation will. The use of lubricants containing graphite. Reference blocks. The ultrasonic instrument used in ultrasonic inspection procedures described throughout this manual is listed in Table 1-7. 1. as they are given in this manual. If transducer movement is too fast. This method is effective for the inspection of most metals for surface and subsurface damage. include reference signals representing initial pulse. Apply couplant to these contact surfaces and carefully tighten the assembly prior to test.4. Follow safety precautions and instructions contained in this manual and the Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Ultrasonic inspection uses high-frequency sound waves as a probing medium to provide information as to the state of various materials. and standardization instructions for the ultrasonic instrument are included in the individual ultrasonic inspection procedures. a flaw could be passed over without a proper indication. a. silicones. b. 1. the following steps are recommended: a. in most cases.2 Ultrasonic Instrument Standardization. Clean ultrasonic transducer with a low-lint cloth. therefore.12. transducer.4. Clean all contact surfaces when using a wedge or delay block. 1-36 . Apply adequate pressure to keep transducer in contact with part.12. should be considered typical. and/or wedge echoes that have been moved off the scope to make room for relevant indications. b. use a grounded power cord. Because of varied circumstances under which the inspections may be performed. NOTE Scratches or similar surface blemishes remaining on the transducer or wedge may give false indications. Any marked changes in acoustic properties: defect. and glycerines is prohibited. Turn power OFF before connecting or disconnecting transducer cable or power cable. Accessory wedges can be used to provide adequate transducer mating to curved surfaces or to change the angle of the sound beam. Use moderate speed for transducer search pattern. or back surface will reflect sound back to the transducer. unless the equipment is explosion proof. The detected ultrasonic reflections are electronically displayed on a Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) and interpreted for indications of defects. instrument settings. An effective ultrasonic inspection will depend largely upon the proper handling of the transducer. interface. MIL-C-85043 or equivalent.

4.15 Materials Used for NDI. assistance from the next higher maintenance level shall be requested. CAUTION Misinterpretation of indications can result in rejectable parts being accepted and acceptable parts being rejected. Refer to Table 1-7 for a summary of equipment used for NDI in this manual. Equivalent materials may be used unless specified otherwise in inspection procedures.TM 1-1520-256-23 1. Equivalent equipment may be used unless specified otherwise in the inspection procedures.4. etc. 1.13 Acceptance/Rejection Criteria.) are not listed. 1. and accessibility. Common commercial grade materials (cheesecloth. composition. In the event that a final interpretation of an indication cannot be made. Refer to Table 1-8 for a summary of materials used for NDI in this manual. Nondestructive inspection procedures in this manual have been selected to enhance the safety of the aircraft and personnel.14 Equipment Used for NDI.4. Inspection procedures (including primary and backup) have been outlined to enable NDI personnel to perform a reliable inspection of parts with respect to their design. Only NDI personnel trained and qualified in accordance with applicable military standards and technical manuals shall perform and interpret nondestructive inspections. 1-37 . paper.

straight.040 inch thick aluminum skin (refer to Appendix C) Test Block.008.020 inch thick aluminum/fiberglass skin (refer to Appendix C) Test Block. and Manufacturer.040 EDM notches) Reference Block Magnesium (0.040 EDM notches) Reference Block Titanium (0.063 inch thick aluminum skin (refer to Appendix C) Tripod X-Ray Tubehead Stand Signal Appliance Lamp Assembly X-Ray Unit (LPX-160 Water Cooled Digital) Film Processor Magnetic Particle Method Eddy Current Method Ultrasonic Method Bond Testing Method Radiographic Method Note: Refer to Appendix B for Equipment Part Number.008. BNC to microdot Transducer. and 0. 5. Composite Defect Standard #1 Test Block. assembly. Coaxial 6-feet long (1 required) Reference Block Aluminum (0. spring loaded Test Block.020. and 0.008. right angle. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0. Equipment Used for NDI Fluorescent Penetrant Method Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit Black Light UV Kit Black Light Meter Black Light Bulbs Filter UV Yoke and Coil Kit Black Light Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe Magnetometer Eddy Current Inspection Unit Cable Assembly.040 EDM notches) Reference Block . shielded surface 100 KHz-500 KHz 90° 1/2 inch drop Probe. 1-38 . 0. 1/4 x 1/4 inch element Bond Test Inspection Unit Cable Assembly Probe.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-7. 0. and 0. shielded surface 100 KHz-500 KHz Ultrasonic Inspection Unit Cable.0 MHz 60° shear wave.020. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder.020. Composite Defect Standard #3 Test Block. 0. National Stock Number. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0.Block of Six Conductivity Samples Probe.

H P.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-8. 1301 W. Inc. Suite 2. 1413 Frasier St. of Illinois Tool Works Inc. WA 98226 6850-01-157-4348 Bond Test Method Teflon Tape MIL-I-23594 General Service Administration (GSA) 5970-00-812-7387 Radiographic Method M-2 Film. Method C Manufacturer MIL-I-25135 General Service Administration (GSA) 6850-01-703-7406 Magnetic Particle Method Fluorescent Magnetic Inspection Compound 14AM Magnaflux Div. Bldg. IL 60656 6850-00-841-1347 Eddy Current Method Teflon Tape MIL-I-23594 General Service Administration (GSA) 5970-00-812-7387 Ultrasonic Method Couplant. Ultrasonic Ultragel II Sonotech.O. Chicago. Box 2189 Bellingham. 343 State St. NY 14650 1-39 6635-00-412-2071 . Materials Used for NDI P/N or Specification National Stock Number Nomenclature Fluorescent Penetrant Method Type I. Ainsle St. Ready Pack 8 inch x 10 inch 145 7837 Eastman Kodak Co. Rochester.

Protective Manufacturer Eastman Kodak Co. NY 14650 ZZ-G-381 General Service Administration (GSA) Defense Service Administration (DSA) General Service Administration (GSA) General Service Administration (GSA) General Service Administration (GSA) General Service Administration (GSA) General Service Administration (GSA) General Service Administration (GSA) 8415-00-823-7456 Gloves. Surgeon E-008 1615-01-149-8843 Apron. 343 State St.Continued P/N or Specification 145 8926 National Stock Number 6635-00-838-9116 Nomenclature M-2 Film. Ready Pack 14 inch x 17 inch Miscellaneous Materials Gloves. Type II 6850-00-274-5421 Cleaning Solvent MIL-C-38736 6850-00-538-0929 Scotch-Brite.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 1-8. Low-Lint Cleaning MIL-C-85043 7920-00-044-9281 Dry-Cleaning Solvent P-D-680. Type A Temporary Marking Materials Aircraft Marking Pencils (China Marker) L-P-0050 7920-00-659-9175 MIL-P-83953 Yellow General Service Administration (GSA) 7510-00-537-6930 1-40 . Rochester. General Purpose A-A-55063 8415-00-082-6108 Face Shield A-A-1770 4240-00-542-2048 Cloth. Materials Used for NDI .

1-41/(1-42 blank) . MIL-C-85043. Following all magnetic particle inspections.16 Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Upon completion ofthe NDI test and prior to restoration of protective finishes. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. methods used for precleaning are acceptable for post cleaning. b. WARNING Prolonged breathing of vapor from organic solvents.2)). paragraph 1. and subsequent processing of the part. Wipe dry with a clean. contaminant. Wear rubber gloves and goggles. Avoid prolonged skin contact. P-D-680. Have adequate ventilation. This cleaning will vary based upon test method. In many instances.TM 1-1520-256-23 1.4. a. or paint thinners is dangerous. After post cleaning has been performed. the original protective finish or approved alternate must be restored to the part or area by appropriate personnel. Use respirators in confined areas per Occupational and Environmental Health Respiratory Protection Program (TB MED 502 (DLAM 1000. it is necessary to clean off residual inspection materials from the part. low-lint cloth.4.4. clean part by dipping or spraying with dry-cleaning solvent. Type II. or equivalent. Refer to applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. degreasers.

The rotor group inspection items covered in this section are those critical items of the UH-1 helicopter rotor blades.24 Figure Number 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-24 Nomenclature Main Rotor Hub Grip Main Rotor Hub Pillow Block Main Rotor Pitch Horn Main Rotor Drag Brace Assembly Main Rotor Blade Bolt Main Rotor Hub Plate Assembly Grip Retention Nut Main Rotor Hub Shield Assembly Yoke Trunnion Strap Fitting Main Rotor Blade (Metal) Main Rotor Blade (Metal) Main Rotor Blade (Metal) Composite Main Rotor Blade Stabilizer Bar Center Frame Stabilizer Bar Support Stabilizer Bar Lever Stabilizer Bar Tube Assembly Damper Lever Arms Rotor Mast Adapter Set Damper Wingshaft Splines Swashplate Inner Ring . Rotor Group Inspection Index Index Number *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 9 *10 *11 *12 *13 *14 *15 *16 *17 *18 *19 *20 21 *22 23 *24 Inspection Method ET ET ET MT MT ET MT MT MT MT MT ET BT RT BT ET ET ET MT ET ET MT ET 2-1 Paragraph Number 2.19 2.20 2. 2.13 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION II ROTOR GROUP 2.10 2.9 2. GENERAL.16 2.3 2.22 2.6 2.4 2.15 2.14 2.12 2.5 2.2 2.11 2.18 2.17 2.8 2.7 2. Corresponding inspection figures and applicable text paragraphs are listed opposite each inspection item.23 2. rotor head. and components listed in the Rotor Group Inspection Index (Table 2-1).21 2.1 CONTENTS. The index number for each item may be used to locate it in Figure 2-1. Table 2-1.

26 2.25 2. Rotor Group Inspection Index .TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 2-1.41 2.29 2.42 2.37 2.36 2. 2-2 .40 2.38 2. Retainer Nut.33 2.Continued Index Number *25 *26 *27 *28 *29 *30 *31 *32 *33 *34 *35 *36 *37 *38 *39 *40 *41 *42 *43 Inspection Method ET ET ET ET ET MT MT MT MT ET MT PT MT MT MT ET ET BT RT Paragraph Number 2.39 2.35 2.27 2.34 2.31 2. Collective Sleeve Bearing Retention Scissors and Sleeve Hub Tail Rotor Hub Grip Assembly Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Nut Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Ring Adapter Nut Tail Rotor Hub Yoke Tail Rotor Hub Trunnion Tail Rotor Crosshead Tail Rotor Blade Tail Rotor Blade Tail Rotor Blade NOTE: *Indicates Flight Safety Part.32 2.30 2.43 Figure Number 2-25 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-41 2-42 2-43 Nomenclature Swashplate Outer Ring Support Assembly Collective Levers Scissors Assembly Drive Link Collective Sleeve Assembly Nut.28 2.

Rotor Group (Sheet 1 of 2) 2-3 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-1.

Rotor Group (Sheet 2 of 2) 2-4 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-1.

workstands.2. 2.3.69. three-notched aluminum (0.0 .) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. shielded surface.0 . a.2.mid F2 . Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.off 2-5 . Otherwise.200 KHz . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.2 Preparation of Helicopter. shielded surface.5 NDI Equipment Settings. The main rotor hub grip is a component of the main rotor blade retention system. the main rotor hub grip shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. g. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive . 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for ground maintenance. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Eddy Current.3. e. etc.2.2.4. d.2. 2.3 Access.56° .57.2).3. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.2 Defects. (Refer to Appendix B. Not applicable.3. straight.2 MAIN ROTOR HUB GRIP (ET). f. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.008.) a. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor hub grip.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. refer to Table 1-8 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 0.3.4 Preparation of Part.3 Primary Method. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.2.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. corrosion.2. c.2. 2. 2. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. This system transmits the flight control motion to the rotor blades. right angle.020. No cracks are allowed. sites of mechanical damage.1 Description (Figure 2-1. and 0. 2. paragraph 1. If required.

Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Main Rotor Hub Grip 2-6 . Refer to Eddy Current Method. Figure 2-2. a.2. paragraph 1.3.11 and Figure 2-2. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff.80% -20% b. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. b.6 Inspection Procedure. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. Inspect the part.) 2. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.TM 1-1520-256-23 LPF HPF H Pos V Pos -100 -0 .4.040-inch notch in test block. paragraph 1. c. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.4. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.11. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.

2. straight. etc. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.2. No cracks are allowed.008. 2-7 . d. paragraph 1. if removed. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5 System Securing. 2. shielded surface.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3 Access.3 Primary Method. Index No.2 Preparation of Helicopter.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.5 b.3. 2. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. The main rotor hub grip.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. shielded surface. Eddy Current.4 Backup Method. 0.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3.3.3.3. (2). sites of mechanical damage. and 0.2. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. corrosion. refer to Table 1-8 Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.3. Not applicable.3 MAIN ROTOR HUB PILLOW BLOCK (ET).3. None required. (1). The main rotor hub pillow blocks combine with the yoke and a trunnion mounted through them to form a flapping axis. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. e. 2. three-notched aluminum (0.4.3. g. b.3.020.4.2. 2.) a. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor hub pillow block. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4 Preparation of Part. c. right angle.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3). (Refer to Appendix B.3. f. paragraph 1. 2.3.2 Defects. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. If the probes are changed. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2.3. 2. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3. If required. Eddy Current inspection Unit Probe.2. the pillow blocks shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. 2.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. steps 2.2.

040-inch notch in test block.57.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. Main Rotor Hub Pillow Block 2-8 .3. Figure 2-3.11 and Figure 2-3.56° Probe drive . Frequency F1 .4.3.6 Inspection Procedure.3. a.mid LPF . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.200 KHz F2 . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.80% V Pos -20% b. Refer to Eddy Current Method.11.69.100 HPF -0 H Pos .5 NDI Equipment Settings.0 VdB .4.) 2. paragraph 1. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.0 Rot . paragraph 1. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.off HdB . Refer to Eddy Current Method.

sites of mechanical damage. The pillow block.4. The grips. f. Inspect the part. 2. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. Index No.020.4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.3. 2.4.5 b. corrosion. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. straight. the main rotor pitch horn shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4.3. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.3. 2-9 . etc. None required.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. b. If the probes are changed. 2.4.008. if removed. are permitted to rotate about the yoke extension.1 Description (Figure 2-1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4). c.5 System Securing. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3. (Refer to Appendix B. d.3. The main rotor pitch horn is machined from an aluminum alloy forging. 2.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Eddy Current.) a.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3. in turn. g. resulting in the desired blade path. No cracks are allowed. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2. and 0.3 Primary Method. right angle.3. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Not applicable.3. 2. three-notched aluminum (0.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor pitch horn. 2. If required.4. steps 2.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 2. 2.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. 0.4 MAIN ROTOR PITCH HORN (ET).3 Access. refer to Table 1-8 2. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.4 Backup Method.2 Defects. paragraph 1. (1). c. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. (2). Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. e. Forward and aft cyclic input and lateral cyclic inputs are received through pitch horns mounted between the yoke and the trailing edge of the grips. shielded surface. shielded surface. b.

4. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. If the probes are changed. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.200 KHz F2 . personnel injury could result from accidental falls.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 2. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.20% b.69.3. Frequency F1 .11.4.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4. (1). Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.0 VdB .100 HPF -0 H Pos -80% V Pos .040-inch notch in test block.6 Inspection Procedure.4.4 Preparation of Part. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Refer to Eddy Current Method. c.57. b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 Rot .3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff.off HdB .56° Probe drive . Otherwise. 2.4.3.4.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. (2). steps 2. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. workstands.4.3.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Inspect the part. paragraph 1. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.11 and Figure 2-4. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.5 b. paragraph 1. a. a.4. paragraph 1. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.) 2.mid LPF . 2-10 .

2. 2.4. if removed.4 Backup Method.5 System Securing.3.5.4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.5 MAIN ROTOR DRAG BRACE ASSEMBLY (MT).4. (Refer to Appendix B.5. None required.2 Defects. Main Motor Pitch Horn 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-4. 2. No cracks are allowed.) 2-11 . Index No. 2.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3 Primary Method.5). The assembly links the rotor blade drag plate to the main rotor grip. The main rotor drag brace assembly is a steel rod with a threaded steel clevis at each end. 2.3. paragraph 1. The main rotor pitch horn. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor drag brace assembly.5.1 Description (Figure 2-1. Magnetic Particle.3.5. 2. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.

refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.3. d.5.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the drag brace assembly removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.5. paragraph 1. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. b.4.6 Inspection Procedure. Figure 2-5.4.5.5.8. Not applicable. The drag brace assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. refer to Table 1-8 2.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. e. 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Access. 2. c. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-5.4 Preparation of Part. Main Rotor Drag Brace Assembly 2-12 .5.4. f. paragraph 1. 2.

Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. The main rotor drag brace requires installation in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. d.3. 2-13 . paragraph 1. Index No.5. and 4. paragraph 1.2 Defects. d. 2. 2.6.5 System Securing. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Repeat steps a.3 Primary Method.6.8 Demagnetization.6). Magnetic Particle. b.8. 2. None required. Clean the main rotor drag brace assembly thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. c. through e.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Refer to paragraph 1.6. 2.6 MAIN ROTOR BLADE BOLT (MT).1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.3.6.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. f. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.4.5. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.2 and Figure 1-6. f. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.8. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. for positions 2. 2. Refer to paragraph 2. The main rotor blade bolt attaches the rotor blades to the grip assembly. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3.1.) a. 3.4 Backup Method. 2. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.5. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor blade bolt.4. (Refer to Appendix B.16. e.5. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. 2. e. With the switch remaining in the AC position. b. No cracks are allowed.5. c. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.

Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.8. Figure 2-6.6 Inspection Procedure. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. b. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2. The main rotor blade bolt shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the main rotor bolt removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1 4. Main Rotor Blade Bolt 2-14 .6. 2. Not applicable. 2. 2.3.3.6.3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. a.6.4.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.6.3 Access. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. paragraph 1.6. d. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.4 Preparation of Part. c.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 2-6. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.5 NDI Equipment Settings.

right angle.7 MAIN ROTOR HUB PLATE ASSEMBLY (ET). Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2. 7).008. 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. 2.7. etc. With the switch remaining in the AC position. corrosion.7. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.8 Demagnetization. refer to Table 1-8 2. (Refer to Appendix B. e. 2. 0.7.7.3. b. 2.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. 100 KHz-500 KHz.16. and 0.) a.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3.6.3 Access. Clean the main rotor blade bolt thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 2.7. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 2.3.6. g. The plate assembly is attached under the yoke. It provides for the attachment of. paragraph 1.3. 2-15 . Not applicable. and acts as the body for. 2.020.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Eddy Current.6. f.3.7. three-notched aluminum (0. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. shielded surface. the main rotor hub plate assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. c. If required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The main rotor bolt requires installation in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. the main rotor hub grip reservoirs. shielded surface.6. None required.2 Defects. Index No.4.4 Backup Method. paragraph 1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. d. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 2.3.3 Primary Method. straight.5 System Securing. No cracks are allowed. sites of mechanical damage.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor hub plate assembly.2 Preparation of Helicopter.

4.4 Preparation of Part. 2.57.0 VdB .5 b. Refer to Eddy Current Method. steps 2.7. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell.80% V Pos -20% b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.4.7. c. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1.4. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.040-inch notch in test block.3. If the probes are changed. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. b.69. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.7. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.100 HPF -0 H Pos .56° Probe drive .off HdB .200 KHz F2 . (1). Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. Inspect the part. Frequency F1 .3. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. paragraph 1.4.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.11 and Figure 2-7.3.6 Inspection Procedure. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.7.11. Otherwise. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2).7.) 2.5 NDI Equipment Settings.0 Rot . a. workstands.3. 2-16 .3. 2. Refer to Eddy Current Method.mid LPF .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-7. Main Rotor Hub Plate Assembly 2-17 .

The grip retention nut retains the main rotor hub grip to the strap assembly contained within the yoke assembly. etc. 2.8.3 Access. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1. Refer to paragraph 1.3.2 allowed. Magnetic Particle.1 Defects.) a Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b Magnetometer. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.4 Preparation of Part.7. if removed.1 Description (Figure 2-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.8.1. Aircraft Marking Pencil. workstands. corrosion.4. Otherwise.8. sites of mechanical damage. The grip retention nut shall be thoroughly cleaned.4 Backup Method.3.8. Index No.3.8 GRIP RETENTION NUT (MT). 2.4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.7.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. If required. 2. 2.3 2. (Refer to Appendix B. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.8. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4.5 System Securing.3. None required. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.7. NDI Equipment and Materials. 2. 2. Black Light d Fluorescent Magnetic Particles e Consumable Material.2 and Figure 1-6. 8).) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. No cracks are Primary Method. 2.8. 2-18 . This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the grip retention nut.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 f.8. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.3. the grip retention nut shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Not applicable.8. 2. The main rotor hub plate assembly.

Inspect for cracks using the black light.9. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 2:8. No cracks are allowed.16.5 NDI Equipment Settings.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.8. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. None required.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.4 Backup Method.9 MAIN ROTOR HUB SHIELD ASSEMBLY (MT).6 Inspection Procedure. Index No.9. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. The grip retention nut.8 Demagnetization. 2. paragraph 1.4.5 System Securing. 2. 2. 9). Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.3. 2. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 2. if removed.8.8. Clean the grip retention nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 2-8.3.8. a. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3.8. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. b.3. 2. paragraph 1. It provides a dust cover for its internal components.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor hub shield assembly.1 Description (Figure 2-1. Figure 2-8. paragraph 1.8. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. The main rotor hub shield assembly is located just outboard of the yoke. Grip Retention Nut 2-19 . c. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 2. With the switch remaining the AC position.

NDI Equipment and Materials. Magnetic Particle.9.9. The shield assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned.8. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the shield assembly removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. e. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. paragraph 1. b. Refer to paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3.3. Main Rotor Hub Shield Assembly 2-20 . Not applicable.3. 2.1 a. paragraph 1.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. (Refer to Appendix B.8.9.4.9. 2.2 and Figure 1-6. c. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 2-9.9.3 2.3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.4. d. 2.9.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.5 NDI Equipment Settings.1.4 Preparation of Part. 2.9. f.3. Figure 2-9.3. Primary Method.3 Access.4.6 Inspection Procedure. 2. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.

refer to Table 1-8 2.4 Backup Method.10.8 Demagnetization. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 2-21 . b. b. Index No. 2. The shield assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access.10.3.10. e. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 2. paragraph 1.16. Not applicable. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the yoke removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.9. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the yoke. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Defects.9.4.10.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 2. 2. 2.5 System Securing. (Refer to Appendix B.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Primary Method. c. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.10).) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Magnetic Particle. paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.3.1 a. Clean the main rotor hub shield assembly thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.9. The yoke has a machined spindle on each end. NDI Equipment and Materials. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. d. Grips are mounted on each spindle for pitch change of the blades.3. 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Inspect for cracks using the black light.3. c. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.10 YOKE (MT). f.3.2 2.10.10.. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. None required.9.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3 2.

Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.10. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1. The yoke shall be thoroughly cleaned.4.10.3. c.8. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.4.3.4. Inspect for cracks using the black light.6 Inspection Procedure.10. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. e. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. f.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. b. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.10. paragraph 1. for position 2.10.8. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 2.4 Preparation of Part. 2. d.3. Figure 2-10. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Repeat steps a. a. paragraph 1. through e. Yoke 2-22 . Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-10. Refer to paragraph 2.

5 System Securing. 2. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.11).4 Preparation of Part. No cracks are allowed. refer to Table 1-8 2. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.1 a. The trunnion engages splines at the top of the mast and is supported by a cone set and secured by a retaining nut which also serves as mast cap and lifting eye. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 2.3 Access.3.11. The trunnion shall be thoroughly cleaned. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.11. (Refer to Appendix B.11 TRUNNION (MT).11.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 2. f.11.3. 2. c. Magnetic Particle. paragraph 1.16.8 Demagnetization.4. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.4. Clean the yoke thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.10. 2. b. e.2 2.4 Backup Method. 2. d. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-11. Primary Method. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4.8. a. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3.10. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the trunnion. Index No.11. 2.11. paragraph 1.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. Not applicable. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.11. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Defects. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.6 Inspection Procedure.2 Preparation of Helicopter.1 Description (Figure 2-1.11. 2.3. c. paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3. The yoke requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. None required.11. NDI Equipment and Materials.3 2.).TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3. b. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the trunnion removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2-23 .10. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.

2.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. through e.3.3 2.1 Description (Figure 2-1. f. The trunnion requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. 2.11.12.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer 2-24 .3. NDI Equipment and Materials. 2. for position 2.11. Defects. None required. Magnetic Particle. 2. The strap fitting (retention strap fitting) is a machined. Refer to paragraph 2.3.2 allowed. Index No.12).12. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.4 Backup Method. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the strap fitting.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-11. paragraph 1. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.11. It positions the pin which attaches the retention strap.8.12. paragraph 1. 2. Repeat steps a. Trunnion d. e.11.12.8 Demagnetization. b. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.1 a. Clean the trunnion thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. With the switch remaining in the AC position.12 STRAP FITTING (MT). 2.16.11.5 System Securing. No cracks are Primary Method.3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. (Refer to Appendix B. 2. cylindrical part located in the outboard end of the grip assembly.

2 and Figure 1-6.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 c.4.4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. d.5 NDI Equipment Settings.1. paragraph 1.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.12. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-12.4. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the strap fitting removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.12. Refer to paragraph 1. 2.4 Preparation of Part. f.3 Access.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 2. Strap Fitting 2-25 .12. 2.8.3.8. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Not applicable. e.4. 2.3. Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.12.12.6 Inspection Procedure. Figure 2-12. paragraph 1. The strap fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. 2.

g.4.12.3. three-notched aluminum (0.020.16.5 System Securing. 2. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.2 allowed. refer to Table 1-8 2-26 . The outboard four feet is covered with a cobalt abrasive strip.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. f.1 Description (Figure 2-1.13. Clean the strap fitting thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.8 Demagnetization. 2. 13). 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. for positions 2.3. No cracks are Primary Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz. The strap fitting requires installation as required in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main rotor blades. 0.3 Defects.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. (Refer to Appendix B. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.3.12. e. Index No.12. paragraph 1.3. c. d. f. b.008. and 0. has a hole for attachment of rotor tie-down.13 MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (ET). 2.13. and 4. right angle.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. paragraph 1. bonded-assembly attached to the blade grip with a retaining bolt and held in alignment with an adjustable drag brace. straight. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.) a. 2. 2. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Eddy Current. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. None required. shielded surface.13. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. A fitting on the blade tip. 3. A trim tab is provided on the trailing edge for tracking adjustments.12. 2. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 2. An inertia weight is installed in the outboard end of the blade inside the D spar and held in place by screws through the aft side of the spar. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Each main rotor blade is an all-metal.13. Refer to paragraph 2. Repeat steps a.8. c. through e. With the switch remaining in the AC position. b. which is used in the flag tracking procedure. Inspect for cracks using the black light. e. shielded surface. 2. Stainless steel strips cover leading edges for resistance to abrasion.12.4 Backup Method. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.

Not applicable.13.3.6 Inspection Procedure.3. paragraph 1. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.3.mid . horizontal lift-off. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.100 -0 .11 and Figure 2-13. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.) 2. paragraph 1.200 KHz .69. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms.3 Access. 2-27 .2 Preparation of Helicopter. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.040-inch notch in test block.13.57. paragraph 1.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Inspect the part. 2. b.4.off Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. (1) (2) Refer to Eddy Current Method. 2.80% .TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Adjust phase as required to obtain a.13.11.4 Preparation of Part.0 .20% F2 .4.3. . workstands.13. c. 2. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. NDI Equipment Settings. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 a. Otherwise. Set up on test block as follows: Null probe on test block.0 . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.13.4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.56° . Inspection areas are accessible with the main rotor blades installed on the helicopter. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.

2. Stainless steel strips cover leading edges for resistance to abrasion. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. None required. Index No. The outboard four feet is covered with a cobalt abrasive strip. which is used in the flag tracking procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-13.3. System Securing. 2-28 .3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Main Rotor Blade (Metal) NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.3. An inertia weight is installed in the outboard end of the blade inside the D spar and held in place by screws through the aft side of the spar.1 Description (Figure 2-1.3. (2).14 Backup Method. (1).14. None required.5 b. MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (BT).13. steps 2.13. A fitting on the blade tip. paragraph 1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4 2. 2. has a hole for attachment of rotor tie-down. Each main rotor blade is an all-metal bonded assembly attached to the blade grip with a retaining bolt and held in alignment with an adjustable drag brace.13. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2. A trim tab is provided on the trailing edge for tracking adjustments. If the probes are changed. 14).5 2.13.13.

Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder.MID 2-29 .14. Inspection areas are accessible with the main rotor blades installed on the helicopter.14. and make the following adjustments: H Pos V Pos PHASE REF DRIVE .14.4. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster. e.40% -80% -0 .2 Defects.3. Not applicable. This inspection is to verify void indications identified by visual inspection. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded.1 a.3.6. 2. metal honeycomb with skin thickness closest to that of the area to be inspected Teflon Tape.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Bond Test Equipment. refer to Table 1-8 2. Many subdefinitions of voids are given such as lack of adhesive.3 Access.) Bond Test Unit Probe. paragraph 1. gas pocket. c.14. paragraph 1.1.4. 2.14. Primary Method. Otherwise.14. workstands. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. this manual makes no distinction among these. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned. grouping them all under one general term ("void").5 a.3 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.14. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Turn on Bondmaster. However. (Refer to Appendix B. b.3. Do not remove paint. Bond Testing. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. etc. d. 2. b. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. f. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. NDI Equipment and Materials. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block.3. 2.3. press SPCL. misfit. NDI Equipment Settings.4. g.

6 2-14. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response. GAIN. Continue to try phase settings until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction. This setup is very sensitive to thin skinto-core bonding. f. or 270). 2-30 . d. and e. Press SET and select DISPLAY PHASE. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot. By following the steps outlined above. If not. Move probe slowly over the skin and note the slight amplitude change (bounce) as the probe senses alternately the honeycomb cell nodes and cell walls. polyurethane tape bonded over the joints. paragraph 1. Note the video signature for each. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box.6 and inspection areas as shown in Figure NOTE Scarf joints may have taco shell shaped caps. The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup. (See Figure 1-5. adjustments to the FREQ.3. during setup. and ALARM can help to refine the selectivity in locating defects among differing materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 c. Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the test block. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void. e. press NULL. 2.14. Only those joints which have caps require testing. Place probe on the good area of test block and press GOOD PART. a. Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired. NOTE If. press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90. 180. Skin-to-Honeycomb Voids. and repeat steps d. Refer to Bond Test Method. or no covers at all.4. Inspection Procedure. Do this several times while / moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area.) Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block. the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part. The Bondmaster is programmed to automatically set test parameters to a start-up or initial bond test. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART. Place probe on the main rotor blade in location where test for skin-to-honeycomb bond separation is desired and press NULL. g.

Main Rotor Blade (Metal) 2-31 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-14.

Water in honeycomb cores.3. Index No.14.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE The basic setup provided above also selects a frequency that provides a satisfactory inspection for voids associated with skin-to-spar. compare similar areas. Radiography. For example. 2. which is used in the flag tracking procedure. Also.15 Backup Method.3 Defects. has a hole for attachment of rotor tie-down.15. 15). Stainless steel strips cover leading edges for resistance to abrasion. Each main rotor blade is an all-metal. 2. None required.14. or check another blade in the same area.4 2. When inspecting these areas.3. doubler-to-doubler and doubler-toskin. and trim tab bonding. A localized phase and amplitude shift similar to the test block indicates a void.15. Use the NULL and GAIN adjustments to reset the ACTIVE screen for the areas to be inspected (do not go back to SET mode).2 2. 2-32 . MAIN ROTOR BLADE (METAL) (RT). An inertia weight is installed in the outboard end of the blade inside the D spar and held in place by screws through the aft side of the spar. the transitions at the spar-to-honeycomb and the honeycomb-to-trailing edge strip are easily detected. adjust the NULL and GAIN and move the probe carefully along the transition using a straight edge or other guide.1 Description (Figure 9-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Observe that when moving the probe chordwise from the spar to the trailing edge. 2. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals. paragraph 1. b. check front and back of the blade in the same area. Mark and record the inspection results as required by NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids.5 2.14. A fitting on the blade tip. Primary Method. A trim tab is provided on the trailing edge for tracking adjustments. None required. The outboard four feet is covered with a cobalt abrasive strip.15. System Securing. bonded assembly attached to the blade grip with a retaining bolt and held in alignment with an adjustable drag brace. skin-to-trailing edge. 2. to check for spar to skin voids.

(Refer to Appendix B.15. Inspect designated areas of the main rotor blade. b. inspection data.15. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the main rotor blade removed. paragraph 1. NDI Equipment and Materials. in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.15. The main rotor blade (metal) shall be thoroughly cleaned.) X-ray unit Tripod. 2.10.4. Equipment settings. if necessary. b. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 2.15.15. e. d. refer to Table 1-8 2.1 a.6 a.3.5 a. Refer to Radiographic Method. or other sense of discomfort during the exposure period. WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms.3.3 Access. burning.3. and arrangement for each exposure are given in Figure 2-15. c. 2-33 . Position X-ray tubehead for exposure number 1. workstands. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.2 Preparation of Helicopter. d. Radiation protection shall be utilized in accordance with AR40-14/DLAR 1000. b.1.4. Inspection Procedure. X-ray tubehead stand Film Processor Film. Set X-ray unit to the values given in the Radiographic Inspection Data chart for exposure number 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Radiation Hazard Assure compliance with all applicable safety precautions set forth in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) listed in Table 1. Inspection areas are accessible with the main rotor blades installed on the helicopter. c. Ready Pack 8 inch x 10 inch Marking Material. Make exposure number 1.3. e.28.4 Preparation of Part.3. 2.15. paragraph 1. Otherwise. Remove exposed film.3. NDI Equipment Settings.4. A hazard associated with exposure to ionizing radiation is that serious injury can be inflicted without pain. 2. Not applicable. 2. Position film and desired nameplate data for exposure number 1.

Main Rotor Blade (Metal) (Sheet 1 of 2) 2-34 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-15.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-15. Main Rotor Blade (Metal) (Sheet 2 of 2) 2-35 .

16. The main rotor blade. 2.15. Index No. Many subdefinitions of voids are given such as lack of adhesive. and are encased in an outer torque wrap of unidirectional fiber that is +/-45 degrees to the span. This inspection is to verify void indications identified by visual inspection. The leading edge of the blade is protected from erosion with three nonmetallic abrasion strips. (Refer to Appendix B. Bond Testing. d. polyurethane.1. Mark and record the inspection results as necessary per paragraph 1.3 2.3. Repeat inspection procedure (steps a. 2. etc.4. 2.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 Description (Figure 2-1. Composite Defect Standard #1 Teflon Tape. grouping them all under one general term ("void").16. c. D-shaped structure. 2. g.1 a. b. 2.2 Defects.3.16. Primary Method. The afterbody skins consist of E-TYPE fiberglass material in an epoxy matrix. if removed. constructed of S-2 fiberglass in an epoxy matrix.15.16.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 f. None required.16. paragraph 1.2 and as shown in Figure 2-15.5 System Securing. 2. Each complete main rotor blade is comprised of composite materials and consists of a front spar and after-body skins supported by a nonmetallic honeycomb core and a trailing edge strip. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1 -1. The blade is protected from lightning-strike damage by a copper-filled.15.3. Inspection areas are accessible with the rotor blades on the helicopter. Process and interpret film for defects as noted in paragraph 2. refer to Table 1-8 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. misfit. gas pocket.16. However. The leading edge of the outboard abrasion strip is covered with a nickel rain guard strip. 16). conductive paint coating. The fibers are unidirectional. NDI Equipment and Materials. Internal weights are used for static balance for interchangeability. above) for each exposure. this manual makes no distinction among these. 2. 2-36 .16 COMPOSITE MAIN ROTOR BLADE (BT).) Bond Test Unit Probe.15. g. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block.4 Backup Method. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded. The spar is a filament-wound. The main rotor blade shall be cleaned as necessary. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. through e. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. oriented spanwise. e.

Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time.3 Access. and make the following adjustments: H Pos V Pos PHASE REF DRIVE c. during setup. press SPCL. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. or 270). press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90. WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. b. Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder. Do this several times while moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area. Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas. Note the video signature for each. instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box. Place probe on the good area of test block and press GOOD PART. 2.6.80% -0 . (See Figure 1-5.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. NDI Equipment Settings. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. d.5 a.MID Press SET and select DISPLAY . Turn on Bondmaster.16.40% . and repeat steps d.4 Preparation of Part. Otherwise.3. .180. Refer to Bond Test Equipment. Continue to try phase settings until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction. 2-37 .) Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the test block. paragraph 1. 2. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster. e.1.4. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART. and e. Not applicable.16. NOTE If.3.PHASE.4. paragraph 1.16.4. the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. workstands.

adjust the NULL and GAIN and move the probe carefully along the transition using a straight edge or other guide. This setup is very sensitive to thin skinto-core bonding.3. When inspecting these areas. Skin-to-Honeycomb Voids.3. adjustments to the FREQ. to check for spar to skin voids. The Bondmaster is programmed to automatically set test parameters to a start-up or initial bond test. None required. Move probe slowly over the blade and note the slight amplitude change (bounce) as the probe senses alternately the honeycomb cell nodes and cell walls.16.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot.16. and +-¼ 3 ALARM can help to refine the selectivity in locating defects among differing composite materials. check front and back of the blade in the same area. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN. doubler-to-doubler and doublerto-skin. Use the NULL and GAIN adjustments to reset the ACTIVE screen for the areas to be inspected (do not go back to SET mode). 2. Observe that when moving the probe chordwise from the spar to the trailing edge.4 2. Also. Refer to Bond Test Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 f.4.16. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response. Inspection Procedure.5 Backup Method. the transitions at the spar-to-honeycomb and the honeycomb-to-trailing edge strip are easily detected. If not. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void.6 and inspection areas as shown in Figure a. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals. Place probe on the main rotor blade in location where test for skin-to-honeycomb bond separation is desired and press NULL. The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup. 2. System Securing. and trim tab bonding. paragraph 1. By following the steps outlined above. A localized phase and amplitude shift similar to the test block indicates a void. GAIN. b.16. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. or check another blade in the same area. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. compare similar areas. paragraph 1. skin-to-trailing edge. press NULL.6 2-16. None required. 2-38 .3. For example. Mark and record the inspection results as required by NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired. 2. NOTE The basic setup provided above also selects a frequency that provide a satisfactory inspection for voids associated with skin-to-spar. g.

Composite Main Rotor Blade 2-39 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-16.

3. g.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.17. corrosion. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. paragraph 1. The stabilizer bar assembly is a weighted rotating unit mounted above and across the main rotor on supports bolted to the rotor hub trunnion. 2. (Refer to Appendix B. b. workstands. The stabilizer bar center frame constitutes the major framing mechanism which attaches the weights to the trunnion. shielded surface.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.020.008. shielded surface. Primary Method.17. Not applicable.1 a. Each side of the bar frame. 0. 2.17). etc. NDI Equipment and Materials. Otherwise.3.3 Access.17. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.17. 100 KHz-500 KHz. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. d. straight.17. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Defects can occur anywhere the stabilizer bar center frames. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. which constitutes the stabilizer bar center frame. pitch horn.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. is connected through a control tube to a damper on the mast. e. 2.17.2 Defects. refer to Table 1-8 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.1 Description (Figure 2-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. and scissors lever.17 STABILIZER BAR CENTER FRAME (ET). sites of mechanical damage.3. Index No. 2. the stabilizer bar center frame shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. 90" 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.3.4. If required. right angle. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Eddy Current.3 2. f. 2-40 . 2.4 Preparation of Part. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. c. Mixing levers of the bar are connected to the main rotor control linkage by control tubes from scissors levers and by pitch links to pitch horns of the rotor hub. three notched aluminum (0. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms.4. No cracks are allowed. 0.17.

3.17.17.4. paragraph 1. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. (1).5 a. NDI Equipment Settings. The stabilizer bar center frame. refer to paragraph 1.17. 2.17. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block. paragraph 1.17. if removed. steps 2. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.5 b. If the probes are changed. (2).7. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. c.040 inch notch in test block.) 2.4 Mark and record the inspection results as required by Backup Method.off Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Refer to Eddy Current Method.11.57. Fluorescent Penetrant. -200 KHz .11 and Figure 2-17. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 -69.3. 2-41 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.3.3. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. Refer to Eddy Current Method.17. b.6 a.17.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Place probe on part in the inspection locations and null.5 System Securing. Inspect the part. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.4.0 -56° -mid -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 . Inspection Procedure.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3. 2. paragraph 1.4.3.

Stabilizer Bar Center Frame 2-42 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-17.

Otherwise. e. Eddy Current. b. Not applicable.3. and 0.18. If required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Defects. 900 1/2 inch dropCable Assembly Reference Block.18 STABILIZER BAR SUPPORT (ET). Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell.18. 2-43 . Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the support. 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4 Preparation of Part.2 2. 2.18.18. NDI Equipment and Materials. corrosion.1 Description (Figure 2-1. (Refer to Appendix B.18.008.3 2.18. refer to Table 1-8 2.3 Access.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. g.3. NDI Equipment Settings. straight. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3. right angle. The stabilizer bar supports are mounted to the sides of the trunnion. the stabilizer bar support shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 2. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 0. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.020.3.18. 2. Primary Method. three-notched aluminum (0. The stabilizer bar support is used to locate and hold the stabilizer bar. d.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. sheilded surface.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.18.1 a. Index No.4. f. paragraph 1. shielded surface.5 a. sites of mechanical damage. No cracks are allowed. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.3.4.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. c. 100 KHz-500 KHz. etc.18). workstands.

5 b.0 . c.3. paragraph 1. horizontal lift-off. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.57. Stabilizer Bar Support 2-44 . Refer to Eddy Current Method. Inspect the part.18.18.TM 1-1520-256-23 Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.3.11. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.6 Inspection Procedure.) 2.56" . If the probes are changed. (2). NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.0 . and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1.80% -20% F2 .mid . (1). (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.200 KHz .4. steps 2. .040-inch notch in test block. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block. Figure 2-18. Adjust phase as required to obtain a.3.4. b.100 -0 .69.18. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11 and Figure 2-18.

2. 2. and 0. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. corrosion.19.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4 Preparation of Part. paragraph 1.19.4 TM 1-1520-256-23 Mark and record the inspection results as required by Backup Method. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Fluorescent Penetrant.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 2.3 Access. g.2 2. if removed. If required. straight. e. Eddy Current. Index No.19 STABILIZER BAR LEVER (ET). NDI Equipment and Materials.7. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the lever.3.19. (Refer to Appendix B. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.4. shielded surface. 2.19.4. 2.18.19.3. refer to paragraph 1.3. 0. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 2-45 . f. d. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Primary Method.3. sites of mechanical damage. No cracks are allowed.3 2.18.008.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 System Securing. Defects. The stabilizer bar support. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Not applicable. refer to Table 1-8 2.020. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz.1 a.18. paragraph 1.19.19).) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. three-notched aluminum (0. b. right angle. etc. Otherwise.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2.3.4. the stabilizer bar lever shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. workstands.2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.19. The stabilizer bar lever is used to attach the stabilizer bar center frames to the pitch links and to the stabilizer bar control tubes. shielded surface. c.

0 .69.11. Stabilizer Bar Lever 2-46 . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.040-inch notch in test block.80% -20% F2 .57. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block.4. . Figure 2-19.6 Inspection Procedure.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.5 a.100 -0 .) 2. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.56" . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.4.11 and Figure 2-19.0 .200 KHz . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell.19. paragraph 1.mid .19. NDI Equipment Settings. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1.off Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.

NDI Equipment and Materials. Not applicable.1 Description Figure 2-1. (2).3. 2. (1). 2.20). refer to Table 1-8 2.5 b.19. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. No cracks are Primary Method. b.3.a. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. c.20. f.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.19. 2. paragraph 1.19. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 2.20.5 System Securing. b.20.3.4 Mark and record the inspection results as required by Backup Method. corrosion.20. horizontal lift-off.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3 2.3. If the probes are changed. 2-47 . If required. refer to paragraph 1.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the stabilizer bar tube assembly. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 2. The stabilizer bar tubes have weights on the end that can adjust to balance the entire stabilizer bar assembly. Fluorescent Penetrant. Magnetic Particle.3. Defects. e.20 STABILIZER-BAR TUBE ASSEMBLY (MT). requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.19. steps 2.3 Access. d.1 a.2 Preparation of Helicopter.19. 2. Index No. the stabilizer bar tube shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. NOTE TM 1-1520-256-23 Adjust phase as required to obtain Either probe identified in paragraph 2. etc.20. 2.4. Inspect the part. sites of mechanical damage.2 allowed.20.7. (Refer to Appendix B. if removed. c. The stabilizer bar lever. 2.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.

Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. for positions 2 and 3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Inspect for cracks using the black light. b. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.4 Preparation of Part.3.4. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-20. e. c.5 NDI Equipment Settings.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.6 Inspection Procedure. 2.4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. f. Repeat steps a. Otherwise.8.3.8.3. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2.20.4.20.3. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. a. through e. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. paragraph 1. workstands. The stabilizer bar tubes shall be thoroughly cleaned.20. Refer to paragraph 2. paragraph 1. 2. Stabilizer Bar Tube Assembly 2-48 . Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. d.20. Figure 2-20.

020. three-notched aluminum (0. e. Eddy Current. Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.21 DAMPER LEVER ARMS (ET). Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.16. Index No.3 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. NDI Equipment and Materials. right angle.20. being present for required stiffness of action.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 2.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the damper lever arms.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 2. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.20.1 a. shielded surface. c. If required. Dampers are nonadjustable. and 0. 2-49 . d. b.3 Access.21. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.1 Description (Figure 2-1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.20. g. 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.4.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.21. corrosion.3.7 1. sites of mechanical damage. Defects. etc.2 allowed. None required. the damper lever arms shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f. 2. Not applicable. 2. refer to Table 1-8 2. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. (Refer to Appendix B.008.21.3. 2. Mark and record inspection results as required by paragraph 2. shielded surface.21. Two rotary viscous-type dampers are mounted on adapters which are attached on mast splines below the main rotor. The stabilizer bar tube. Levers on damper wingshafts are connected by control tubes to each side of the stabilizer bar frame.8 Demagnetization. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3.21.5 System Securing. 21).3. No cracks are Primary Method. Clean the stabilizer bar tube thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. if removed. 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3. paragraph 1.21. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.20. straight. 0.4 Backup Method.

.0 . b.040-inch notch in test block.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.21.21. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.5 b.69. (2). or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 2.200 KHz .4.21.4.) 2.3. Otherwise.0 . paragraph 1.4 Preparation of Part.off Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.21.57. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.3. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. steps 2.3. workstands. Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1. Inspect the part. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.5 a. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.6 a. Refer to Eddy Current Method. 2.4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block. paragraph 1.20% F2 .TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.100 -0 .3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. 2-50 .56° . If the probes are changed. (1).80% .11 and Figure 2-21. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. c. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.11.21.mid . NDI Equipment Settings.

22). This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the rotor mast adapter set. 2.1 Description (Figure 2-1.5 System Securing. Primary Method. d. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.21. No cracks are allowed. (Refer to Appendix B. if removed. Damper Lever Arms 2. shielded surface. The damper levers. straight. paragraph 1. 2.3.21. Index No. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.22 ROTOR MAST ADAPTER SET (ET).3. 2.2 Defects. NDI Equipment and Materials. Eddy Current. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2.21. b. 2.1 a. shielded surface.22. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly 2-51 . 100 KHz-500 KHz. right angle.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-21.3 2.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 2. None required. The rotor mast adapter set mounts the damper assemblies to the rotor mast.22.22.3. c.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4 Backup Method.22.

mid LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. corrosion. Refer to Eddy Current Method.008. WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. If required. or other approved locally procured stands . 0.100 -0 . Reference Block. f. Not applicable. g.6 Inspection Procedure. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.69. the rotor mast adapter set shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Inspect the part. 2.040-inch notch in test block.3.22. b.22.0 . paragraph 1. three-notched aluminum (0.4.and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 2-52 . workstands. Refer to Eddy Current Method. NDI Equipment Settings. horizontal lift-off. c. and 0. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.4. etc. 2. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. refer to Table 1-8 2.4.3.22.020.22.3 Access. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.) 2.56° . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Otherwise.80% -20% F2 . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. . (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.22.off Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive . sites of mechanical damage.200 KHz .11 and Figure 2-22. paragraph 1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.11.5 a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block.3. 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Adjust phase as required to obtain a.4. paragraph 1. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eIl. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.0 .3.57.3.4 Preparation of Part.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.TM 1-1520-256-23 e.

2. (1). None required.23.22. No cracks are allowed. The damper wingshaft splines connect to and rotate the damper lever arms. If the probes are changed. The rotor mast adapter set.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-22.22. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.22. Magnetic Particle.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3. 2. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 2. Index No. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.3. if removed. They are splined shafts emanating from the dampers themselves.3 Primary Method.3. (2). (Refer to Appendix B.23 DAMPER WINGSHAFT SPLINES (MT).5 b. 2.22.) 2-53 .1 NDI Equipment and Materials. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the damper wingshaft splines.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3.23.23. Rotor Mast Adapter Set NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.22.5 System Securing.23).4 Backup Method. 2.23.2 Defects.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2. 2. paragraph 1. 2. steps 2.

Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4. Not applicable.3.8. paragraph 1. Damper Wingshaft Splines 2-54 .23. 2. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 2.23.23. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2. The damper assembly wingshaft splines shall be thoroughly cleaned.23. c. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.4. e. d.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Figure 2-23.4 Preparation of Part. f. paragraph 1. b.3 Access.3. refer to Table 1-8 2.3.3. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 2-23.23. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the damper assemblies removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.

refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The control unit transmits movements from the cyclic and collective control systems mounted in the cabin and fuselage to linkages which rotate with the main rotor. Clean the damper wingshaft splines thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. b. The swashplate is mounted on a universal support.23. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3. None required.24. 2. No cracks are allowed.3.1 Description (Figure 2-1. paragraph 1. 2.23. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. and 0. Index No. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the swashplate inner ring. for position 2.5 System Securing. refer to Table 1-8 2-55 .7 1. Primary Method. 2. Mark and record inspection results as required by paragraph d. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. and provides tilt related to the position of cyclic control stick.3. The swashplate and support assembly and a scissors and sleeve assembly are installed together.008. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 2.3 2. The damper assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method. f. Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.23.24. 2.3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 2. c.020. e.24. f. as actuated by the collective control stick. 2. e. Eddy Current. b. 100 KHz-500 KHz.24.2 Defects. through e.4. straight.8 Demagnetization. Rotate 90 degrees and repeat steps a.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. NDI Equipment and Materials. c. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. three-notched aluminum (0.3. right angle. 0. (Refer to Appendix B.24 SWASHPLATE INNER RING (ET).1 a. The collective sleeve moves vertically within the swashplate support. Inspect for cracks using the black light.16. g.24). The combined effect on the scissor levers and upper linkage determine the main rotor lift and directional control. d. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 2.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.23.23.8. Refer to paragraph 2. shielded surface. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. mounted around the mast at the top of the transmission. shielded surface. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. With the switch remaining in the AC position.

Inspect the part.3.57.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain a. etc.4.4.) 2. Il a.69. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. the inner ring shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access. horizontal lift-off. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Not applicable.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Frequency F1 . workstands. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. c. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block.0 VdB .80% V Pos -20% b.24.100 HPF -0 H Pos . Refer to Eddy Current Method.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.24. corrosion. paragraph 1. b.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.24. paragraph 1.0 Rot -56° Probe drive . If required.24.4. paragraph 1.11 and Figure 2-24.200 KHz F2 .3.11. 2-56 . WARNING Maintenance Platforms / Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 2. sites of mechanical damage.24. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e .6 Inspection Procedure.off HdB . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.mid LPF .4 Preparation of Part.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.040-inch notch in test block. 2. Otherwise. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.

2.25. (2).3. If the probes are changed. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the swashplate outer ring.4 Backup Method. Swashplate Inner Ring NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.24.24.5 System Securing.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. transmits pitch control to the main rotor blades.25. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. through linkage.24. steps 2.25 SWASHPLATE OUTER RING (ET). 2. The outer ring. (1).24.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. if removed.5 b. Index No. The swashplate outer ring is attached to the swashplate. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2-57 . The swashplate inner ring. None required.3.24. 2.2 Defects. 25). 2. 2. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-24. No cracks are allowed.

Eddy Current. 2.008. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.25.5 NDI Equipment Settings. If required. refer to Table 1-8 g. 900 1/2 inch drop d. Cable Assembly e. 100 KHz-500 KHz c.0 . 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz.200 KHz . 2.0 .2 Preparation of Helicopter. Aircraft Marking Pencil. sites of mechanical damage. 2.mid . paragraph 1.25.100 -0 . straight. Otherwise. Reference Block. Eddy Current Inspection Unit b. three-notched aluminum (0. workstands. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.off 2-58 .25. Teflon Tape. the outer ring shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. WARNING Maintenance Platform/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms.3 Primary Method.3. refer to Table 1-8 2. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .3. (Refer to Appendix B. etc.020.80% -20% F2 . or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. shielded surface. Probe. corrosion.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9e .3. right angle.56° . 0.3.25. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. Not applicable. and 0.040 EDM notches) f.) a. shielded surface.57.69.3 Access. II a. Probe.25.4 Preparation of Part.25. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.

11 and Figure 2-25.11. If the probes are changed. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. a. paragraph 1. paragraph 1. Swashplate Outer Ring 2-59 .1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3.4. steps 2.25.) 2. c.4.040-inch notch in test block.25. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.25. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. (1). Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.6 Inspection Procedure. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.5 b. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. (2). b. Figure 2-25. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Inspect the part.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 b.

90°1/2 inch drop d. 2.26. 100 KHz-500 KHz. Reference Block.4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. shielded surface.008.25.040 EDM notches) f. refer to Table 1-8 g.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 100 KHz-500 KHz c. the support assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.26 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (ET). and 0.020. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. The swashplate outer ring.25. The support assembly supports the swashplate and is the attach point for the inner ring.3.26. corrosion. Probe.5 System Securing.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. Eddy Current. Cable Assembly e. three-notched aluminum (0. None required. Probe. 2. Eddy Current Inspection Unit b. Not applicable. 2. 2-60 .26.4. No cracks are allowed. (Refer to Appendix B.4 Preparation of Part.25.1 Description (Figure 2-1.3. Index No. right angle.4 Backup Method.26. 2. If required. refer to Table 1-8 2. 2. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. if removed.3 Primary Method. shielded surface.3. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 2. 26).5 NDI Equipment Settings. 0.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.2 Preparation of Helicopter.) a. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.26. workstands. straight. Teflon Tape.26. Aircraft Marking Pencil. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 2.3.26. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. sites of mechanical damage. 2.2 Defects. 2. Otherwise.26.3. etc. 2. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the support assembly.3 Access.

11 and Figure 2-26.) 2.57.3.mid .80% -20% F2 . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.11. Refer to Eddy Current Method. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17.off b.4. paragraph 1.0 . paragraph 1.040-inch notch in test block.200 KHz .100 -0 .69. Support Assembly 2-61 . Refer to Eddy Current Method.6 Inspection Procedure.0 .4. Figure 2-26.56° .TM 1-1520-256-23 a. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9e1.26.

5 b. Eddy Current. right angle.27. 27).26. 2. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.27. 100 KHz-500 KHz. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. and 0. Not applicable. the collective levers shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. 2.1 Description (Figure 2-1.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Probe. corrosion. etc. 2. three-notched aluminum (0.3.26. steps 2. 2.2 Defects. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3.3.040 EDM notches) f. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. refer to Table 1-8 g. 2. refer to Table 1-8 2.27.26. If required. The collective levers consist of two lever halves mounted to the swashplate at one end and attached to the hydraulic cylinder of the collective system at the opposite end. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Reference Block. shielded surface.27. Teflon Tape. 90° 1/2 inch drop d. Inspect the part. 2-62 .1 NDl Equipment and Materials.008. The levers also connect to the collective sleeve at an intermediate location. Cable Assembly e.26.4 Backup Method. Eddy Current Inspection Unit b. (1). (Refer to Appendix B. 100 KHz-500 KHz c.3 Primary Method. 2. None required.3.3. (2). The swashplate support assembly. Probe. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. Aircraft Marking Pencil.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. c. straight.5 System Securing.2 Preparation of Helicopter.) a. sites of mechanical damage. 2.27 COLLECTIVE LEVERS (ET).27. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the collective levers.26. b.27. shielded surface. 0. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Index No.020. No cracks are allowed. 2.3.3 Access.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. if removed. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. If the probes are changed.

Refer to Eddy Current Method. a. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Refer to Eddy Current Method. (1). and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 2.80% V Pos .4 Preparation of Part.27. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 VdB . Inspect the part. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. paragraph 1.27.69.200 KHz F2 HdB . Frequency F1 .57.mid LPF . Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.) 2. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17.040-inch notch in test block. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 2-63 .3.3.off b. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9e".27. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Otherwise.100 HPF -0 H Pos .27. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1.11.4. workstands. b. paragraph 1.4.3.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Inspection Procedure.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.6 a.3.0 Rot -56° Probe drive . c.5 b.27.4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.20% .11 and Figure 2-27. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. steps 2. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (2). (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. If the probes are changed.3.

28.27.1 Description (Figure 2-1.27.2 Defects.3. Index No.) 2-64 . require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. if removed. Fluorescent Penetrant. (Refer to Appendix B.28 SCISSORS ASSEMBLY (ET).3.28.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. The collective levers. 2. 28). Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.27. The drive links are connected to a hub which is mounted through a bearing set on the collective sleeve.5 System Securing. No cracks are allowed.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 2. 2. Eddy Current. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the scissors assembly. Collective Levers 2.28.3 Primary Method. 2.7. 2. 2.4 Backup Method. The scissors are mounted on the mast and are connected to the swashplate outer ring with two drive links.28.4. refer to paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-27.

2 Preparation of Helicopter. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell. and 0. 0. 100 KHz-500 KHz. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. g.3 Access. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. straight.28.4.80% V Pos . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.28.28.11. right angle. three-notched aluminum (0. the scissors assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.100 HPF -0 H Pos . f. Frequency F1 .020. e. etc. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.5 NDI Equipment Settings.040-inch notch in test block. c. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. paragraph 1. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. d.56° Probe drive . Refer to Eddy Current Method.mid LPF . 2. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17.4.) 2-65 . 2. shielded surface.3.3. sites of mechanical damage. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. a.0 Rot . shielded surface.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.008.20% b. corrosion. b. workstands. paragraph 1. Otherwise.4 Preparation of Part.3. If required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 2.28.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.0 VdB -69.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.200 KHz F2 .TM 1-1520-256-23 a.57. Not applicable.off HdB . refer to Table 1-8 2.3.

(1). If the probes are changed.28. if removed.28. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 2. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. a. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3. 2.28.5 b. Figure 2-28. The scissors assembly. c.3.28.4 Backup Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.6 Inspection Procedure. 2.3. (2).3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Inspect the part. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.11 and Figure 2-28.28.5 System Securing. steps 2.7.4.28.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. refer to paragraph 1. b. paragraph 1. Scissors Assembly 2-66 . requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Fluorescent Penetrant.

100 KHz-500 KHz. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. g.020.off 2-67 . Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the drive link. the drive links shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.mid -100 -0 . Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.29).29.4 Preparation of Part. and 0.3. workstands.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3 Primary Method. 0.200 KHz . etc. II a.29. shielded surface. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. shielded surface. three-notched aluminum (0.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .2 Defects.29.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 2. paragraph 1. corrosion.57.4.80% .56° . The drive links are connected to a hub which is mounted through a bearing set on the collective sleeve.20% F2 . 2.4. right angle. sites of mechanical damage.29. refer to Table 1-8 2. e.3 Access.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. b. Index No. 2.3.29.0 .008. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. (Refer to Appendix B. d.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.0 . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Eddy Current. 2. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. straight.29. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Two drive links connect the scissors and sleeve to the swashplate outer ring. f. 2. No cracks are allowed.29. Otherwise. 2.29 DRIVE LINK (ET).3. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e .5 NDI Equipment Settings. If required.) a. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. c.3.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Not applicable.69.29.

steps 2. Refer to Eddy Current Method. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. c.29. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. a.) 2.11.6 Inspection Procedure.3.29. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. paragraph 1. Figure 2-29. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.29. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (1). Refer to Eddy Current Method.4.5 b.11 and Figure 2-29.040-inch notch in test block. If the probes are changed.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3.4. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Inspect the part. b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 b. (2). Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. Drive Link 2-68 .

The drive link.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1. Otherwise. d.7.4. Fluorescent Penetrant. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4 Preparation of Part.30 COLLECTIVE SLEEVE ASSEMBLY (MT). The collective sleeve is a shaft to which the hub assembly is attached and through which the other collective control assemblies are attached. 2. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. the collective sleeve assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2.3.4. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Not applicable.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.2 Preparation of Helicopter. workstands. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 2.30. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the collective sleeve assembly. 2.3 Access. 30).3 Primary Method.3. No cracks are allowed.30. Index No. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. (Refer to Appendix B. The sleeve assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.5 System Securing. 2.3.30.3. 2.30.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. The collective sleeve contains a bearing set at its upper end through which the drive links connect.2 Defects. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. c. b.4. f. If required.29. sites of mechanical damage. 2. 2. e.29. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Bearings installed on the lower end of the collective sleeve provide for connection of the collective levers.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4 Backup Method. corrosion. 2-69 .29.30.3. if removed. allowing collective pitch control of the main rotor. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. refer to paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle.) a. etc.1 Description (Figure 2-1.30.30. refer to Table 1-8 2. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 2.

if removed. 2. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. (Refer to Appendix B. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e.31.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-30. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3.8. e. paragraph 1. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. and 4. Refer to paragraph 2. Index No. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. The collective sleeve assembly requires installation. when combined with its associated seal.3.16. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. d. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3. c. b.30. refer to Table 1-8 2-70 . 2. 2. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 2. 2. f.30. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.30. Magnetic Particle.1 Description (Figure 2-1. in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. for positions 2. 2.6 Inspection Procedure. The retainer nut acts as the lower retainer for the internal components located inside the collective sleeve. The retainer nut.2 Defects.) a. b.5 System Securing. a. Clean the sleeve assembly thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. d. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 2.31.3 Primary Method. Inspect for cracks using the black light.8 Demagnetization.3. 2.31. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the retainer nut.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. c.30. seals the bottom of the hub assembly against the collective sleeve.3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. serrated nut which screws into the internal threads located inside the bottom of the hub assembly.3. 2. paragraph 1. e. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.30.8.4.30. f. None required.31.3.4 Backup Method. Repeat steps a.30. 3. No cracks are allowed. 31). 2.5 NDI Equipment Settings. RETAINER (MT).4.31 NUT. The retainer nut is an externally threaded.

Collective Sleeve Assembly 2-71 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-30.

4. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 2. a.8. 2. Repeat steps a. Not applicable.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the nut retainer removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.3.4. Refer to paragraph 1.1. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-31. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.31. Part or Area for NDI.4. Retainer 2-72 . Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.31.31. b.5 NDI Equipment Settings.8. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. e. 2.2 and Figure 1-6.3. f. 2. Nut. paragraph 1. Refer to Preparation of . The retainer nut shall be thoroughly cleaned.3.31. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.31.3 Access.6 Inspection Procedure.4 Preparation of Part.3. c. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.8. Figure 2-31. paragraph 1. d. through e.4. Refer to paragraph'2. 2.31. for position 2. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.2 Preparation of Helicopter.

The collective sleeve bearing retention nut is located at the top of the collective sleeve and inside the hub assembly. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The nut retainer requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2.32. 2. Black Light d. Refer to paragraph 1.2 and Figure 1-6. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles e.3.32. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.7. 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the collective sleeve bearing retention nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access.3. and this threading screws onto the external threads at the top of the collective sleeve.4.16. The collective sleeve bearing retention nut acts as the upper bearing retainer for the internal bearing set located inside the hub assembly.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1.4 Backup Method.) a. No cracks are allowed.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. 32).8 Demagnetization.2 Defects.3.32.3 Primary Method.31. 2.8. Magnetometer c. paragraph 1.31.1 Description (Figure 2-1.4.32. paragraph 1. 2.32. 2.8. 2. Index No. This nut is partially internally threaded.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.32 NUT.3. COLLECTIVE SLEEVE BEARING RETENTION (MT). refer to Table 1-8 f. 2. Refer to 2-73 . Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Not applicable.1.4. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. 2. 2.3. A pin is inserted through the top of this nut and through the collective sleeve and lockwired. With the switch remaining in the AC position.4. Aircraft Marking Pencil.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.32. Magnetic Particle. Clean the retainer nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Defects may occur anywhere on surface of the collective sleeve bearing retention nut.3. 2. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.32.31.4 Preparation of Part. The collective sleeve bearing retention nut shall be thoroughly cleaned.31.5 System Securing. with left-hand threading. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Consumable Materials.32. Fluorescent Penetrant. refer to paragraph 1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 2.

Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-32.3. 2. d.6 Inspection Procedure.8 Demagnetization. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3. e. Figure 2-32. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Nut.32. Refer to paragraph 2. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.32. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. for position 2. 2. a. c.3. f. through e. Collective Sleeve Bearing Retention 2-74 . Inspect for cracks using the black light.8. b.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.3. With the switch remaining in the AC position.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Repeat steps a.32. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.32. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.

2.3 Primary Method. 2.4. sites of mechanical damage.3.32. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. corrosion. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. If required. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Clean the collective sleeve bearing retention nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 2.4 Preparation of Part. paragraph 1. c.) a. b. e.4. 2.33.33 SCISSORS AND SLEEVE HUB (MT).33.32. 2.33.4. 2. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. etc. The mast is inserted into the top of the scissors and sleeve hub and the drive links are connected to the external portion of the hub. The collective sleeve bearing retention nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.16. No cracks are allowed.1. None required. the scissors and sleeve hub shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.33.3. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. 2.2 Defects. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Otherwise.4 Backup Method. 33). Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Index No. workstands.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2-75 . Not applicable. d. 2.33. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the scissors and sleeve hub assembly. paragraph 1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.33. (Refer to Appendix B. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.4. Refer to paragraph 1.2 and Figure 1-6. 2. The scissors and sleeve hub assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned. The scissors and sleeve hub is mounted through a bearing set onto the collective sleeve.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3. Magnetic Particle. f.33.5 System Securing. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3 Access.8.

33. Refer to paragraph 2.8 Demagnetization.3.33.8. Repeat steps a. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. f.33.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. d. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.33.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. paragraph 1. Figure 2-33. Scissors and Sleeve Hub 2-76 .3.6 Inspection Procedure. b. c. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-33.4. through e. 2. Inspect for cracks using the black light.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. a. 2. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.33. e. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. for positions 2. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 3. and 4.8. 2.3.

34. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 2.34. 2.3.34. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. right angle. (Refer to Appendix B.5 System Securing. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. in turn. 0. Not applicable.34. 2.4.34 TAIL ROTOR HUB GRIP ASSEMBLY (ET). g.5 NDI Equipment Settings.57.4. 2. If required.020. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.34. 2.33. 2.008. if removed. Clean the scissors and sleeve hub thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.200 KHz . paragraph 1. 2.34. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . the tail rotor hub grip assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.mid . b. etc.16.34. 2. refer to Table 1-8 2.4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. three-notched aluminum (0. shielded surface. and 0. 2. are mounted to the hub yoke.2 Preparation of Helicopter.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. a.20% F2 .3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3 Access. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9eII.3.2 Defects.56° .3 Primary Method. f. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.33.34. None required.0 .4 Preparation of Part. sites of mechanical damage.0 . Eddy Current. shielded surface. 34). corrosion.4 Backup Method. The tail rotor blades are attached by bolts to the tail rotor hub grip assemblies which.off 2-77 . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.69. No cracks are allowed. straight.80% . Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor hub grip assembly. The scissors and sleeve hub.100 -0 . Index No. d. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.1 Description (Figure 2-1.) a. e. c. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.

TM 1-1520-256-23 b. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. steps 2. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.4. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.040-inch notch in test block.34.4. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Tail Rotor Hub Grip Assembly 2-78 .11. Refer to Eddy Current Method. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Inspect the part.34. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. (2). b. (1). Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Figure 2-34.3.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1.3.11 and Figure 2-34. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.5 b.) 2.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. a.34.3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. c. paragraph 1.

The tail rotor hub grip assembly. 2. 2.3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.35. 2. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.34.35.35.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.4.2 and Figure 1-6.4.4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. c.2 Preparation of Helicopter. e.3. 2.35.3. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor hub retainer nut. 2.1 Description (Figure 2-1. Index No.) a. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-35. 2. (Refer to Appendix B. 2. The tail rotor hub retainer nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned.5 NDI Equipment Settings. paragraph 1. b.35.35. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.8. d. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.8. 2. Not applicable.4 Preparation of Part. c.35. 2. f. 2.35. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 System Securing. Fluorescent Penetrant.1.3.4. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 2-79 . Magnetic Particle. if removed.35 TAIL ROTOR HUB RETAINER NUT (MT). Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Defects. Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. paragraph 1.3.3 Access.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.35.34. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor hub retainer nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. a. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.6 Inspection Procedure. The tail rotor hub retainer nuts hold the pitch change bearings in place and route the centrifugal and oscillatory loads into the yoke at the groove rather than at the retainer nut threads.34.3.3 Primary Method. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 35).7. refer to paragraph 1.3. 2. Refer to paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed.4 Backup Method. 2.

through e. Repeat steps a.TM 1-1520-256-23 d. Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Nut 2-80 . 2. f. for position 2. e. Figure 2-35.3.35. 2. The tail rotor hub retainer nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.35.8. Inspect for cracks using the black light. With the switch remaining in the AC position.35. paragraph 1. Refer to paragraph 2. 2.3.35. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.4. Clean the tail rotor hub retainer nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. 2.3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.8 Demagnetization.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.35. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.16.4 Backup Method. None required.5 System Securing.

2. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Not applicable. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.5 Inspection Procedure.4. Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Ring 2-81 .Table 1-7. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor hub retainer ring removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.36. Figure 2-36.) Inspection equipment is listed in . The tail rotor hub retainer ring is located in the portion of the internal assemblage of the tail rotor hub which is found inside the tail rotor grip assembly.1 Description (Figure 2-1.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Access.36.4.4 Preparation of Part. 2.36.36. The tail rotor hub retainer ring fits between the tail rotor hub retainer nut and the cone set.36).36 TAIL ROTOR HUB RETAINER RING (PT).36.36. 2.3. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.3. Fluorescent Penetrant.7 and Table 1-4. 2.36.36.2 Preparation of Helicopter. paragraph 1. 2. Inspect area of concern.4. Index No. paragraph 1.3 Primary Method.3. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. No cracks -_ are allowed.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.2 Defects. 2. 2. See Figure 2-36. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the rotor hub retainer ring.3. (Refer to Appendix B.

5 System Securing. e.5 NDI Equipment Settings. No cracks are allowed. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. (Refer to Appendix B. 2. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. c.4 Preparation of Part.37. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3. The tail rotor hub retainer ring requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.37. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-37.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.37.3.37.36. paragraph 1. 2-82 .36.3.37.36. 2. Index No.8. 2. Magnetic Particle.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3. paragraph 1. The adapter nut is the castellated nut which is the closest piece to the center of the tail rotor yoke. 2.3 Primary Method.16. paragraph 1.37 ADAPTER NUT (MT). 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4 Backup Method.1. 2.37. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the adapter nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Defects.8. 2.4.4.3.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2. The adapter nut is located in the portion of the internal assemblage of the tail rotor hub which is found inside the tail rotor grip assembly. 2.3 Access. f.37. 2. 2. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. d. 2. Refer to paragraph 1. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the adapter nut.4. The adapter nut shall be thoroughly cleaned.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.4. b.4.6 Inspection Procedure.37. Clean the tail rotor hub retainer ring to remove inspection media. None required.) a.2 and Figure 1-6.37. Not applicable. 37).3.3.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.

f. through e. for position 2. 2.8. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 2-83 . e. 2.4.37.37.8 Demagnetization. Repeat steps a.37. c.3. None required.4 Backup Method. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.3. The adapter nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. Clean the adapter nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.16.37. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. d. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Refer to paragraph 2.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.37. Adapter Nut a.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. b. 2. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-37. paragraph 1.5 System Securing. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.

3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.38. 2. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3 Access.4. workstands. refer to Table 1-8 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4 Preparation of Part. Magnetic Particle.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 2. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. to the tail rotor gearbox shaft.3.38 TAIL ROTOR HUB YOKE (MT). via the blade grips. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.38). (Refer to Appendix B. f.38.38.4.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1. etc. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Not applicable.) a. c. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.1 Description (Figure 2-1.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 2.38. The tail rotor hub yoke is that part of the hub and blade assembly which connects the blades. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor hub yoke. 2-84 . Index No. sites of mechanical damage. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. b.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3. 2. paragraph 1.4. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-38. 2. d.38.3 Primary Method. The tail rotor hub yoke shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. 2. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.38. 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Otherwise. 2. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.2 Defects. If required. e. corrosion.38. No cracks are allowed. the tail rotor hub yoke shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.38.38.3.8.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-38. Tail Rotor Hub Yoke 2-85 .

1 NDI Equipment and Materials.39.4. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. if removed.4. 2. c. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 2. 2.8 and 1. 2. 2. Clean the tail rotor hub yoke thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Magnetic Particle.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. f. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.8 Demagnetization. paragraph 1. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor hub trunnion.3.8. 2.38. d.5 System Securing. (Refer to Appendix B. 2.16.3.38. requires installation in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1. Inspect for cracks using the black light. c. d. e. e. Refer to paragraph 1. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Index No.3. 2. No cracks are allowed. 2.8.3.) a. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.1.3 Primary Method. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil can be used.4. b. 2-86 . through e.38.39. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. b. The tail rotor hub is D-hinge mounted on the tail rotor hub trunnion which is splined for mounting the assembly on the gearbox output shaft.3.39 TAIL ROTOR HUB TRUNNION (MT).4 Backup Method.4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. The tail rotor hub yoke. Refer to paragraph 2. Repeat steps a.38.2 Defects.1 Description (Figure 2-1.39.39.39). Refer to paragraphs 1. f. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. for positions 2 and 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.8. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.38.2 and Figure 1-6. Perform longitudinal and circular magnetization in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.

3 Access. for position 2. paragraph 1.3. c.4.8.4. Repeat steps a. A magnetic field shall be applied perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Tail Rotor Hub Trunnion 2-87 . 2. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.39.39.6 Inspection Procedure. e. Refer to paragraph 2.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor hub trunnion removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.39.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2. b.3.39.4 Preparation of Part. Not applicable. paragraph 1.8. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 2-39.3. f. Inspect for cracks using the black light.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 2. Figure 2-39. through e. The tail rotor hub trunnion shall be thoroughly cleaned.4.39.3. 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. d. a.39.

040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 2-88 . 2.4.3. refer to Table 1-8 2. Index No. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.40. Clean the tail rotor hub trunnion thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. the tail rotor crosshead shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. extending from the crosshead through the tail rotor gearbox to the pitch change mechanism.4 Backup Method.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 0.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor crosshead. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. paragraph 1.5 System Securing. 2.39. straight. shielded surface.4.40.3.39. shielded surface. No cracks are allowed.) a. If required. etc. three-notched aluminum (0.4 Preparation of Part. d. f.39. With the switch remaining in the AC position. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3.40 TAIL ROTOR CROSSHEAD (ET). Movement of the crosshead and pitch links is controlled by a pitch change rod.40. (Refer to Appendix B.3 Access.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. The tail rotor hub trunnion requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.1 Description (Figure 2-1. 2.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.39. Not applicable. Eddy Current.40.2 Defects. and 0. 40). g. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. 2. sites of mechanical damage.8 Demagnetization.020.40. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.3. right angle. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 2.3 Primary Method. b. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 2. e.3. corrosion. Mark and the record inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 2. c. None required.40.40.3. The crosshead controls consist of the tail rotor crosshead and the pitch change links.16.008. 2. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 2.

57.56° mid .200 KHz .0 . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Frequency Fl HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . Refer to Eddy Current Method. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.40. Tail Rotor Crosshead 2-89 .6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1.4. Figure 2-40.11. paragraph 1. a.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.040-inch notch in test block. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.11 and Figure 2-40. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e1.69.3.0 .off b.3.) 2.40.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.100 -0 .80% -20% F2 .

The blade leading edge is covered with an abrasive strip to reduce erosion. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.008.41.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. d.40.1 Description (Figure 2-1.5 b. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. three-notched aluminum (0. b. c. g.41 TAIL ROTOR BLADE (ET).7. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 2-41). Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. and 0. b. if removed.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. The tail rotor blades consist of an all-metal shell bonded to a honeycomb core. The tail rotor crosshead. 0. (Refer to Appendix B. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3.40.3 Primary Method.) a.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 2. shielded surface.5 System Securing. straight. Reinforcing doublers are bonded to the blade in the area of the retention bolt holes. steps 2. 2.4 Backup Method.40.3. 2. 2. cracks are allowed.020. c. f. No .41. (2).2 Defects. 2-90 .4. 2.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Fluorescent Penetrant. Index No. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. If the probes are changed.41. 2.3.3. Inspect the part. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor blade.40. Eddy Current. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.41. right angle. 2.3.3.41. e. refer to Table 1-8 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. refer to paragraph 1.40. Inspection areas are accessible with the tail rotor blades installed on the helicopter. (1). shielded surface. Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.

workstands.4.5 b.56° mid . paragraph 1. Refer to Eddy Current Method.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. a. paragraph 1. 2-91 .41.41. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell. If the probes are changed.VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . personnel injury could result from accidental falls. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal rift-off.4.3. Not applicable.41.20% F2 . Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.3 Access.off b. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 2.41. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.0 . Place probe on a good area in the inspection locations and null.41. Inspect the part.4.200 KHz .6 Inspection Procedure. Frequency F1 HdB . 2.57. c.11.69.41.100 -0 .4. (1). paragraph 1.0 .3. steps 2.) 2. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. b.3.3. (2). (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4 Preparation of Part. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11 and Figure 2-41.040-inch notch in test block.3. 2. Otherwise.80% .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-41. Tail Rotor Blade (Cracks) 2-92 .

42 TAIL ROTOR BLADE (BT). 2.42. c.42. this manual makes no distinction among these. 2.4 Backup Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3. 2-93 .3.41. refer to Table 1-8 2. Bond Testing.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Reinforcing doublers are bonded to the blade in the area of the retention bolt holes.42.3 Primary Method. misfit.2 Defects. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. etc.1 Description (Figure 2-1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. gas pocket. Index No. Many sub-definitions of voids are given such as lack of adhesive.3. However.41. b.42. (Refer to Appendix B. None required. 2. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 2-42). g. 2. Bond Test Unit Probe.42. f. Perform the NDI method contained herein on the tail rotor blades for the primary purpose of verification of void indications identified by visual inspection. None required. 2.3.41. The tail rotor blades consist of an all-metal shell bonded to a honeycomb core.) a. grouping them all under one general term ("void"). metal honeycomb with skin thickness closest to that of the skin to be inspected Teflon Tape. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 2. The blade leading edge is covered with an abrasive strip to reduce erosion.5 System Securing. 2. Inspection areas are accessible with the tail rotor blades on the helicopter. d. e.

Not Applicable WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. (See Figure 1-5. Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas.4 Preparation of Part. paragraph 1. Otherwise. d. Do not remove paint. e. Continue to try phase settings until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction.3 Access. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN. 180. And e. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot. and repeat steps d. b.6. NOTE If. 2.42. press NULL.4. 2. the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned. If not.3.42. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90.3. Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster. workstands. Refer to Bond Test Equipment.1. paragraph 1. Note the video signature for each.5 NDI Equipment Settings.MID c. The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup. Place probe on the good area of test block and press GOOD PART. press SPCL.80% -0 . Turn on Bondmaster.) Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block. 2-94 . or 270).4. Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time.4. a. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. during setup.3. f.PHASE. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the test block.40% . and make the following adjustments: H Pos V Pos PHASE REF DRIVE . Do this several times while moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. Press SET and select DISPLAY .42.

Place probe on the tail rotor blade in location where test for skin-to-honeycomb bond separation is desired and press NULL. NOTE The basic setup provided above also selects a frequency that provide a satisfactory inspection for voids associated with skin-to-spar. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals.42.1 Description (Figure 2-1. None required. and trim tab bonding. compare similar areas. 2.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void. doubler-to-doubler and doublerto-skin. 2. b. This setup is very sensitive to thin skinto-core bonding. Move probe slowly over the blade and note the slight amplitude change (bounce) as the probe senses alternately the honeycomb cell nodes and cell walls.2 Defects. 2.6 and inspection areas as shown in Figure 242.43). NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids.3. None required. Use the NULL and GAIN adjustments to reset the ACTIVE screen for the areas to be inspected (do not go back to SET mode).4. 2.6 Inspection Procedure.42. check front and back of the blade in the same area. The tail rotor blades consist of an all-metal shell bonded to a honeycomb core. 2.43. Skin-to-Honeycomb Voids.43 TAIL ROTOR BLADE (RT).42. a.5 System Securing. Index No. A localized phase and amplitude shift similar to the test block indicates a void. to check for spar to skin voids. Observe that when moving the probe chordwise from the spar to the trailing edge. The blade leading edge is covered with an abrasive strip to reduce erosion.4 Backup Method. 2-95 . Water in honeycomb core. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response. or check another blade in the same area.43. the transitions at the spar-to-honeycomb and the honeycomb-to-trailing edge strip are easily detected. paragraph 1.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Refer to Bond Test Method. Reinforcing doublers are bonded to the blade in the area of the retention bolt holes.42. Also. When inspecting these areas. 2. For example. skin-to-trailing edge.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. adjust the NULL and GAIN and move the probe carefully along the transition using a straight edge or other guide.3.

Tail Rotor Blade 2-96 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-42.

43. The tail rotor blade shall be thoroughly cleaned. Marking Material. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.43. Refer to Radiographic Method. Inspection areas are accessible with tail rotor blades on the helicopter.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Radiation protection shall be utilized in accordance with AR40-14/DLAR 1000.43. 2.4. X-ray unit b.28. 2. Film.1.43.2 Preparation of Helicopter. b. paragraph 1. Otherwise. Tripod. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 2. 2-97 .43. A hazard associated with exposure to ionizing radiation is that serious injury can be inflicted without pain.3.4.) a. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. a. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Film Processor d.43.3. Ready Pack 8 inch x 10 inch e. (Refer to Appendix B. 2. refer to Table 1-8 2. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. workstands. Equipment settings.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. or other sense of discomfort during the exposure period.3 Access. X-ray tubehead stand c. WARNING Radiation Hazard Assure compliance with all applicable safety precautions set forth in TM 55-1500-335-23 (Nondestructive Inspection Methods manual) listed in Table 1.4 Preparation of Part. and arrangement for each exposure are given in Figure 2-43. burning. Not applicable. inspection data. 2. paragraph 1.10.3 Primary Method. Radiography.3.3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-43. Tail Rotor Blade (Sheet 1 of 2) 2-98 .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 2-43. Tail Rotor Blade (Sheet 2 of 2) 2-99 .

43. None required.6 Inspection Procedure. g. Process and interpret film for defects as noted in paragraph 2.43. e. Remove exposed film. Make exposure number 1. a.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Inspect designated areas of the tail rotor blade. paragraph 1. 2. Position X-ray tubehead for exposure number 1. None required. c. d.43. Repeat inspection procedure (steps a. through e.TM 1-1520-256-23 2.3.4 Backup Method. Mark and record the inspection results as necessary per 2. b. Position film and desired nameplate data for exposure number 1. 2-100 .3.43. f. Set X-ray unit to the values given in the Radiographic Inspection Data chart for exposure number 1.43.2 and as shown in Figure 2-43. 2.5 System Securing. above) for each exposure.

8 3.3 3.15 3.19 3.18 3.17 3.11 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION III TRANSMISSION/DRIVETRAIN GROUP 3. 3.10 3.5 3.14 3. Corresponding inspection figures and applicable text paragraphs are listed opposite each inspection item. gear boxes.7 3. The index number for each item may be used to locate it in Figure 3-1.16 3.24 Figure Number 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 Nomenclature Main Driveshaft Inner Couplings Main Driveshaft Outer Couplings Main Driveshaft Splined Nuts Main Driveshaft Clamp Sets Main Driveshaft Grease Retainers Main Driveshaft Adapter Bolt Main Driveshaft Engine Adapter Transmission Case (Top) Ring Gear Case Main Transmission Case Transmission Support Case Lift Link Bushing Hole Threaded Fittings Input Drive Quill Wear Sleeve Generator Drive Quill Case Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Quill Case Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Gear Teeth Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Assembly Tail Rotor Drive Quill Bevel Gear Teeth Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Spacer Pylon Mount Bolts Fifth Mount Support Fitting 3-1 . Table 3-1.9 3. and components listed in the Transmission/Drivetrain Group Inspection Index (Table 3-1).23 3.1 CONTENTS.22 3. Transmission/Drivetrain Group Inspection Index Index Number *2 *3 *4 *5 6 *7 *8 *9 *10 11 *12 *13 *14 15 *16 *17 *18 *19 *20 *21 *22 *23 *24 Inspection Method MT MT MT MT PT MT MT MT ET MT ET ET PT PT PT ET ET PT ET MT MT MT PT Paragraph Number 3. driveshafts.4 3.12 3. The transmission/drivetrain group inspection items covered in this section are those items of the UH-1 helicopter series transmission.2 3.13 3.20 3.21 3.6 3. GENERAL.

26 3.29 3.34 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 3-1.40 3.38 3.27 3.39 3.36 3.35 3.42 3.28 3.44 3.Continued Index Number 25 *26 27 28 *29 *30 *31 *32 *33 *34 *35 *36 *37 *38 *39 40 41 *42 *43 *44 45 46 Inspection Method MT MT MT PT ET MT MT MT MT MT MT ET ET MT MT MT MT ET MT MT MT MT Paragraph Number 3.33 3.37 3.32 3.41 3.43 3.45 3. 3-2 . Transmission/Drivetrain Group Inspection Index .31 3.25 3.46 Figure Number 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 Nomenclature Friction Damper Main Rotor Mast Nut Oil Pump Driveshaft Oil Jets Tail Rotor Driveshaft Tail Rotor Driveshaft Clamps Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hangers Tail Rotor Driveshaft Inner (Spherical) Coupling Tail Rotor Driveshaft Forward Coupling Tail Rotor Driveshaft Rear Coupling Tail Rotor Driveshaft Coupling Shaft Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hanger Support Fittings Intermediate Gearbox Case Intermediate Gearbox Inner Coupling Intermediate Gearbox Outer Coupling Intermediate Gearbox Sleeve Intermediate Gearbox Pinion Shaft Tail Rotor Gearbox Case Tail Rotor Gearbox Inner Coupling Tail Rotor Gearbox Outer Coupling Tail Rotor Gearbox Sleeve Transmission Lift Link NOTE: *Indicates Flight Safety Part.30 3.

Transmission/Drivetrain Group (Sheet 1 of 2) 3-3 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-1.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-1. Transmission/Drivetrain Group (Sheet 2 of 2) 3-4 .

3. 3.2. (Refer to Appendix B.2.3.3.2. 3-5 .2. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown in Figure 3-2. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Index No. paragraph 1.8.8. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-2. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Magnetic Particle.3 Access.4. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.2 and Figure 1-6.4. b.) a. 3.4.1. for positions 2 and 3. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.4 Preparation of Part. e.2.1 Description (Figure 3-1.2.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.2.3 Primary Method. 3. 3. c.6 Inspection Procedure. 3. The inner couplings shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. Repeat steps a.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.2 MAIN DRIVESHAFT INNER COUPLINGS (MT).8. a. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 3. 3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the inner couplings removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. d. paragraph 1. 3. 3.3. f. e.3.3. Not applicable.2 Preparation of Helicopter.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the inner coupling. b. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The inner couplings are located at each end of the main driveshaft assembly.3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.2. No cracks are allowed. c. The inner couplings mate with the outer couplings and are held in place by a clamp set (coupling) which keeps the curvic-spline faces of the couplings in secure contact. Refer to paragraph 3. 2). Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.2. Refer to paragraph 1.2 Defects.2.2. through e. d. f.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 3.

Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the outer couplings. 3.3 MAIN DRIVESHAFT OUTER COUPLINGS (MT). 3.3.3.2. 3.3. 3). Index No. The outer couplings are located at each end of the main driveshaft assembly.3 Primary Method. With the switch remaining in the AC position. No cracks are allowed. 3.2. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.5 System Securing. Clean the inner couplings thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 3-6 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-2.16.2. Magnetic Particle. 3.4 Backup Method. Main Driveshaft Inner Couplings 3. The inner couplings require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. None required. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3. paragraph 1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.3.2 Defects. The outer couplings mate with the inner couplings and are held against the inner couplings by a clamp set (coupling) which keeps the curvic-spline faces of the couplings in secure contact.1 Description (Figure 3-1.8 Demagnetization.

A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. Figure 3-3.4. paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-3. 3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.3. paragraph 1. e.3.3.4 Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B.6 Inspection Procedure. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 3. 3. c. b.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.3. Main Driveshaft Outer Couplings 3-7 . 3. refer to Table 1-8 3. d.3.3 Access.4.3.8.3. The outer couplings shall be thoroughly cleaned.3.) a. Not applicable. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the outer couplings removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.

3. b.3.3. 3. Index No.4.3.3. 3.2 Defects.16.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the spline nuts removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.8.4. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the splined nuts. Clean the outer couplings thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.4. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 3. 3. c. Refer to paragraph 3.4.4 Backup Method. With the switch remaining in the AC position.) a.4. 4). c. 3.4 MAIN DRIVESHAFT SPLINED NUTS (MT).1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Not applicable. through e.4.3. No cracks are allowed. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.4. 3. refer to Table 1-8 3.3.3 Access.4 Preparation of Part. The splined nuts are located inside the inner/outer coupling assemblies and are screwed directly into each end of the main driveshaft. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.3. (Refer to Appendix B.4.3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.8 Demagnetization. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Inspect for cracks using the black light.4. f.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. e. d. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.5 System Securing. 3.3. d. paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 3.4. 3. f.3. Repeat steps a.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3.3 Primary Method. The splined nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3-8 . for positions 2 and 3. b. paragraph 1. e. None required. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. The outer couplings require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.

3. a. c. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4.8. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Figure 3-4.4. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. paragraph 1. Inspect for cracks using the black light.4. f. 3. Refer to paragraph 3.4. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Repeat steps a. through e. 3. With the switch remaining in the AC position. b.4.3.8. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 3.8 Demagnetization. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 3. d. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-4. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Main Driveshaft Splined Nuts 3-9 .6 Inspection Procedure. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.5 NDI Equipment Settings. for position 2. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4.4 Backup Method. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. e.3. None required.3.4.

5. e.8.3 Access. c.5. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.4. Refer to paragraph 3.5. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.2 Preparation of Helicopter.5 MAIN DRIVESHAFT CLAMP SETS (MT). 3.3. 3. 3. for positions 2.4 Preparation of Part.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 3. f.4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.3.5 System Securing.3. The clamp sets shall be thoroughly cleaned. No cracks are allowed. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.16. and 4.8. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3. 3. paragraph 1.3. c. (Refer to Appendix B. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. through e. 3.5. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the clamp sets removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5. b.5.6 Inspection Procedure.3.5. paragraph 1. 3. 3-10 .3.3. Magnetic Particle. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. d. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 5). Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. The clamp sets are of the split V-band type.5. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-5. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the clamp sets. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. refer to Table 1-8 3.) a. f. 3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. The splined nuts require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Primary Method. d.4. Clean the splined nuts thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. e.5. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. a. Not applicable. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b.5. paragraph 1. They hold A mating curvicspline faces of the couplings in secure contact.2 Defects. 3. Repeat steps a.4.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 3. Index No.3.5.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.

3 Primary Method. No cracks are allowed. 3. The centering spring exerts pressure on the grease retainers from inside the assembly.3.5.2 Defects. 3.6. Clean the clamp sets thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. The clamp sets require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 3.6. in the assembly. The grease retainers are located at each end of the driveshaft as the outermost items. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 3.6. 3. 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.5.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-5.1 Description (Figure 3-1.8 Demagnetization. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the grease retainers. Index No. 3.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.2 Preparation of Helicopter. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. paragraph 1.5 System Securing. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3-11 .3.6 MAIN DRIVESHAFT GREASE RETAINERS (PT). except for their retainer rings.6. (Refer to Appendix B. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the grease retainers removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Fluorescent Penetrant.4.6. Main Driveshaft Clamp Sets 3.4 Backup Method.3.5.1 6. 6). 3. None required.

6. 3.4. The main driveshaft has a flexible splined coupling on each end.3. paragraph 1. The main driveshaft is installed between an engine adapter on the engine output shaft and the freewheel coupling on the transmission input quill. 3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.6. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. None required.3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Figure 3-6.5 System Securing.4. paragraph 1.7.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.16. Main Driveshaft Grease Retainers 3-12 . No cracks are allowed. A spring in each coupling assists centering of the shaft during operations and tends to hold the shaft assembly in place if clamp sets are removed during maintenance.6.4 Backup Method. Not applicable. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3. The grease retainers require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.6.3. paragraph 1.2 Defects.6. 3. 3. Clean the grease retainers to-remove inspection media. See Figure 3-6. 3. 3.3.7.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.7 and Table 1-5.4. 3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the driveshaft. Inspect area of concern. Index No.4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.5 Inspection Procedure.3 Access.3.4 Preparation of Part. 7).7 MAIN DRIVESHAFT (MT).6.

Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. The driveshaft requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7.3. d.3. a.7. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.4 Preparation of Part.7. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.7. 3.8.4. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3.3. c.3. 3.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4 Backup Method.3.7.3. 3. 3-13 .7. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. (Refer to Appendix B. 3. paragraph 1. 3. 3. Clean the driveshaft thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.2 and Figure 1-6.8.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Not applicable. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.5 NDI Equipment Settings. paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. The driveshaft shall be thoroughly cleaned. d. b. e. Refer to paragraph 1. 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the driveshaft removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access.4.3 Primary Method.6 Inspection Procedure. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4.7.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. b.8 Demagnetization. None required. 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.7.7. f.16. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.5 System Securing. 3.7.4.) a. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 3-7. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. paragraph 1.1. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.7. Inspect for cracks using the black light. 3. c.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-7. Main Driveshaft 3-14 .

Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3 Access. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the engine adapter bolt removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. It passes through a locking washer and the engine adapter and is therefore referred to as the engine adapter bolt.3.8. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.3.8. d. Magnetic Particle.8.8. 3.8.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 3. 3.3 Primary Method. 8). The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 3-8. Refer to paragraph 1.2 Defects. b. The bolt to be inspected is found at the aft end of the driveshaft assembly.8.4.4.1 Description (Figure 3-1.3.8.3. c. 3.3.) a.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.2 Preparation of Helicopter. paragraph 1.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.1. Figure 3-8. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the engine adapter bolt.8. 3.8 ADAPTER BOLT (MT).2 and Figure 1-6.8. 3.8. 3. (Refer to Appendix B.3.4 Preparation of Part. 3.4.8. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. f. paragraph 1. Not applicable. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. No cracks are allowed. 3. e.4. Adapter Bolt 3-15 .

Inspect for cracks using the black light.4 Backup Method. refer to Table 1-8 3. 3.8.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. With the switch remaining in the AC position. The engine adapter shall be thoroughly cleaned.9.3 Primary Method. 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1.4.9.4.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the engine adapter.9. b.3.8 Demagnetization. None required. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.8.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3 Access.16. 3. No cracks are allowed. Index No. 3.3. Magnetic Particle. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4 Preparation of Part. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the engine adapter removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. b. 3.9.2 Defects. 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 3.3. The engine adapter bolt requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.9.8. e. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.9. paragraph 1. The engine adapter provides the means whereby the engine is connected to the driveshaft assembly. 3-16 .4. f. 9).5 System Securing.3. c. c. d. 3. (Refer to Appendix B.8. Clean the engine adapter bolt thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 3. 3. 3. Not applicable.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.9. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.) a. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.9 MAIN DRIVESHAFT ENGINE ADAPTER (MT). place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. d.

6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to paragraph 3. f. 3.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 3. Figure 3-9. for positions 2 and 3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. through e. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Repeat steps a.9.9. paragraph 1. d.8 Demagnetization.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3. c.3. e. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.8.3.9.9.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.9. a.8.4. b. Main Driveshaft Engine Adapter 3-17 .3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-9. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.

d. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3 Access. 3.4 Preparation of Part.80% -20% F2 .2 Preparation of Helicopter.9. 3.particle media. Clean the engine adapter thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic . c.2 Defects. straight.10 TRANSMISSION CASE (TOP) (ET). (Figure 1-4.) a.008.69. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. shielded surface. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.10.16. refer to Table 1-8 3. 0. f. The engine adapter requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 System Securing. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. and 0. e. No cracks are allowed.4.3. g. 3. The transmission case top is that portion found at the top of the transmission immediately below the mast.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.4. The transmission case surrounds and contains the transmission components. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3.0 . 100 KHz-500 KHz.10.200 KHz .10. Access is through the transmission fairing. 3. 10). a. (Refer to Appendix B.57. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. None required.3. Eddy Current.3. 3. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.10.10.56° .off 3-18 . 3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the transmission case (top).0 . paragraph 1.Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.10. right angle. 3. Item 2) 3.3. .9. b.3 Primary Method.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.4 Backup Method.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. three-notched aluminum (0.10.100 -0 . 3. paragraph 1.5 NDI Equipment Settings.020.4.10. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . Index No.mid . shielded surface.

3. 3. The ring gear case is that part of the transmission case found immediately below the transmission case top. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.3. None required.10.11.3.10.) 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 b. The ring gear case surrounds and contains the ring gear components. 3. (2).1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3.4. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed.) a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. e.10. 3. Index No.6 Inspection Procedure. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the ring gear case.040-inch notch in test block.11.5 b.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Eddy Current Method. f.1 Description (Figure 3-1.11 RING GEAR CASE (MT). steps 3. d. paragraph 1. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. a.11.10.3. 3.11. c. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (Refer to Appendix B. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3.4 Backup Method.10.10.11.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.2 Defects. 3-19 . Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. 3.5 System Securing. If the probe drives are changed. Magnetic Particle. c. 3. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Inspect the part. 3. refer to Table 1-8 b.3 Primary Method. 3. (1). Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11 and Figure 3-10. 11). Move probe over all three notches in test block.4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. b. Secure the transmission fairing as required. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-10. Transmission Case (Top) 3-20 .

3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. Secure the transmission fairing as required. Legs shall be positioned the same as positions 1 and 2.3.8 Demagnetization.3. (Figure 1-4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. f. Repeat steps a. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. With the switch remaining in the AC position. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.11.3.3. 3.16.11. 3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.12.11.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 3. 12). 3. 3. Access is through the transmission fairing. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.12. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-11. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. 3. d.11.4 Preparation of Part. The main transmission case surrounds and contains the major transmission components.3. The main transmission case is that part of the transmission case found immediately below ring gear case.11. b.8.2 Defects.4. 3-21 . Clean the ring gear case thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.12 MAIN TRANSMISSION CASE (ET). for positions 2 through 8. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.11.3 Primary Method.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 3.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.8.4 Backup Method. Inspect for cracks using the black light. 3. Index No. paragraph 1. c. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the main transmission case. a. paragraph 1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.6 Inspection Procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.3.3. four times around the case. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3 Access. Refer to paragraph 3. through e.11.11.5 System Securing.11. Item 2) 3.4.3.12. 3. 3. e. Eddy Current.11. None required. paragraph 1. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.4.

Ring Gear Case 3-22 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-11.

56° . b. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11.80% -20% F2 . 3.) 3.57. Move probe over all three notches in test block.4.4 Preparation of Part. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. c. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19eII. Inspect the part. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Item 2.0 . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. Access is through the transmission fairing. 100 KHz-500 KHz. a. and 0. c.008.12.100 -0 . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.020. (Refer to Appendix B.mid .3. .5 NDI Equipment Settings.6 Inspection Procedure. three-notched aluminum (0.12. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3. paragraph 1. d. shielded surface. Figure 14.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.12. 3-23 .3. e. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.) 3. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.69. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. g. refer to Table 1-8 3. straight. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.4.12. 3.3. 0.11 and Figure 3-12.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.200 KHz .2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Eddy Current Method. shielded surface. right angle. f.) a. a. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.0 .4.12.3 Access.12.040-inch notch in test block. paragraph 1. b. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. paragraph 1. "Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.

TM 1-1520-256-23 ARROWS INDICATE SCAN PATHS Figure 3-12. Main Transmission Case 3-24 .

Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. (2). 3. c.13. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.020. d. and beneath it.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 3.3.) a.4 Preparation of Part. 3.13 TRANSMISSION SUPPORT CASE (ET).3.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3. f. 100 KHz-500 KHz. The transmission support case provides a mounting structure to allow mounting the transmission to the airframe.13.5 b.12.3 Access. 3. 3. 3. Secure the transmission fairing as required. steps 3.3. None required. refer to Table 1-8 3.5 System Securing.4 Backup Method.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 3. (Figure 1-4. 13). Item 2) 3. e.13.4.3 Primary Method. Mounting points found on the case allow the unit to be mounted via main mounts.3. shielded surface.12. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the transmission support case.12. the tail rotor drive quill.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. (1).2 Defects. 3. The transmission support case also provides for mounting the hydraulic pump quill. g. (Refer to Appendix B.13.13. If the probe drives are changed.12. Eddy Current.3. 0. and 0. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.13. 3-25 .008. paragraph 1. 3. Access is through the transmission fairing. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3. b.13. Index No. three-notched aluminum (0. right angle. shielded surface.3. The transmission support case is that part of the transmission case found immediately below the transmission main case. straight.1 Description (Figure 3-1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3.12.

13. Inspect the part.3.3.13. Move probe over all three notches in test block.3.200 KHz . Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. None required.57. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3. 3. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.mid . Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. b.3. Refer to Eddy Current Method.13.5 NDI Equipment Settings.13. a.0 .040-inch notch in test block.13. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.56° .69. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.100 -0 . Secure the transmission fairing as required. paragraph 1.4. 3-26 . and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.13. 3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 System Securing. paragraph 1. (1).off Refer to Eddy Current Method.) 3.3.13.3. a.11.11 and Figure 3-13.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9eII. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.80% -20% F2 . If the probe drives are changed. c. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. .4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.4 Backup Method.6 Inspection Procedure.0 . (2).5 b. steps 3. 3.

Transmission Support Case 3-27 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-13.

Fluorescent Penetrant. The lift link bushing holes hold the bushings which mount the lift link clevis. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the lift link bushing hole. (Refer to Appendix B. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Primary Method. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. No cracks are allowed.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 14). 3. See Figure 3-14. Lift Link Bushing Hole 3-28 . 3. paragraph 1.3. 3.3 Access.14. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. paragraph 1. Index No. 3.3. The lift link bushing holes are accessed with the transmission assembly removed from the helicopter and the lift link bushings removed.14. Inspect area of concern.14.3. 3.14.7 and Table 1-5.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.4.14. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.4. 3. 3.5 Inspection Procedure.14.4.14.4 Preparation of Part. Figure 3-14. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the transmission removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.14.14 LIFT LINK BUSHING HOLE (PT).3.2 Defects.

16.7 and Table 1-5. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.15. Clean the threaded fittings to remove inspection media. paragraph 1.4.3. 15).1 Description (Figure 3-1.5 System Securing. Index No. 3.15. The threaded fittings require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 3.3.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the threaded fittings.3. 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4.4 Preparation of Part.15. 3-29 . (Refer to Appendix B.15. 3.14. Clean the lift link bushing holes to remove inspection media.4 Backup Method.4.14. Threaded fittings are found throughout the transmission assembly and should be inspected for cracks and thread damage.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. 3. Fluorescent Penetrant.15 THREADED FITTINGS (PT).15. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.15.15. 3.5 Inspection Procedure.3. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 3.3 Primary Method. None required.3 Access. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 3.16. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Inspect area of concern. Not applicable. See Figure 3-15.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.15. 3.3.4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe-ground maintenance a and the threaded fittings removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 3.15.15. 3.3. 3. 3. paragraph 1.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1. 3.4 Backup Method.3. paragraph 1.14.3.15. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The lift link bushings require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 System Securing.4. None required.

Threaded Fittings 3-30 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-15.

7 and Table 1-5. paragraph 1. 3. Not applicable.16. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 3.3.16. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Input Drive Quill Wear Sleeve 3-31 . 3.4. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. The input drive quill is located on the transmission opposite the generator. 3.16.3.5 Inspection Procedure. 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.16. Index No.4. 3. paragraph 1.4 Preparation of Part.4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Fluorescent Penetrant.2 Defects. The drive quill wear sleeve is an internal part located within the clutch assembly.3 Primary Method. Figure 3-16.16.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. (Refer to Appendix B.16. 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. The main driveshaft connects to it.16. 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the input drive quill removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.16 INPUT DRIVE QUILL WEAR SLEEVE (PT).3. 16).3 Access.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Inspect area of concern.16.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the input drive quill wear sleeve. See Figure 3-16.

3. 0. Access is through the transmission fairing.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. 3. d. etc. The input drive quill wear sleeve requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.008. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.16. The quill is driven through a gear train from a spiral bevel drive gear mounted in the transmission main case. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4. c. 3.3. 3. corrosion. 3-32 . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.17.17.17.1 Description (Figure 3-1.16.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3. straight.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. shielded surface. 3.3.4. Clean the input drive quill wear sleeve to remove inspection media. paragraph 1. e. 3.3. The generator drive quill assembly is mounted on front of the transmission with a generator drive pad above the cabin roof level. 17). b.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.17.17.020. right angle.3 Access.3. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 3. Index No. 3.3 Primary Method.) a.2 Preparation of Helicopter.16. (Figure 1-4.17.3. Item 2) 3.16. 100 KHz-500 KHz. f. g.2 Defects. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.17.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. If required. the drive quill case shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. (Refer to Appendix B. and 0. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.5 System Securing. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.17 GENERATOR DRIVE QUILL CASE (ET). 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the generator drive quill case. None required. refer to Table 1-8 3. three-notched aluminum (0. shielded surface.4 Backup Method. sites of mechanical damage. Eddy Current.

6 Inspection Procedure.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. if removed. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.040 inch notch in test block. 3. (2). Secure the transmission fairing as required.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.100 -0 .5 System Securing.11 and Figure 3-17.17.17. 3-33 . c.11.57.80% -20% F2 . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. 3.4. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3. 3.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 . .56° . b.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.17. (1). If the probe drives are changed. a.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.3. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. None required. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.4 Backup Method.0 .17. The generator drive quill case.5 b. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Inspect the part.200 KHz . paragraph 1.3.) 3. paragraph 1.mid .3.3. steps 3. requires installation and assembly in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.17. a.17. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.69.17. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4. Refer to Eddy Current Method.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-17. Generator Drive Quill Case 3-34 .

Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.18. paragraph 1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.18.3.2 Defects. 18).04r' EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 3.0 .3 Primary Method. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic pump and tachometer quill case.69.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. The hydraulic pump and tachometer accessory drive quill are located on the right side of the transmission sump case and are driven by an accessory gear train. refer to Table 1-8 3. and also drives the rotor tachometer generator by means of a chain and sprocket offset drive. shielded surface. 3. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .1 Description (Figure 3-1. the hydraulic pump and tachometer quill case shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. straight.5 NDI Equipment Settings. etc. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. If required. 3.18.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.18.020.3.57.off II 3-35 . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. c. and 0. three-notched aluminum (0. g. 0.18. d. corrosion. shielded surface.100 -0 .mid .18. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 100 KHz-500 KHz. b.18 HYDRAULIC PUMP AND TACHOMETER QUILL CASE (ET).3.3.4 Preparation of Part.2 Preparation of Helicopter.80% -20% F2 . Index No. (Refer to appendix B.) a.3 Access.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Item 2) 3.56° . 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. 3.0 . The gear shaft of this quill directly drives the hydraulic system pump.4. Access is through the transmission fairing. e.18. a. 3. 3. (Figure 1-4. f. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. sites of mechanical damage. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Eddy Current. right angle.008.18.200 KHz .

Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.5 b.6 Inspection Procedure. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The hydraulic pump and tachometer quill case.18.4 Backup Method. c.4.18. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.11 and Figure 3-18. (Refer to Appendix B. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. b. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3.11.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 3-36 .3. Fluorescent Penetrant. paragraph 1.1 Description (Figure 3-1.19 HYDRAULIC PUMP AND TACHOMETER GEAR TEETH (PT).3.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.18.19.2 Defects. require assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 3.) 3. 3.3.040-inch notch in test block. The hydraulic pump and tachometer gear teeth are observable upon removal of the hydraulic pump and tachometer drive quill from the transmission sump case.3. 3. (1). 3. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. 3. None required.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.19.19.3. 3. 3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic pump and tachometer gear teeth. if removed. Refer to Eddy Current Method. a.3 Primary Method.4.3. 3. Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 b.5 System Securing. Inspect the part.18. 3.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Secure the transmission fairing as required. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the hydraulic pump and tachometer drive quill removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Not applicable. 3.19. steps 3.19. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3 Access. Refer to Eddy Current Method.18.18. If the probe drives are changed. 19). Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.19. (2). Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. paragraph 1.

Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Quill Case 3-37 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-18.

4. 3.3 3.4.4 Backup Method.3.19.3.20 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL SLEEVE ASSEMBLY (ET). paragraph 1. (Refer to Appendix B. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.20. The tail rotor drive quill is mounted into the aft side of the transmission sump case and is driven by an accessory gear train.3.008. right angle.2 Defects. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.3.1 Description (Figure 3-1.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5 System Securing. 3-38 .7 and Table 1-5. 3. c. 3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. The tail rotor drive quill sleeve assembly is located on that portion of the tail rotor drive quill assembly which is inserted into the transmission itself. three-notched aluminum (0.20.4.4. 3.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor drive quill assembly removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.20.20. NDI Equipment and Materials. 3. g.19.19. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. b.3. straight.20. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3.5 Inspection Procedure.020. paragraph 1.4. shielded surface.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.20). The hydraulic pump and tachometer drive quill require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.20.2 Preparation of Helicopter.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. See Figure 3-19. A flexible splined coupling on the quill provides a means of attaching the tail rotor driveshaft. paragraph 1. Not applicable. assembly. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor drive quill sleeve Primary Method. Eddy Current. None required. and 0.16. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4 Preparation of Part. d.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.19. refer to Table 1-8 3. f. 3. 3. shielded surface. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4. Clean the hydraulic pump and tachometer drive quill gear teeth to remove inspection media. e.20. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Index No. paragraph 1.19. Inspect area of concern.3.3 Access.1 a. 3. 0. 3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-19. Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Gear Teeth 3-39 .

3.56° . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.20.0 . Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.11.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e1i. Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Assembly 3-40 . .3.20% F2 .5 a.0 .80% .57.20.) 3.040-inch notch in test block. Figure 3-20. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.6 Inspection Procedure.mid . Refer to Eddy Current Method. NDI Equipment Settings.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.11 and Figure 3-20. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.200 KHz . paragraph 1. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.100 -0 . paragraph 1.69.

4.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.2 teeth. (2). None required. The tail rotor drive quill provides the means whereby the transmission is connected to the tail rotor drive assembly. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor drive quill removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. paragraph 1.20. (1). and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3. lift-off.3. Defects. NDI Equipment and Materials.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 3. refer to Table 1-8 3. Magnetic Particle. d. f.21. b. The tail rotor drive quill bevel gear teeth shall be thoroughly cleaned. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Not applicable. 3-41 . 3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor drive quill bevel gear Primary Method. c.3 3. (Refer to Appendix B. c.20. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3.21.21). Index No. The bevel gear performs the actual transmission of power.4.3.4 Access.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.21.21. If the probe drives are changed. 3. 3.4. paragraph 1.20. 3. The tail rotor drive quill assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.20.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.2 Preparation of Helicopter.5 NDI Equipment Settings. e. b.3.3.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal Inspect the part.21 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL BEVEL GEAR TEETH (MT). Preparation of Part. 3. 3.20. 3.3. paragraph 1.5 b.8.5 System Securing.3 3. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3.21.21. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. steps 3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.21.4 Backup Method.1 a.21.

3. a. Inspect for cracks using the black light. f.21.3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.16. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. None required. c. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. for positions 2 and 3. 3. b. 3.8. Repeat steps a.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.8 Demagnetization. through e. Refer to paragraph 3.21. Figure 3-21.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.21. e. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. paragraph 1. Clean the tail rotor drive quill bevel gear teeth thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-21.5 System Securing.21.21. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Tail Rotor Drive Quill Bevel Gear Teeth 3-42 . Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.21. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.4 Backup Method.6 Inspection Procedure. The tail rotor drive quill requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.3.

(Refer to Appendix B. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor drive quill sleeve spacer. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.22. The tail rotor drive quill sleeve spacer shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.8. f.3 Access.1.3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Refer to paragraph 3.4 Preparation of Part. The drive quill sleeve spacer is an internal part to the tail rotor drive quill. The tail rotor drive quill provides the means whereby the transmission is connected to the tail rotor drive assembly. Defects. b. 3.22. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. a. paragraph 1. 22). e. c. 3. 3.3. Magnetic Particle.22.2 and Figure 1-6. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. . Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.3. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.22.2 3.22.22.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.4. NDI Equipment and Materials.6 Inspection Procedure.4. paragraph 1.22. d.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Not applicable.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.22. c.4. for position 2. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor drive quill removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Primary Method.3. through e.22.8.3 3.8. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-22. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Inspect for cracks using the black light. e.22.4. 3. f.1 Description (Figure 3-1.1 a. Refer to paragraph 1.22 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE QUILL SLEEVE SPACER (MT). b. 3. 3-43 d. Repeat steps a.3. Index No.3.

16. 3. installed from the top through a flat washer and a broad special washer and threaded into the tapped upper end of the pylon mount bolt itself. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. A large mount bolt.3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.22.22.3. Index No. paragraph 1. 3.22. It is secured by a retaining bolt. similar to 3-44 .4 Backup Method. None required. P3). herein referred to as the pylon mount bolt.3. Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Spacer 3.23. Each mount consists of a cylindrical molded rubber core bonded between steel inner and outer sleeves. With the switch remaining in the AC position. paragraph 1.23 PYLON MOUNT BOLTS (MT).1 Description (Figure 3-1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 3.22. Four main isolation mounts are located on pylon supports under the corners of the transmission support case.8 Demagnetization.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-22. Clean the tail rotor drive quill sleeve spacer thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. with an outer sleeve flange secured onto the pylon support by four bolts.4. The tail rotor drive quill requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. The pylon mount bolts are used in attaching the transmission to the helicopter fuselage. extends up through the mount inner sleeve to seat in a tapered bushing in the transmission support case leg.5 System Securing. 3. A fifth isolation mount. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.

4. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. c. 3. paragraph 1.3.1.23. 3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 3.2 and Figure 1-6.2 3.23. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Refer to paragraph 1.4 Preparation of Part. 3.23.3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.3. is located at the center aft of the pylon on a support fitting bridged across the rear side of the pylon support. 3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the pylon mount bolts.4.3 Access. No cracks are allowed. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. c. b.8. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Primary Method.3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.23. Magnetic Particle.8. b. Not applicable.3. The pylon mount bolts shall be thoroughly cleaned. (Refer to Appendix B.23.3 3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. d.8 Demagnetization.23. paragraph 1. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. NDI Equipment and Materials.1 a. 3-45 . Defects.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. a.23. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3.3. e. paragraph 1.23. f. The fifth mount bolt has a self-aligning bearing at the upper end.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the pylon mount bolts removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 3-23. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.4. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 3. 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. which is attached by a bolt to the middle of a welded beam extending between the aft legs of the transmission support case.5 NDI Equipment Settings.23.23.TM 1-1520-256-23 the four main mounts.

24.24 FIFTH MOUNT SUPPORT FITTING (PT).3 Primary Method. The fifth mount bolt has a self-aligning bearing at the upper end. which is attached by a bolt to the middle of a welded beam extending between the aft legs of the transmission support case. None required.24. 3. is located at the center aft of the pylon on a support fitting. A fifth mount.2 Defects. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the fifth pylon isolation mount support fitting.23. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.16. 3. 3.23. 24).5 System Securing. 3-46 .24. paragraph 1. Four main isolation mounts are located on pylon supports under the corners of the transmission support case. Fluorescent Penetrant. This fifth mount support fitting is bridged across the rear side of the pylon support. similar to the four main mounts. Index No.1 Description (Figure 3-1. The pylon mount bolts require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Clean the pylon mount bolts thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. No cracks are allowed. 3. Pylon Mount Bolts 3. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-23.4.4 Backup Method.

(Figure 1-4.4 Access. 3. None required.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method.3.24.24.3.3.24. Item 3) Preparation of Part.4. 3. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. (Refer to Appendix B. 3.-.5 System Securing. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3 3.24. paragraph 1.3. 3. paragraph 1.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. corrosion. Figure 3-24. Secure the pylon door as required. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Access is through the pylon door.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.. Fifth Mount Support Fitting 3-47 . etc.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.24. See Figure 3-24.24.3. if removed. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Inspect area of concern. transmission in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. sites of mechanical damage.3.16.5 Inspection Procedure. The transmission. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. 3.7 and Table 1-5.4. Clean the fifth mount support fitting to remove inspection media.24.24. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1. If required.3. paragraph 1. remove the .

Repeat steps a.3. 3. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Refer to paragraph 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1.25 FRICTION DAMPER (MT).25. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. c.2 Preparation of Helicopter.2 and Figure 1-6.8.4. Four main isolation mounts are located on pylon supports under the comers of the transmission support case. 1-1.25. Refer to paragraph 1. 3.25. Primary Method. e. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.25. b.4 Preparation of Part. Both rear main pylon isolation mounts are restrained by friction dampers. 3.25. Inspect for cracks using the black light. f.1. paragraph 1. (Refer to Appendix B. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.25.8. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the friction dampers removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table . Not applicable. b.3.3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.4. 3-48 .3. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. d.1 a.3. for position 2.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.25. Index No.6 Inspection Procedure. Magnetic Particle. e. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.25.25.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 25).3.25.4. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-25. a. which are cylindrical units connected between lower ends of the mount bolts and fittings in the pylon support structure. 3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.8.2 3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. 3.3 3.3. 3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.1 Description (Figure 3-1.4. NDI Equipment and Materials.3 Access. 3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the friction damper.25. c. paragraph 1. f. through e. Defects.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 3.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.

None required. Primary Method.25. paragraph 1. 3. 3. No cracks are allowed.4. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the main rotor mast nut. Clean the friction dampers thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.25. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 3-49 .26.3 Defects.3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Index No. The friction dampers require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method.5 System Securing.25. 3. Magnetic Particle. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.26. The main rotor mast nut is installed on the mast during the mast removal process.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-25. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Friction Damper 3. With the switch remaining in the AC position. providing a hoisting eye for lifting the mast assembly from the aircraft. 3.26 MAIN ROTOR MAST NUT (MT).8 Demagnetization. 3.16.2 3.26. 6).

) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3. paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3 Access.26.26.26. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. d. 3. The main rotor mast nut shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. b. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-26. 3.26.5 NDI Equipment Settings.26.4.4. e.8.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. refer to Table 1-8 3. Figure 3-26. NDI Equipment and Materials.3.4. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. (Refer to Appendix B. Not applicable.3.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.26. 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the main rotor mast nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Preparation of Part.3. paragraph 1.6 Inspection Procedure. f. Main Rotor Mast Nut 3-50 .1 a. c.

) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.26. Defects. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Clean the main rotor mast nut thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.26. c.3 3.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. for positions 2 and 3. and turns clockwise as viewed from the drive end. The pump is driven by a splined oil pump driveshaft from an accessory drive gear train. Refer to paragraph 3. e. c.26. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the oil pump driveshaft. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Primary Method.27. 27).8.26. Magnetic Particle.8.1 Description (Figure 3-1. With the switch remaining in the AC position.4 Backup Method. 3. The main rotor mast nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.27.8 Demagnetization. 3. None required.27 OIL PUMP DRIVESHAFT (MT). through e.1 a. f. 3. 3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.5 System Securing. 3.16.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Inspect for cracks using the black light. b. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Repeat steps a.27. 3.1.4. paragraph 1. e.2 and Figure 1-6. single element gerotor pump designed for internal installation with flange mounting in the bottom of the transmission sump. Refer to paragraph 1.3.27. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.2 3. d. 3-51 .3. f. NDI Equipment and Materials.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b. Index No. (Refer to Appendix B.26. The transmission oil pump is a direct-drive.3. paragraph 1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 3.

3.8. paragraph 1. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. through e. e. a. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.4.3 Access.4 Preparation of Part.27. Refer to paragraph 3. Repeat steps a.27.3.27.8. The oil pump driveshaft shall be thoroughly cleaned. Oil Pump Driveshaft 3-52 . Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.27. b. 3.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. c. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-27.27.3. 3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Not applicable.27. Figure 3-27.4. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. for position 2. paragraph 1.6 Inspection Procedure. 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the oil pump removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. d.3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. f.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.

3.3 3.4.1 Description (Figure 3-1.28. 3.3. None required. Not applicable. Primary Method. Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B. paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1.28).7 and Table 1-5.28. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the -art for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.4.3. 3. 3.28. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. See Figure 3-28.16. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3.4 Backup Method. 3.2 3. Index No. The oil jet assemblies are installed from exterior of the transmission at various points.4.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. The attaching screw hole indexes the direction of the jet nozzle spray.28.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4 Access. The oil pump requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.28. 3. Clean the oil pump driveshaft thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the oil jets.5 Inspection Procedure. 3-53 .3.3.27.27. 3. passing through walls of internal passages which carry oil under pressure.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.3. The oil jets require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 System Securing.4 Backup Method. 3.5 System Securing.28.8 Demagnetization.28. 3.4. Each jet is identified to its mounting port by matching stamped numerals. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. paragraph 1. Clean the oil jets to remove inspection media.28. Fluorescent Penetrant. and extend inside the transmission case to deliver aimed sprays of oil on gears and bearings. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3. paragraph 1. None required. paragraph 1.27.28 OIL JETS (PT).27. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the oil jets removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. paragraph 1.3.28. Inspect area of concern. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. 3.28.28. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.16.3 Defects.3.3. 8 3.

(Refer to Appendix B. with ends connected by V-band clamps to mating splined couplings on the transmission tail rotor drive quill and on the forward bearing hanger. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tail rotor driveshaft. Other shaft sections are mounted in a similar manner along the tailboom and vertical fin between hangers and gearboxes. straight.3 3.29.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-28.29. 90°1/2 inch drop 3-54 .29). Index No. Defects. NDI Equipment and Materials. Each shaft section is an anodized aluminum alloy tube with a curvic-splined coupling riveted to each end and is statically or dynamically balanced by metal strips bonded near the middle on the tube surface. shielded surface.3.1 a.2 3. 3. 100 KHz-500 KHz.29. an intermediate gearbox on the tailboom. Primary Method. Six driveshaft sections are incorporated in the power train aft of the transmission tail rotor drive quill. No cracks are allowed.29. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. and a tail rotor gearbox on the vertical fin.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Eddy Current. The forward shaft section extends through a tunnel between the engine firewalls. c.29 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT (ET). right angle. shielded surface. 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Oil Jets 3. with an identification plate showing part and serial numbers. These driveshafts serve as a line between four bearing hanger assemblies. b.

remove the tail rotor driveshaft in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 0.TM 1-1520-256-23 d.2 Preparation of Helicopter. and fairings.29.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.020.3. etc.4.5 a. g.3.4. Move probe over all three notches in test block.69.29. three-notched aluminum (0. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. refer to Table 1-8 3. . 3. If required. Cable Assembly Reference Block. doors. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 . paragraph 1.3 Access. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19e".20% F2 off Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 .6 Inspection Procedure.4.mid .3. and 0. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.4.29. Inspect the part. 3.100 -0 . Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.11. sites of mechanical damage. Refer to Eddy Current Method.200 KHz . 3. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.) 3.29. paragraph 1. NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.11 and Figure 3-29 for inspection areas. c.80% .29.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 3-55 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. e.56° . Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. b. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable covers.3. f.57. corrosion. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.008. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.040-inch notch in test block. paragraph 1. a.4 Preparation of Part. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.

2 3. and fairings as required.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-29. 3. to mating splined couplings on the transmission tail rotor drive quill and on the forward bearing hanger. and a tail rotor gearbox on the vertical fin. Tail Rotor Driveshaft NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 3. The tail rotor driveshaft. The forward shaft section extends through a tunnel between the engine firewalls.4. if removed. Six driveshaft sections are incorporated in the power train aft of the transmission tail rotor drive quill.30. 3. 3.29. refer to paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1. (2).3. Fluorescent Penetrant.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4 Mark and record the inspection results as required by Backup Method. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 3-56 .29. 3. These driveshafts serve as a line between four bearing hanger assemblies.30 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT CLAMPS (MT).3. This provides a total of 12 V-band tail rotor driveshaft clamps.3.29.3 Defects. Other shaft sections are mounted in a similar manner along the tailboom and vertical fin between hangers and gearboxes. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. panels.30.7. (1). Magnetic Particle. an intermediate gearbox on the tailboom.29.5 b. 30). This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor driveshaft clamps.3. Index No.30.1 Description (Figure 3-1.5 System Securing. 3. If the probes are changed.29. Secure all doors. with ends connected by V-band clamps (referred to herein as the tail rotor driveshaft clamps). 3. steps 3. Primary Method.

3. Not applicable. Figure 3-30.5 NDI Equipment Settings. c.6 Inspection Procedure.30.30. (Refer to Appendix B. refer to Table 1-8 3.3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.30.30.3. 3.4. d. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor driveshaft clamps removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 3.8. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Clamps 3-57 . e.30.30.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. f.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.3. NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 3.3.4. b.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. paragraph 1.3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-30.4.1 a. paragraph 1.

f. 3.2 and Figure 1-6. Clean the tail rotor driveshaft clamps thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 3-58 . for position 2. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. b.4 Backup Method. Refer to paragraph 3. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the total driveshaft. through e. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the driveshaft hangers (installed).31.3. The tail rotor driveshaft clamps require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Primary Method. (Refer to Appendix B.31. f. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3 3. 3.3. c. 3.2 3. None required. 3.1. Index No.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. b. 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 3.3.31. 3. paragraph 1. Each assembly consists of couplings on a short splined shaft and is mounted through a single-row sealed ball bearing in a ringshaped hanger equipped with two mounting lugs for attachment on a support fitting. 31). refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.1 Description (Figure 3-1.16. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.30. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.8.1 a.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. c.30.31. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. paragraph 1. e.8. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Inspect for cracks using the black light.31 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT HANGERS (MT). Defects. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.30. NDI Equipment and Materials. Repeat steps a.3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Magnetic Particle. e.4.4. d. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.30.5 System Securing.8 Demagnetization. With the switch remaining in the AC position.30. Refer to paragraph 1.3.

3. sites of mechanical damage. for position 2. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3 Access. Inspect for cracks using the black light. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. A t partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4. 3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.31. b. c.6 Inspection Procedure.3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-31.31.31. a. paragraph 1.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. doors. the hanger assemblies shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.31. f.8. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.2 Preparation of Helicopter. corrosion. through e.31. and fairings. etc. e. If required.4 Preparation of Part. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Refer to paragraph 3.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3.3. d. Figure 3-31. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.31.3. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hangers 3-59 .4. 3.8. Repeat steps a. paragraph 1. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 3. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable covers.

require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Not applicable.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. refer to paragraph 1.3 3. d. 3.3.4. 3.7 1.32. Mark and record inspection results as required by paragraph 3. Each assembly consists of inner (spherical) couplings on a short splined shaft.2 and Figure 1-6.31.8 Demagnetization.4. NDI Equipment and Materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. The tail rotor driveshaft hangers. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.32.3.4. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Clean the tail rotor driveshaft hangers thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.31. mounted through a single-row sealed ball bearing in a ring-shaped hanger. Magnetic Particle. 3. if removed. and fairings as required.31. Refer to paragraph 1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the inner (spherical) coupling removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.8.3. paragraph 1.4.1 a.32. 3-60 .4 Preparation of Part. c. 32).3 Access. Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Primary Method. 3.4 Backup Method.3. covers. 3.32.1 Description (Figure 3-1.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.7. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.3. equipped with two mounting lugs for attachment on a support fitting.3.8.1.4. With the switch remaining in the AC position. paragraph 1.32. Index No. 3. paragraph 1. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the inner (spherical) coupling. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.5 System Securing.16.31. Fluorescent Penetrant.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Defects. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. (Refer to Appendix B. Secure all doors. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the total driveshaft. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. e.32 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT INNER (SPHERICAL) COUPLING (MT).2 3. 3.32. 3.32. f.3. b. 3.4.32.

3. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.8. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Inner (Spherical) Coupling 3-61 . 3. 3.32.3. Repeat steps a.4 Backup Method.32. Figure 3-32. None required. c. e. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-32. through e.32. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. b. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 3. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. f. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. Inspect for cracks using the black light. for position 2.32. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.32. a.8 Demagnetization. Refer to paragraph 3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. paragraph 1.3.6 Inspection Procedure.

(Refer to Appendix B. e.33. 3-62 . Clean the inner (spherical) coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.33. Refer to paragraph 1.33.32.3. 3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light d. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. sites of mechanical damage.4. Each assembly includes forward couplings which provide a connection point for the driveshaft which is forward of the forward coupling.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. paragraph 1. doors. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3.4 Preparation of Part.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.8. 3.33. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 3. The inner (spherical) coupling and tail rotor driveshaft require assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the forward coupling. Magnetic Particle. paragraph 1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3 Access. 3.3. b. and fairings.33. corrosion.6 Inspection Procedure.33. NDI Equipment and Materials. c. 3.4. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.1. etc. 33). refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3.16. 3.8.2 and Figure 1-6.33.1 a. paragraph 1. the forward coupling shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f.33 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT FORWARD COUPLING (MT).3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4.3 3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4.33. If required.3.5 System Securing. Primary Method.33.3. 3. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable covers. Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the total driveshaft. Defects.33. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.2 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.

Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Forward Coupling a. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. 3.33.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-33.3. None required. for position 2. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3. e. paragraph 1. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. With the switch remaining in the AC position.8 Demagnetization. f. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Repeat steps a.3.4 Backup Method. Inspect for cracks using the black light. b. 3. c.33.3. 3-63 . 3.33.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Refer to paragraph 3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.8. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.33.

34. Defects.16. paragraph 1.3 3.34.5 System Securing. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. (Refer to Appendix B.4. 3-64 d. d. e. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. in turn.3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.34. if removed. Magnetic Particle.3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.8. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.34. corrosion.2 3. The forward coupling. provide a connection point for the driveshaft which is aft of the rear coupling.34.34. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the total driveshaft. doors. for position 2. Each hanger assembly includes rear couplings which.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Primary Method.3. 3.34 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT REAR COUPLING (MT).2 Preparation of Helicopter.3. e.8.34. Secure all covers.3 Access. 34). 3.34. 3.34. f. Index No. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.34. through e. . paragraph 1. 3. c. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.4.33.3. and fairings.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. the rear couplings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Refer to paragraph 3.1 a.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. 3. f.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer c. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 3.3. b. refer to Table 1-8 3. 3.6 Inspection Procedure. Clean the forward coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. If required. Repeat steps a. NDI Equipment and Materials. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. doors. and fairings as required. etc. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable covers. paragraph 1.4 Preparation of Part.3.4. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-34. sites of mechanical damage. b. a. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the rear coupling.

3 Defects.8 Demagnetization. Clean the rear couplings thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. The rear couplings require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. doors.34. mounted through a single-row sealed ball bearing in a ring-shaped hanger.34. Each assembly consists of couplings on a short splined shaft (the coupling shaft). paragraph 1. Index No. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Rear Coupling 3. 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. With the switch remaining in the AC position.34. Magnetic Particle.16. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. equipped with two mounting lugs for attachment on a support fitting. 3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3-65 .4 Backup Method.35.2 3.34.35. Secure all covers.3. paragraph 1.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the coupling shaft.5 System Securing. and fairings as required. 35).TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-34.4. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the total driveshaft. 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 Description (Figure 3-1.35 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT COUPLING SHAFT (MT).35. Primary Method. 3.3. None required. 3.

Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.8.4 Preparation of Part.35. 3. e.35. 3.35.1 a.4.35. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.35. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 3-35. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. c.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3 Access. Refer to paragraph 1. Figure 3-35.3.3.35.4.3.2 and Figure 1-6.3. 3. NDI Equipment and Materials. d. f. Not applicable.1.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the coupling shafts removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.6 Inspection Procedure. 3. 3. paragraph 1. b. Tail Rotor Driveshaft Coupling Shaft 3-66 . paragraph 1.4.3.8. (Refer to Appendix B.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4.

equipped with two mount-in lugs for attachment on a support fitting.35. c.35.1 a. 3. d.3. Index No. 3. NDI Equipment and Materials. g. b. 3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e. Each assembly consists of couplings on a short splined shaft. c.3 3. 3.35. The support fittings are affixed to the aircraft fuselage. Clean the coupling shafts thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. e.2 3. paragraph 1. Eddy Current.4. f. f.36. b. e. for position 2. None required.36. Refer to paragraph 3. shielded surface.020. mounted through a single-row sealed ball bearing in a ringshaped hanger. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.36.3.16. 3. 100 KHz-500 KHz.8 Demagnetization. 3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. right angle. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.36 TAIL ROTOR DRIVESHAFT HANGER SUPPORT FITTINGS (ET). Inspect for cracks using the black light.36. Repeat steps a.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.1 Description (Figure 3-1.8. Primary Method.3.35. place the probe/yoke legs . Defects.3. With the switch remaining in the AC position.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.35.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 36). The coupling shafts require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. three-notched aluminum (0. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Four hanger assemblies are utilized for the driveshaft.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.i in the same position used for magnetizing. paragraph 1.008. and 0. (Refer to Appendix B. straight.4 Backup Method. refer to Table 1-8 3-67 . 0. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hanger support fittings. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.5 System Securing. shielded surface. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 3.

3.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1.20% F2 off Refer to Eddy Current Method.11 and Figure 3-36.4.36. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.0 .36.040-inch notch in test block. NDI Equipment Settings. remove the hanger support fittings in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.11. sites of mechanical damage.36.3. Move probe over all three notches in test block. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.5 a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.36. .100 -0 .4 Preparation of Part. 3.56° . paragraph 1. paragraph 1.200 KHz .57.3. If required. 3. Refer to Preparation of Part c Area for NDI.0 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Refer to Eddy Current Method.) 3.80% .3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3 Access. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-1 9e . Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hanger Support Fittings 3-68 .TM 1-1520-256-23 3. 3. corrosion. etc.36.69.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Figure 3-36.3. Not applicable.4.mid .

37. and 0. steps 3. etc.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Eddy Current.2 Preparation of Helicopter. (1). g.3. and a magnetic chip detector. NOTE b.1 a. f. 3.37). Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. right angle. If required. shielded surface. Either probe identified in paragraph 3. No cracks are allowed.3. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. c. shielded surface. The input and output quills have flexible couplings for attachment of the driveshafts. with no speed change. This gearbox provides a 42 degree change in direction of the tail rotor driveshaft. If the probes are changed. NDI Equipment and Materials.008.3.37.37. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. d.3 3. a vent breather. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.36.36.37. straight. Primary Method. 3-69 . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. The hanger support fittings.020.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. refer to Table 1-8 3. Index No.4 Backup Method. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the intermediate gearbox.3.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3. e. An intermediate gearbox is located on the tailboom.5 System Securing. an oil level sight gage. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.37 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX CASE (ET). b. (Refer to Appendix B. c. None required. 3.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 3. The case is fitted with an oil filler cap. three-notched aluminum (0. sites of mechanical damage.3.5 b.36. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.37.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. (2). corrosion.36. Defects. remove the intermediate gearbox in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. at the base of the vertical fin.1 Description (Figure 3-1. The gearbox assembly consists of a case with a gear quill in each end. if removed. 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 100 KHz-500 KHz.2 3. 0.36. Inspect the part. 3.

57. Item 13) 3.0 .0 . Access is through the intermediate gearbox cover. 3. steps 3.3.100 -0 .mid .4. 3. The intermediate gearbox. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.37.4 Mark and record the inspection results as required by Backup Method.3. NOTE b. c. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell. (Figure 1-4.200 KHz .4. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. paragraph 1.20% F2 off Refer to Eddy Current Method.37. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.56° . Either probe identified in paragraph 3.040-inch notch in test block.37. . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. 3. (1).80% .4. if removed. Inspect the part. paragraph 1. a.69.3 Access.5 System Securing.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. refer to paragraph 1. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 3-70 .7.6 Inspection Procedure. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. (2). Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.5 b. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Fluorescent Penetrant. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 NDI Equipment Settings.11 and Figure 3-37.4. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.) 3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.37. Refer to Eddy Current Method.37.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.4.11. 3.37.3.4 Preparation of Part.3.37. a.37. Secure the intermediate gearbox cover as required.37.3. paragraph 1. Move probe over all three notches in test block.3.3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. If the probes are changed.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-37. Intermediate Gearbox Case 3-71 .

3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the intermediate J gearbox inner Primary Method. 3. The intermediate gearbox inner coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned. Defects. This gearbox provides a 42 degree change in direction of the tail rotor driveshaft.38. e. 3.4 Preparation of Part. Not applicable.38).38.38.1 a. c. 3. The input and output quills have flexible coupling assemblies for attachment of the driveshafts. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. 3.8.4. Intermediate Gearbox Inner Coupling 3-72 .38.2 Preparation of Helicopter. paragraph 1. Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3. Magnetic Particle.38.3 3.6 Inspection Procedure.3.3. f. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-38.3 Access.3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light d.1 Description (Figure 3-1.5 NDI Equipment Settings. The gearbox assembly consists of a case with a gear quill in each end. NDI Equipment and Materials.38. An intermediate gearbox is located on the tailboom. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. with no speed change.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.38. 3. paragraph 1.2 coupling.4. (Refer to Appendix B. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 3.38.38. Figure 3-38. refer to Table 1-8 3. at the base of the vertical fin.4. Index No.3. b. The coupling assemblies consist of an inner coupling which mates with an outer coupling. Refer to 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the intermediate gearbox inner coupling removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.38 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX INNER COUPLING (MT).

Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 3.39. 3.4. d. Defects.39 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX OUTER COUPLING (MT).4 Backup Method. Index No.38. Magnetic Particle. e. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3 3.8 Demagnetization.38.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.39. 3. 3. 3.39. With the switch remaining in the AC position. None required.3. f. Clean the intermediate gearbox inner coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. paragraph 1. through e. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. The intermediate gearbox inner coupling requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f. with no speed change. e. An intermediate gearbox is located on the tailboom. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.38.39).) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Repeat steps a.8.39. The coupling assemblies consist of an inner coupling which mates with an outer coupling.3.5 System Securing. c. 3. c. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.1 Description (Figure 3-1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The gearbox provides a 42 degree change in direction of the tail rotor driveshaft.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. for position 2. 3. paragraph 1. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the intermediate gearbox outer Primary Method.3. b.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 3. Inspect for cracks using the black light.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.38.1 a. Refer to paragraph 3. NDI Equipment and Materials. The gearbox assembly consists of a case with a gear quill in each end. (Refer to Appendix B. at the base of the vertical fin.39.38. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the intermediate gearbox outer coupling removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. b.16. 3-73 .3. The input and output quills have flexible coupling assemblies for attachment of the driveshafts.2 coupling. refer to Table 1-8 3.

Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 3. paragraph 1.39. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4 Preparation of Part.3. 3.5 System Securing. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.39. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. b. paragraph 1.3.39. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. paragraph 1. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Intermediate Gearbox Outer Coupling 3-74 .16. The intermediate gearbox outer coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned. for position 2.8. Clean the intermediate gearbox outer coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. f.39. e.39. None required. Figure 3-39.39. Refer to paragraph 3.39.39.8 Demagnetization.4.4. c. through e. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.6 Inspection Procedure. 3.3 Access. Repeat steps a.3. a. Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-39.4. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Refer to 3.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. The intermediate gearbox outer coupling requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Not applicable.3. paragraph 1. 3.4.3.4 Backup Method.8. 3.39.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3.3. 3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.

40). c. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. The input and output quills have flexible coupling assemblies for attachment of the driveshafts.3 3. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 3-40. refer to Table 1-8 3.1 a. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. (Refer to Appendix B. An intermediate gearbox is located on the tailboom.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 3. 3. The intermediate gearbox sleeve.3.3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.4.3 Access. Inspect for cracks using the black light. 3.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.40.2 3.40.4 Preparation of Part.4. an item internal to each of the quill assemblies. 3. paragraph 1. f. paragraph 1. d. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3-75 .3. b. NDI Equipment and Materials.4. paragraph 1. at the base of the vertical fin. Index No. Primary Method. Not applicable. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the intermediate gearbox sleeve removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. immediately behind the boot.3. Defects. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. d. e.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. b.3. with no speed change.3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.40. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. This gearbox provides a 42 degree change in direction of the tail rotor driveshaft.40 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX SLEEVE (MT). 3.40. Magnetic Particle. The gearbox assembly consists of a case with a gear quill in each end.5 NDI Equipment Settings. c.1 Description (Figure 3-1. 3.40.40.40. a.6 Inspection Procedure.40. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the intermediate gearbox sleeve. is located on the I r: pinion shaft.40.40.8.3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.

3.41 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX PINION SHAFT (MT). None required. The intermediate gearbox sleeve requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1 Description (Figure 3-1. at the base of the vertical fin.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-40. The input and output quills have flexible coupling assemblies for attachment of the driveshafts. Index No. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the intermediate -. 3.41.4.2 shaft. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Magnetic Particle.40. Intermediate Gearbox Sleeve 3. The intermediate gearbox pinion shafts provide the central shaft upon which the other components are placed.8 Demagnetization. 3.3 Defects.5 System Securing. paragraph 1. 3-76 .3. 3. 3.41. with no speed change. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.4 Backup Method.16. Clean the intermediate gearbox sleeve thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.41). An intermediate gearbox is located on the tailboom.40. This gearbox provides a 42 degree change in direction of the tail rotor driveshaft. 3.41. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.40. gearbox pinion Primary Method. With the switch remaining in the AC position. The gearbox assembly consists of a case with a gear quill in each end.

Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. refer to Table 1-8 3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-41.41.3. Intermediate Gearbox Pinion Shaft 3-77 . 3.3. e.4. Not applicable. d.1 a.4 Preparation of Part. 3. b.41. c. Figure 3-41.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.41. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.2 Preparation of Helicopter. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.4. (Refer to Appendix B.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.6 Inspection Procedure.41. f.3. 3.3 Access. 3.8.41.4.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. NDI Equipment and Materials. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the intermediate gearbox pinion shaft removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.41.3. paragraph 1. paragraph 1.

Clean the intermediate gearbox.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 3.8. b. an oil level sight gage.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. e. (Refer to Appendix B.020.42.42. Aircraft Marking Pencil. 3.42.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. f.3 3. Repeat steps a. f.41. c. 42).3. None required. 0. 3.3. Primary Method. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. No cracks are allowed.41. shielded surface. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 3. and a magnetic chip detector.1 Description (Figure 3-1. The gearbox consists of mating input and output gear quill assemblies set into a gear case provided with a vented oil filter cap. paragraph 1. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3. refer to Table 1-8 g. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor gearbox case. e. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e. straight. Index No.16.41.4 Backup Method. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. c.4. paragraph 1.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.5 System Securing. refer to Table 1-8 3-78 .6: 1 speed reduction between input driveshaft and output shaft. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.8 Demagnetization. b. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 3. 3.42 TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX CASE (ET). pinion shaft thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Refer to paragraph 3.41. d. NDI Equipment and Materials. and 0.3. The tail rotor is mounted on the output shaft. right angle. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Inspect for cracks using the black light.41. 3.1 a. shielded surface. The input quill has a flexible coupling for attachment of the driveshaft. 3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. A gearbox at the top of the tailboom vertical fin provides a 90 degree change in the direction of drive and a 2. The intermediate gearbox pinion shaft requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Eddy Current.008. 100 KHz-500 KHz. three-notched aluminum (0. for position 2.2 Defects. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.42.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.

3. 3-79 . 3.4.11 and Figure 3-42.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. -200 KHz -57. Inspection Procedure.42. NDI Equipment Settings.3. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.) 3.3. If the probes are changed.040-inch notch in test block. sites of mechanical damage.3. If required.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. steps 3. (2).0 -56° -mid -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 off Refer to Eddy Current Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.11. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Not applicable. Inspect the part. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.5 a.4. corrosion. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.6 a.3.42.42. 3.42.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF Pos V Pos b. Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 -69.4 Preparation of Part. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. c. paragraph 1.42.5 b. Either probe identified in paragraph 3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. NOTE b. Move probe over all three notches in test block. (1).42. paragraph 1. 3. remove the tail rotor gearbox case in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.42. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3 Access. etc.4. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit NORTEC-19ell. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.

3.3 Defects. 3.2 3.3. if removed. Primary Method. paragraph 1.3. None required. The tail rotor is mounted on the output shaft. The tail rotor gearbox case.42. 3.43. 3-80 .42.6:1 speed reduction between input driveshaft and output shaft.43. A gearbox at the top of the tailboom vertical fin provides a 90 degree change in the direction of drive and a 2.4 Backup Method.43.43 TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX INNER COUPLING (MT ). The gearbox consists of mating input and output gear quill assemblies set into a gear case provided with a vented oil filter cap. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor gearbox inner coupling.5 System Securing. an oil level sight gage. The input quill has a flexible coupling for attachment of the driveshaft.42. The flexible coupling consists of an inner and outer coupling assembly. 3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Tail Rotor Gearbox Case 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Magnetic Particle. and a magnetic chip detector. 43). Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-42.

refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Refer to paragraph 3.43. NDI Equipment and Materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.43.3. 3. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Repeat steps a.43. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor inner coupling removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Tail Rotor Gearbox Inner Coupling 3-81 . b. paragraph 1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4. refer to Table 1-8 3.8. 3. c.4. Figure 3-43. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-43.3. 3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. f.43. Inspect for cracks using the black light. for position 2. The tail rotor inner coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned. paragraph 1. b.3. a. 3. d.3.43.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. through e.1 a.4 Preparation of Part.8.3.3.3 Access. f.43. d. e. (Refer to Appendix B.43. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.6 Inspection Procedure. e. c. Not applicable.

3. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 3. d. The flexible coupling consists of an inner and outer coupling assembly.44. c. an oil level sight gage.6: 1 speed reduction between input driveshaft and output shaft.1 Description (Figure 3-1.3. paragraph 1.1 a.43.8 Demagnetization. 44). e. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. The tail rotor is mounted on the output shaft.44 TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX OUTER COUPLING (MT). Primary Method.44. paragraph 1. 3.43.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.44.43.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. 3.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.16. 3-82 . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor gearbox outer coupling removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.4 Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B. Index No. 3.3 Access.4 Backup Method.3.3.3.44. Clean the tail rotor inner coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.43.4. NDI Equipment and Materials.4. The gearbox consists of mating input and output gear quill assemblies set into a gear case provided with a vented oil filter cap. The tail rotor outer coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned. Not applicable.44. 3.2 3.5 System Securing. paragraph 1. f. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 3. and a magnetic chip detector. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.3 3.44. With the switch remaining in the AC position. refer to Table 1-8 3.3. 3.3. paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle. Defects.4.44. The tail rotor inner coupling requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. 3. None required. The input quill has a flexible coupling for attachment of the driveshaft. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b.2 Preparation of Helicopter. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor gearbox outer coupling.44.8.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. A gearbox at the top of the tailboom vertical fin provides a 90 degree change in the direction of drive and a 2.

d.3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 3.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 3.44.6 Inspection Procedure.8. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3.44. paragraph 1. e.3. for position 2. c.16.3. With the switch remaining in the AC position. None required. Repeat steps a.4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. paragraph 1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 3.8 Demagnetization.5 System Securing. Clean the tail rotor outer coupling thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. The tail rotor outer coupling requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e.4 Backup Method. 3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-44.44. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.44. a. Tail Rotor Gearbox Outer Coupling 3-83 . Figure 3-44. f. b.44. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3. Refer to paragraph 3.44.

The gearbox consists of mating input and output gear quill assemblies set into a gear case provided with a vented oil filter cap. c. 3. 3-84 . Primary Method. a. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. d. Aircraft Marking Pencil. (Refer to Appendix B.3.45.4.4.3 Defects. 3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.8.45.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.6: 1 speed reduction between input driveshaft and output shaft. Index No.45. The tail rotor is mounted on the output shaft.3. Magnetic Particle. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles e. b.3. Inspect for cracks using the black light. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tail rotor gearbox sleeve removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 3.45 TAIL ROTOR GEARBOX SLEEVE (MT). Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-45.3. Not applicable. 45). paragraph 1.4. 3.45.) a. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.45. Repeat steps a. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor gearbox sleeve.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.4 Preparation of Part.3. a tail rotor gearbox sleeve. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 3. A gearbox at the top of the tailboom vertical fin provides a 90 degree change in the direction of drive and a 2.8.TM 1-1520-256-23 3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Magnetometer c. Consumable Materials. Refer to paragraph 3.3 Access.45.45. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.45. Black Light d.3. paragraph 1. an oil level sight gage. refer to Table 1-8 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. through e.6 Inspection Procedure.2 3. for position 2. The flexible coupling consists of an inner and outer coupling assembly. and other components. f. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. e.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 3. 3. and a magnetic chip detector.45. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. The input quill has a flexible coupling for attachment of the driveshaft.45. refer to Table 1-8 f.

The tail rotor gearbox sleeve requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Clean the tail rotor gearbox sleeve thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Index No.3.2 3.46.45. NDI Equipment and Materials.45.45.45. 3.5 System Securing.3.4 Backup Method.46. 3.4. Tail Rotor Gearbox Sleeve 3.1 Description (Figure 3-1. The forged steel lift link is connected between the transmission support case and a fuselage beam. 3. None required.3. Magnetic Particle.) 3-85 . With the switch remaining in the AC position. 3. 46).16. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.8 Demagnetization. (Refer to Appendix B.46 TRANSMISSION LIFT LINK (MT). paragraph 1.46. No cracks are allowed. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.3 3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the lift link.3. Primary Method. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.1 Defects. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. paragraph 1. A lift link and five pylon isolation mounts are used to attach the transmission to the helicopter fuselage.46. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 3-45.

refer to Table 1-8 3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.46.3.46. 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. e.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.6 Inspection Procedure. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Transmission Lift Link 3-86 . corrosion. paragraph 1. (Figure 1-4. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 3. b. 3. the lift link shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. paragraph 1.3.46.3.4.8. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.4.46. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3 Access. sites of mechanical damage.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. f. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 3-46. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. If required.46. c. d. etc.4. Item 3) 3.3. Figure 3-46. Access is through the pylon door.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.

through e. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. c. e. Refer to paragraph 3. paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.46.3.5 System Securing.46. for positions 2 and 3.8.4 Backup Method. Repeat steps a. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. d.46. 3.4. 3.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 3.16.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. f. if removed. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.46.3. 3. b. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Secure the pylon door as required. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Clean the lift link thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 3-87/(3-88 blank) . Demagnetize before moving to the next position.8 Demagnetization. None required. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. The lift link. Inspect for cracks using the black light.3. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. paragraph 1.46.

The index number for each item may be used to locate it in Figure 4-1 . and Mount Assembly Friction Damper Mount Assembly Aft Landing Gear Attachments Crew Door Hinges Hinged Panel and Hinges Hinged Panel Assembly Hardware Cargo Door Cargo Door Retainers and Retainer Strap 4-1 . Corresponding inspection figures and applicable text paragraphs are listed opposite each inspection item.15 4.11 4. Table 4-1. Airframe and Landing Gear Group Inspection Index Index Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Inspection Method BT BT ET BT ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET PT ET ET Paragraph Number 4.4 4.6 4.17 4.19 Figure Number 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 Nomenclature Honeycombed Structures with Metallic Covering Honeycomb Structures with Non-Metallic Covering Forward Fuselage Metal Structures Center Service Deck Panel Center Service Deck.8 4.13 4.7 4.2 4. Hanger Bearing Brace Assembly. The airframe and landing gear group inspection items covered in this section are those critical items of the UH-1 helicopter series listed in the Airframe and Landing Gear Group Inspection Index (Table 4-1). GENERAL.9 4.16 4.12 4.18 4. Clip.5 4. Retaining Clip.14 4. and Main Beam Caps Aft Fuselage Structural Tube Reinforced Floor Mounting Plates and Base Assembly Transmission and Engine Cowling Anti-Collision Light Mount Lift Beam Cap and Adjacent Structure Friction Damper Support. 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION IV AIRFRAME AND LANDING GEAR GROUP 4.10 4.3 4.1 CONTENTS.

29 4.23 4.20 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 4-1. Airframe and Landing Gear Group Inspection Index . Rods.39 Index Number 20 21 22 23 24 *25 *26 27 *28 29 *30 *31 *32 *33 *34 35 *36 37 *38 39 Figure Number 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 NOTE: *indicates Flight Safety Part.Continued Inspection Paragraph Nomenclature Method Number Passenger Step Paratroop Static Line Fitting and Compression Tube Jack and Mooring Fittings Standard Crew Seat Mission Operator Seats Engine Mounts Engine Mount Fittings Engine Deck Fittings Pillow Blocks Exhaust Tailpipe and Duct Assemblies Bolts.36 4.34 4. 4-2 . and Pins Tailboom and Fuselage Attach Fittings Elevator Assembly Support Fittings Elevator Horn Assembly Intermediate Gearbox Support Installation Tailboom Structure Ninety Degree Gearbox Support Fitting Vertical Fin Landing Gear Cross Tubes Skid Tube Saddles PT ET MT ET ET MT MT MT MT PT MT ET ET ET ET ET ET PT UT ET 4.35 4. Rod Ends.27 4.24 4.32 4.21 4. Turnbuckles.30 4.38 4.28 4.37 4.25 4.31 4.22 4.33 4.26 4.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-1. Airframe and Landing Gear Group 4-3 .

or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. 4.3. b.2. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. refer to Table 1-8 4.3 Primary Method.5 NDI Equipment Settings. c. Index No. e. 4. misfit. Many subdefinitions of voids are given. metal honeycomb with skin thickness closest to that of the panel to be inspected .3. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Otherwise.2. Bond Testing.2. (Refer to Appendix B. Do not remove paint.2 HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES WITH METALLIC COVE RING (BT). and fairings.4 Preparation of Part. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block. d.4.1 a.6.2. Teflon Tape. g. such as lack of adhesive. paragraph 1. cabin floor panels. engine. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned. 2). refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Perform the NDI method contained herein on the assembly components listed above for the primary purpose of verification of void indications identified by visual inspection. 4-4 . 4. 4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The structural assembly components identified for inspection are fuselage skins.4.2. workstands.1. gas pocket. etc. This inspection is applicable to honeycomb structures with metallic covering. and transmission cowling. doors.2 Preparation of Helicopter.2. f. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. this manual makes no distinction among these. instead grouping them all under one general term ("void").3.2 Defects. However. 4.2.3 Access. 4. NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Bond Test Equipment. 4.4.3. paragraph 1. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded.3.2.) Bond Test Unit Probe.1 Description (Figure 4-1.

3. b. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster.40% V Pos . d. and make the following adjustments: H Pos . f. NOTE c. and ALARM can help to refine the selectivity in locating defects among differing composite materials. the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired. and e. adjustments to the FREQ. 4-5 . press NULL. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. press SPCL. g.MID Press SET and select DISPLAY PHASE. Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time. The Bondmaster is programmed to automatically set test parameters to a start-up or initial bond test. paragraph 1. GAIN. Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas. Refer to Bond Test Method. Do this several times while moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void. 4. Continue to try phase setting until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction.4. Place probe on panel in location where test for void is desired and press NULL. or 270). By following the steps outlined above. e. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot. Note the video signature for each.180. Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder. and repeat steps d. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response. Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN.80% PHASE REF -0 DRIVE . The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup.6. If. Inspect for voids in the inspection areas shown in Figures 4-2. during setup. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the standard. Place probe on the good area of test blocks and press GOOD PART. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. If not. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART. press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90.2. Turn on Bondmaster.6 Inspection Procedure.

Honeycomb Structures with Metallic Covering 4-6 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-2.

3. such as lack of adhesive. If the panel skin is 0. misfit. This inspection is applicable to honeycomb structure with non-metallic covering. 4.3. Panel edges and attachment points may not be bonded structure and do not normally contain honeycomb. 4. These areas will respond similarly to voids with the Bondmaster. None required. etc. The structural assembly components identified for inspection are fairings. Place probe on blade in location where test for void is desired and press NULL. Be sure of panel configuration. Index No.3.2. instead grouping them all under one general term ("void").4 4.6. However. System Securing.020 inch thick or less. 4. 4. Refer to Bond Test Method.3. gas pocket. Bond Testing. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded. 4-7 . Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals. and service decks. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response.4. this manual makes no distinction among these. Inspect the areas as shown in Figure 4-2. panels. Panels having rigidized skins are more easily scanned using wide Teflon tape on the probe holder.3.3 Backup Method. 4. 3). Perform the NDI method contained herein on the assembly components listed above for the primary purpose of verification of void indications identified by visual inspection. Secure all access panels in accordance with the applicable technical manual listed in Table HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES WITH NON-METALLIC COVERING (BT).2.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE This setup is very sensitive to thin skin-to-core bonding. NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids.1 Description (Figure 4-1. paragraph 1.2 Defects. Many subdefinitions of voids are given. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void.2. move the probe slowly over the skin and note the slight amplitude change (bounce) as the probe senses alternately the honeycomb cell nodes and cell walls.3 Primary Method.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 1-1. doors. 4.

Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder. refer to Table 1-8 4.40% V Pos -80% PHASE REF -0 DRIVE . NDI Equipment and Materials.3. doors. and make the following adjustments: H Pos . workstalnds.3. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster. paragraph 1. f.) Bond Test Unit Probe.4. Turn on Bondmaster.3. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. 4. Note the video signature for each.3. paragraph 1. b.1 a. e. (Refer to Appendix B. NDI Equipment Settings. Composite Defect Standard #1 Teflon Tape. press SPCL. Do not remove paint.4 Preparation of Part. Place probe on the good area of test blocks and press GOOD PART. Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms.3.3 Access. g.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.1.3.6.3. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the standard. 4-8 . Otherwise. Refer to Bond Test Equipment.5 a. c. b. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.PHASE. and fairings. c. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.3.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter.MID Press SET and select DISPLAY .4. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned. d. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4. d. 4.

If not. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. during setup. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 180. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired. The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup. NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids. Inspect the areas as shown in Figure 4-3.4. By following the steps outlined above. Secure all access panels in accordance with the applicable technical manual listed in Table 1-1. Do this several times while moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area.3. Inspection Procedure. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals. g. and ALARM can help to refine the selectivity in locating defects among differing composite materials.4 Backup Method.3.3. Continue to try phase setting until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot. or 270). adjustments to the FREQ. 4.6. GAIN. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.3. 4. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN. Refer to Bond Test Method. None required. paragraph 1. NOTE If.6 Place probe on blade in location where test for void is desired and press NULL. The Bondmaster is programmed to automatically set test parameters to a start-up or initial bond test. Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block. press NULL.3. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART. 4. Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas. the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box. and repeat steps d.TM 1-1520-256-23 e. 4.3. 4-9 .3. f. and e.5 System Securing. A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-3. Honeycomb Structures with Non-Metallic Covering 4-10 .

100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.2 Defects.1 Description (Figure 4-1.4.4.020. i.020. stringers. and 0. three-notched titanium (0. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. longerons. 4. the metal structures shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. refer to Table 1-8 4. h.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate all applicable access panels. c.4. personnel injury could result from accidental falls. paragraph 1.4). g.4.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. or gouges do not conceal cracks.1 a.4. corrosion. 0. (Refer to Appendix B. and 0. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3 Access.020. spars. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. three-notched magnesium (0.3 4. and fairings.008.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. 0. Otherwise. e. bulkheads.3. sites of mechanical damage. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.040 EDM notches) Reference Block. 4. shielded surface. Eddy Current.008. 4. Perform the NDI method contained herein on the forward fuselage components listed above for the purpose of (1) confirmation of crack indications identified by visual inspection. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. NDI Equipment and Materials. 4. and 0. right angle. If required. three-notched aluminum (0. etc. 4-11 . d. 0.3. shielded surface. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. (2) verification that dents. Primary Method. scratches.4. doors.4.3. This inspection is applicable to all forward fuselage metallic skins.3. b. straight. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. and main beams.040 EDM notches) Reference Block. and (3) locating the ends of confirmed cracks so that stop drilling may be performed.4.008. 4. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. Index No.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.4 Preparation of Part. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. f.4 FORWARD FUSELAGE METAL STRUCTURES (ET). workstands.

3.0 .4.4. . Move probe over all three notches in test block. NDI Equipment Settings. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.0 -(56°aluminum and magnesium) (30° titanium) .mid -100 -0 -80% -20% .200 KHz F2 .57. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF Pos V Pos b. Figure 4-4.3. NORTEC-1 9ell.) 4.11. (2) (3) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Refer to Eddy Current Method.4.11 and Figure 4-4.69. Forward Fuselage Metal Structures 4-12 . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.4.5 a.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. paragraph 1.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.

3. if removed. (Refer to Appendix B.3.5.4. Mechanical Impedance Analysis Probe Holder Cable Assembly Test Block. 4. Secure access panels. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The center service deck panel is the structural component to which the engine and transmission attach. instead grouping them all under one general term ("void").3 4. Many subdefinitions of voids are given. and in the area of the aft engine mount fittings at station 200. paragraph 1.5. edges at center fuel access door. Index No. steps 4. this manual makes no distinction among these. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. NOTE A void is defined as an unbonded area that is supposed to be bonded.) Bond Test Unit Probe. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.5.4 Backup Method.4. f. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.2 Defects. refer to Table 1-8 4-13 .3.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 4. 4. etc. gas pocket. c.5. Inspect the part.4.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. (2). 4. d.5 System Securing. Metal structures. require installation in accordance with technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7 Marking and Recording of inspection Results.1 a.5 CENTER SERVICE DECK PANEL (BT).4. such as lack of adhesive. b. The structure is comprised of aluminum honeycomb sandwiched between titanium outer skin and fiberglass inner skin. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. (1). NDI Equipment and Materials. Primary Method. 5). If the probes are changed. Bond Testing. g.4.5 b. misfit. 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.1 Description (Figure 4-1. and fairings as required. metal honeycomb with skin thickness closest to that of the panel to be inspected Teflon Tape. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4. e. doors. 4.3. b. None required. However. Inspect the entire deck paying particular attention to void damage around the edges of the large hole in canted portion of the center service deck.

Use DIFF soft key to observe difference between good and bad areas of test block.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5 a. 4. NOTE c.5. 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Place probe on the good area of test blocks and press GOOD PART.4.5. 180.MID Press SET and select DISPLAY PHASE. NDI Equipment Settings. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. or 270). the flying spot deflects upward or to the side when the probe passes over the bad part instead of the desired down deflection toward the alarm box. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.4 Preparation of Part. Do this several times while moving the probe slightly to different positions within the void area. Otherwise. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. paragraph 1.3. d.4.5. Protect probe with Teflon tape and install in probe holder. paragraph 1. If.40% V Pos . during setup. workstands.4. The components shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Bond Test Equipment.1. press SPCL. Attach cable and probe to Bondmaster. press SPCL and toggle to a different phase setting (90. b. and fairings.3 Access.80% PHASE REF -0 DRIVE . 4.3.3.5. and make the following adjustments: H Pos . personnel injury could result from accidental falls. doors. and e. Continue to try phase setting until the flying spot moves in the desired down direction. Do this several times while moving the probe to different spots in the good area of the standard. and repeat steps d. Note the video signature for each. Turn on Bondmaster. 4-14 . Select and enter a position that gives a strong difference between good and void areas. Do not remove paint. Select and enter a representative good area by pressing GOOD PART one last time.6. e. Place probe on void area of test block and press BAD PART.3.

5. g.5.6 Place probe on blade in location where test for void is desired and press NULL. adjustments to the FREQ.6. If not. GAIN.3. The default gate/alarm setting may be incorrect for this setup. Inspect the areas as shown in Figure 4-5. The Bondmaster is programmed to automatically set test parameters to a start-up or initial bond test.3. Slide probe from good to void area and note response from flying spot. 4. and ALARM can help to refine the selectivity in locating defects among differing composite materials. Place probe on good area of test block and press RUN. 4. This response should provide both amplitude (vertical) and phase (horizontal) movement. By following the steps outlined above.TM 1-1520-256-23 f. Flying spot should be near the top-center of the ACTIVE screen. Move probe from good to suspect area and note response. Mark and record the inspection results as required by Figure 4-5. paragraph 1. Refer to Bond Test Method.4. Turn off or reset gate/alarm as desired.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. press NULL. Center Service Deck Panel 4-15 . A strong amplitude change and phase shift similar to the standard is indicative of a void. paragraph 1. Inspection Procedure.

5.3 Access. three-notched aluminum (0.3.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. NDI Equipment and Materials. f.008. 4. 4. HANGER BEARING BRACE ASSEMBLY.off 4-16 .56° F2 .1 a. 4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 0. d.57. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.0 .6.6.200 KHz .6. shielded surface. 4.3.6.2 Defects. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. and 0.6. 4. e.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Attention shall be directed to accurately mark the boundaries of all voids. Index No. hanger bearing brace assembly. None required. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. b. engine mount main beam caps.6.6).3 4.3.69. and surrounding areas. Secure all access panels in accordance with the applicable technical manual listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method. straight. NDI Equipment Settings. c.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot . 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 4.6 CENTER SERVICE DECK. hanger bearing brace assembly. 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the hanger bearing brace assembly and main beam caps removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Eddy Current.4. right angle.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. shielded surface. paragraph 1. Primary Method.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Not applicable.0 .5. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the center service deck. 4. AND MAIN BEAM CAPS (ET).4 Preparation of Part. NORTEC-19ell. (Refer to Appendix B. This inspection is applicable to the center service deck. refer to Table 1-8 4.5 a. and main beam caps at engine mount locations after the center service deck has been removed. These markings will be needed to determine acceptance or rejection criteria in accordance with applicable technical manuals.020.1 Description (Figure 4-1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.6.3. g. 100 KHz-500 KHz.6.3.5 System Securing. 4.

7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 4. No cracks are allowed. NDI Equipment and Materials.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the aft fuselage structural tube and surrounding areas. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.6. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.3.7.6.3. paragraph 1. Index No.7. Inspection Procedure. The hanger brace assembly and main beam caps require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 7). Refer to Eddy Current Method.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.040-inch notch in test block. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.mid LPF . (Refer to Appendix B. 4.3.7. Refer to Eddy Current Method.6.6. If the probes are changed.3. (1).4 Backup Method.6 a. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4.4. 4. paragraph 1.11. (2).1 Description (Figure 4-1.5 System Securing.80% V Pos -20% b. Eddy Current. The aft fuselage structural tube is used as a structural support for the aft fuselage.6. paragraph 1. c. 4.1 Primary Method.11 and Figure 4-6.3.7.TM 1-1520-256-23 Probe drive . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.5 b. 4. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.) 4. Inspect the part. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Any signal similar t6 the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.6. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.2 Defects. steps 4.7 AFT FUSELAGE STRUCTURAL TUBE (ET). b.) 4-17 .3 4.4. None required.100 HPF -0 H Pos .

and Main Beam Cap 4-18 . Hanger Bearing Brace Assembly.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-6. Center Service Deck.

e. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.5 a.3.4 Preparation The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3. paragraph 1. Access is through the engine oil tank door.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. (Figure 1-4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.0 . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.mid .7. shielded surface.11 and Figure 4-7.4. paragraph 1. etc. the structural tube shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.7. 100 KHz-500 KHz.4. NORTEC-1 9e . c. straight. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b. Refer to Eddy Current Method. g. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. 4.3 Access.100 -0 .off Refer to Eddy Current Method. NDI Equipment Settings.7.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. of Part. 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. f. If required. three-notched aluminum (0.80% -20% F2 . sites of mechanical damage.0 . refer to Table 1-8 4.11.4.7. paragraph 1. d.57.020. right angle. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Item 37) 4.6 4-19 . corrosion. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 11 Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.040-inch notch in test block.4.200 KHz .69. shielded surface. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.56° . 0. and 0. 4.3.3.) Inspection Procedure. . 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.7. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.008. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-7. Aft Fuselage Structural Tube 4-20 .

) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. NDI Equipment and Materials. (1). 4.8. 4.020. 4.7. steps 4. (2).8.3. base assembly. Secure the engine oil tank door as required.3 Access. b.7. 4. 4. 4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Primary Method. 4.008. Eddy Current. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. shielded surface. If required. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. the floor mounting plates and base assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the reinforced floor mounting plates.3 4.8. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.8.8 REINFORCED FLOOR MOUNTING PLATES AND BASE ASSEMBLY (ET). e.8.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b.1 a. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. The reinforced floor mounting plates are used to support the mission equipment and operator's seat for Position 1 and 2 for the Radio Countermeasures System.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. c. 100 KHz-500 KHz.8. (Refer to Appendix B. Index No. refer to Table 1-8 4.4 Backup Method.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.3. None required.7.1 Description (Figure 4-1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. right angle. sites of mechanical damage.3. straight. corrosion.5 System Securing.2 Defects. 4-21 . Remove mission operator seat assemblies. shielded surface.7. Inspect the part. g. three-notched aluminum (0. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.3. etc. f. If the probes are changed. d. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3. c. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. and surrounding areas. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.7. The aft fuselage structural tube.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.3.8).5 b. if removed. 0. and 0.

1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.57.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3. NORTEC-19eII.4. paragraph 1. paragraph 1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4. NDI Equipment Settings. 4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3. if removed. None required. . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.8. (2).6 a. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.4 Preparation of Part.80% -20% F2 . 4-22 .4.8.8. 4. steps 4. NOTE 4. If the probes are changed.8.mid .11.040-inch notch in test block.) Inspection Procedure.4 Backup Method. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11 and Figure 4-8.5 b.69. b. Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. (1).3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. The reinforced floor mounting plates and base assembly. re quire installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.200 KHz . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.5 a.8. 4.8.0 . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.100 -0 . (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. c. Inspect the part. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 . paragraph 1. Refer to Eddy Current Method.5 System Securing.56° .8.8.4. paragraph 1. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3.4.3.

Reinforced Floor Mounting Plates and Base Assembly 4-23 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-8.

No cracks are allowed. g. 4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b.3.100 HPF -0 H Pos . 4. paragraph 1.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. paragraph 1.5 a. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.) Inspection Procedure.4.4.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 4. Eddy Current. The engine compartment is covered by side and upper cowling assemblies.3 4. right angle.3.200 KHz F2 .1 a. 4. e. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 4-24 b.9. and 0. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. c.9.69.9 TRANSMISSION AND ENGINE COWLING (ET). (Refer to Appendix B.3.3. 4.008.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 9). The tailpipe fairing is part of the aft engine cowling. NORTEC-19e11. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the transmission and engine cowling.4. corrosion. A one piece transmission cowling is secured by three latches. the cowlings and fairings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. shielded surface. refer to Table 1-8 4.80% V Pos . Frequency F1 . tailpipe fairing.9. Not applicable. and surrounding areas. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.20% Refer to Eddy Current Method.56° Probe drive .020.11. shielded surface. sites of mechanical damage. 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method.6 . Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.9.mid LPF . 4.0 Rot . Primary Method. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.9.040-inch notch in test block. etc. three-notched aluminum (0. d. 100 KHz-500 KHz. straight.9. Access to transmission and engine is through those cowlings.9. 0. NDI Equipment Settings.4 Preparation of Part. paragraph 1.9.57. f.11 and Figure 4-9.1 Description (Figure 4-1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Index No. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3.off HdB .4.2 Defects. NDI Equipment and Materials.9.3 Access. If required.0 VdB .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-9. Transmission and Engine Cowling 4-25 .

4. Eddy Current.2 Preparation of Helicopter. and 0. The tailpipe and fairings. e. (1). paragraph 1.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.9.3 4.9.3.2 Defects. 0. 4-26 . If required.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4. if removed.008.10).10 ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT MOUNT (ET). etc. b.10.10.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. No cracks are allowed.5 b.5 System Securing.4 Backup Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. c. g. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. NDI Equipment and Materials. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. steps 4. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. shielded surface.9. the anti-collision light mount shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.9. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. sites of mechanical damage. 4.10. Inspect the part. Index No.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. f. 4.3. corrosion. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 4.020. refer to Table 1-8 4. (2). None required.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. 4. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (Refer to Appendix B. If the probes are changed. right angle. c. straight. The anti-collision light is mounted on top of the upper tailpipe fairing. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.3.10. shielded surface. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Primary Method.3.1 a.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. b. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.1 Description (Figure 4-1. three-notched aluminum (0. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the anti-collision light mount and surrounding areas.9.3.10. d.

c. Not applicable.) Inspection Procedure. If the probes are changed.040-inch notch in test block.56° .10. . Refer to Eddy Current Method. NDI Equipment Settings.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. (2).5 b.4 Preparation of Part. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.5 a. 4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.6 a.80% .3.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.200 KHz . personnel injury could result from accidental falls.11 and Figure 4-10.11.20% F2 . (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.10.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. 4.3.69. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.3. Inspect the part. Otherwise. workstands. 4-27 . paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.4.4.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.0 . 4.10.3 Access.3.0 . or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.4. (1). NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.10.10. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. paragraph 1.3. WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. steps 4. NORTEC-19ell.mid .10. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.57. b.100 -0 . paragraph 1. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.

The lift beam absorbs or carries all vertical loads induced during flight.3.4 Backup Method.11. 4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.11. Eddy Current. stiffeners.1 Description (Figure 4-1.3.11 LIFT BEAM CAP AND ADJACENT STRUCTURE (ET). paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-10.11. if removed.10. Anti-Collision Light Mount 4. The beam is constructed of aluminum alloy web. 4.1 Primary Method. 11).3 4.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the lift beam cap and adjacent structure and surrounding areas. The anti-collision light mount.) 4-28 .5 System Securing. Index No. 4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. None required.11. 4. NDI Equipment and Materials. Fittings are installed on the beam to provide attachment points for the lift link and cargo hook. and extrusions.3.10. No cracks are allowed. 4. (Refer to Appendix B.10.

90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.2 Preparation of Helicopter. b.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. g.) 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. and 0. Refer to Eddy Current Method. a.040-inch notch in test block.mid LPF . Frequency F1 . etc. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1.56° Probe drive .3.20% b.11.4. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.4. 4. e.0 Rot . f.3.11 and Figure 4-11. shielded surface.4. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.0 VdB . (3) Move probe overall three notches in test block. 4-29 .11. right angle. c.11.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. corrosion. 0. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.5 NDI Equipment Settings. paragraph 1. shielded surface.off HdB .3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.57. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. d.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Item 3) 4.11. Access is through the pylon door. 100 KHz-500 KHz. refer to Table 1-8 4. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. paragraph 1. b.4. (Figure 1-4.11.100 HPF -0 H Pos . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.80% V Pos.69. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 4. c. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.200 KHz F2 . Inspect the part.020. a.3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. NORTEC-1 9e1. sites of mechanical damage.11.008.3 Access. three-notched aluminum (0. straight.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-11. Lift Beam Cap and Adjacent Structure 4-30 .

Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment. f. If the probes are changed. 4-31 .040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.12. CLIP. retaining clip.11. right angle. RETAINING CLIP. No cracks are allowed.11.008. (2). 4. 0.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Access is through the transmission fairing. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3. Index No.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.11. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. The friction damper support. and surrounding areas. g.12. paragraph 1.5 b. steps 4.4 4. 4. the parts shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1 Description (Figure 4-1.3. refer to Table 1-8 4. 4.3 Primary Method. Otherwise. d. If required. Eddy Current. (1).3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. workstands. Item 2) WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 100 KHz-500 KHz.11.12. (Refer to Appendix B. mount assembly.12.020. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the friction damper support. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 4. clip. and 0.12 FRICTION DAMPER SUPPORT. shielded surface.) a.5 Backup Method.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3 Access. c. shielded surface. retaining clip. corrosion.3. 4.2 Defects.12. A ND MOUNT ASSEMBLY (ET).11. System Securing. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. straight. 4. etc. and mount assembly are used to support the transmission attachment to the airframe. (Figure 1-4. 4. 12). Secure the pylon door as required. three-notched aluminum (0. b. e. clip.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. None required.12.3. sites of mechanical damage.

Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.12.3. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. (1). 4. and mount assembly.5 System Securing.12.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.0 VdB -69. steps 4. None required. 4-32 .12. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. b. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff.3. If the probes are changed.11.4. a. The friction damper support. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.) 4.5 NDI Equipment Settings. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.12.4 Backup Method. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Inspect the part.off HdB -57.3. 4. a. 4. retaining clip.3.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.040-inch notch in test block.11 and Figure 4-12. (2). Frequency F1 -200 KHz F2 .4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.5 b.0 Rot -56° Probe drive -mid LPF -100 HPF -0 H Pos -80% V Pos -20% b. paragraph 1.3.12. paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. clip.4 Preparation of Part.3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1.12.12. c. NORTEC-1 9e".6 Inspection Procedure. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.12. if removed. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Secure the transmission fairing as required. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.4.4.

Retaining Clip.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-12. Friction Damper Support. and Mount Assembly 4-33 . Clip.

4. 4.560 4-34 . shielded surface. shielded surface. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 13). right angle.13.008.2 Defects.3.-. 0.3 4.Item2) WARNING Maintenance Platforms/Workstands Use only appropriate platforms. 4.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.0 VdB . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Eddy Current.13 FRICTION DAMPER MOUNT ASSEMBLY (ET). (Figure1-4. workstands. No cracks are allowed.1 Description (Figure 4-1. c. The friction damper mount assembly is the attachment point of the transmission to the airframe. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the friction damper mount stiffener and support assembly. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. or other approved locally procured stands and restraint equipment when working above 10 feet on helicopters in a nontactical environment.3. e. a. Frequency F1 . Primary Method.4 Preparation of Part. Access is through the transmission fairing.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 4.4. and 0. 4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. 4.13. g. sites of mechanical damage. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.1 a. Index No. If required. straight. NORTEC-19ell.3. (Refer to Appendix B.13.020.5 NDI Equipment Settings.0 Rot . three notched-aluminum (0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.69. NDI Equipment and Materials.57. b. 100 KHz-500 KHz.13. refer to Table 1-8 4.13. d. etc. f. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the friction damper mount assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.3.3 Access. corrosion.13. Otherwise. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. personnel injury could result from accidental falls.200 KHz F2 . paragraph 1.13.13.4.off HdB .

(3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.6 Inspection Procedure. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block.13. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff.) 4. Inspect the part. Figure 4-13.TM 1-1520-256-23 Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. c. Friction Damper Mount Assembly 4-35 .040-inch notch in test block.11 and Figure 4-13.4.4.11. paragraph 1. a. .20% Refer to Eddy Current Method.mid . Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.80% . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. paragraph 1.3.100 -0 . b. Refer to Eddy Current Method.

A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. g.5 NDI Equipment Settings. right angle.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 0. Index No. 4.13. corrosion.020. Secure the transmission fairing as required. etc. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.14.14 AFT LANDING GEAR ATTACHMENTS (ET). Eddy Current.14. If required. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. 4.3.14. (1).3. 14). The friction damper mount assembly.14. No cracks are allowed. shielded surface. paragraph 1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. e.) a. steps 4.4 Preparation of Part. 4. 4. 4-36 .1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3 Defects.1 Description (Figure 4-1.4 Backup Method.5 System Securing. the aft landing gear shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 b. 4.3.4. 4. Primary Method.13.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.4. (2). 100 KHz-500 KHz. 4. if removed.13.13. shielded surface. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. d. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.13. 4. None required. (Refer to Appendix B. three-notched aluminum (0.008.3 Access. c. 4.3. The aft landing gear attachments require inspection if the landing gear reveals excessive wear of the supports resulting in looseness of the landing gear or contact with the fuselage.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.14. refer to Table 1-8 4. b. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. f. 4.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. and 0. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Not applicable. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the part.3.3. sites of mechanical damage.14. If the probes are changed.3.14. straight.14. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.

15.4.15. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos -200 KHz -57. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.15. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.15 CREW DOOR HINGES (ET).3.6 Inspection Procedure.14. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the hinges. refer to paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed.15). 4. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.3 Defects.5 b. The aft landing gear attachment points. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The crew door hinges attach the door to the airframe which enables the door to swing open and closed. Primary Method.14. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. (2).14. b.11 and Figure 4-14.5 System Securing.3. c. 4. (1). 4.) 4.0 -56° -mid -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 .11.3.1 Description (Figure 4-1. 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift- Inspect the part.3. Fluorescent Penetrant.0 -69. if removed. 4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block. Index No. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.040-inch notch in test block. steps 4. If the probes are changed.2 4. 4-37 . paragraph 1.7.14. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. Eddy Current. off.off b.4 Backup Method.4. NORTEC-19el1. a.14.14.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-14. Aft Landing Gear Attachments 4-38 .

three-notched aluminum (0. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.008.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Not applicable.0 Rot -56° Probe drive -mid LPF -100 HPF -0 H Pos -80% V Pos -20% b.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. f.15. 4.3 Access. b. 4-39 .) 4. shielded surface. straight. c. paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 4. Inspect the part.4 Preparation of Part. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.11 and Figure 4-15 a. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. and 0. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff.15.15.3.3. NORTEC-1 9e".3.15.11.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Refer Eddy Current Method. a.5 NDI Equipment Settings. paragraph 1.15.off HdB -57. g. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.15. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.040-inch notch in test block. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 0. right angle.4.6 Inspection Procedure. Frequency F1 -200 KHz F2 .1 DI Equipment and Materials. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. (Refer to Appendix B. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.4.0 VdB -69.4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the hinges removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Eddy Current Method. 4. c. shielded surface.3.020. 4. b. d. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. e.) a.3.

(2). Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the panel hinges.(1).15. A position spring with detent is provided to hold panel open during loading and unloading operations.3.3.3. Eddy Current.3.16 HINGED PANEL AND HINGES (ET).1 Description (Figure 4-1. 4. 4.3 Defects. No cracks are allowed. steps 4.2 4.16.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. 4.15.15. manuals listed in Table 1-1.16. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 4.4 Backup Method.5 b.15. 4-40 . None required. The crew door hinges require installation in accordance with the applicable technical 4.15. The hinged panel is attached to the door post forward of each cargo door to provide a wider cargo-passenger opening.5 System Securing. Primary Method. The panel is attached to the fuselage with hinges and quick release pins. Crew Door Hinges NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. If the probes are changed. Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-15.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 16).16.

TM 1-1520-256-23 4. the hinges and latch spring shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.mid LPF .2 Preparation of Helicopter.0 VdB -69.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.16. shielded surface. a.5 NDI Equipment Settings.6 Inspection Procedure. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17.3 Access.0 Rot . refer to Table 1-8 4. 0. 4-41 . straight.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. shielded surface. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.3. If required.16. corrosion. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. right angle.) . d. 4. NORTEC-1 9eI.16.3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. f.4.57. paragraph 1.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4 Preparation of Part. three-notched aluminum (0.11. and 0. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.56° Probe drive .16. etc. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.16.020. c. paragraph 1.16. b. Not applicable.20% b.100 HPF -0 H Pos .80% V Pos .200 KHz F2 . (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.3. sites of mechanical damage.) a. paragraph 1.4.4. Refer to Eddy Current Method. (Refer to Appendix B. e.11 and Figure 4-16.008. g.off HdB . Frequency F1 . 4.040-inch notch in test block. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.

Hinged Panel and Hinges 4-42 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-16.

None required. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 4.3.17.3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Inspect the part. Not applicable. 4. The component(s). 4.17. paragraph 1.3.16. 4.5 System Securing. This inspection is applicable to the hinged panel assembly and all related hardware contained within the assembly. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.7 and Table 1-5. (1).4 Preparation of Part. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 4.3.4. c. Fluorescent Penetrant. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Clean the component(s) to remove inspection media.3.5 System Securing. (2).16. 4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3. paragraph 1. 4.2 Defects. Inspect area of concern.3. 4.17.3. paragraph 1. See Figure 4-17. If the probes are changed. if removed. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.3.1 Description (Figure 4-1.17.4. The hinged panel and hinges. b. (Refer to Appendix B. 4.17 HINGED PANEL ASSEMBLY HARDWARE (PT). Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. the identified components shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. sites of mechanical damage.17.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.17.17. Fluorescent Penetrant. No cracks are allowed. corrosion. refer to paragraph 1. 17). steps 4. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.17. 4.4.17.4 Backup Method. 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.17.16. If required.16.4.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on any part of the hinged panel assembly.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 4. if removed. 4-43 .16.4 Backup Method. Index No.5 Inspection Procedure. 4.4. etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3 Primary Method. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.7.5 b.17. 4.16.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-17. Hinged Panel Assembly Hardware 4-44 .

shielded surface. NDI Equipment and Materials.1 Description (Figure 4-1.56° Probe drive .3.3. If required. f.020. a.18.3 4.040-inch notch in test block. NORTEC-19e".3. c.4 Preparation of Part. A large sliding door operating on rollers and tracks gives access to cargo/passenger area on each side of the cabin.18.4.) 4-45 .11.mid LPF . 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the cargo door shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.18 CARGO DOOR (ET). (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.69. 18).5 NDI Equipment Settings. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.18.18. d.3 Access. three-notched aluminum (0. paragraph 1.18. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Not applicable. and 0.0 VdB . shielded surface. Refer to Eddy Current Method.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 4. corrosion. e. sites of mechanical damage. No cracks are allowed. refer to Table 1-8 4. 100 KHz-500 KHz.100 HPF -0 H Pos . Primary Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.4.80% V Pos . Eddy Current.2 Defects. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block.57. 0.008.0 Rot . 4.18. b. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the cargo door and surrounding areas. etc.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.18. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. right angle. paragraph 1.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Index No.18. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. 4.3. (Refer to Appendix B. 4.1 a. g. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 4. Frequency F1 -200 KHz F2 .) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. straight.20% b.off HdB . (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.4.

6 Inspection Procedure. 4.3. c.18.3.18. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.5 System Securing. 4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 b.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.18. 4.18.4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. (2). Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.3. Figure 4-18. b. steps 4. None required.11 and Figure 4-18. Inspect the part. (1). if removed. a. The cargo door. If the probes are changed. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3.18.18. paragraph 1.4 Backup Method. Cargo Door 4-46 .

Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. 4. 100 KHz-500 KHz. shielded surface.4 Preparation of Part.19. d. 4. The cargo door retainers and retainer strap are used to secure the cargo door in an open position located on rear bulkhead of cabin.19. 4.0 -56° -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 -off 4-47 .TM 1-1520-256-23 4. etc.020. right angle. a. NORTEC-19ell. paragraph 1. retainer strap. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.5 NDI Equipment Settings. (Refer to Appendix B.4.19 CARGO DOOR RETAINERS AND RETAINER STRAP (ET). 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.008. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the retainers or retainer strap shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.0 -69. 4. If required. Not applicable. corrosion. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the cargo door retainers.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. g. e. Eddy Current.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 19).19. f.19. 4. refer to Table 1-8 4. 0. c. 4.) a.3. sites of mechanical damage. No cracks are allowed.4. 4. Index No.19. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. straight. three-notched aluminum (0.1 Description (Figure 4-1. b. and surrounding areas.3.3 Primary Method.19. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.19.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. and 0.3. shielded surface.3. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3 Access.mid LPF HPF H Pos V Pos -200 KHz -57.2 Defects.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.19.

20. 4.3. Index No. the steps shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. corrosion. Passenger steps may be installed to assist in entering and exiting the aircraft through the cargo doors. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. sites of mechanical damage.19. (1). Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. b.11 and Figure 4-19.3.5 System Securing. Refer to Eddy Current Method.19.20.3. Inspect the part.20.20. 4.11.2 Defects.19.3 Primary Method. 4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. if removed. 4. If required. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the passenger steps and surrounding areas. etc. paragraph 1. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. None required. c.4. (2).) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.2 Preparation of Helicopter.) 4.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Fluorescent Penetrant. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.4. 20).19.3.20 PASSENGER STEP (PT).6 Inspection Procedure. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17. The retainers or retainer strap.3.19.20. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.4 Backup Method.19.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 4. (Refer to Appendix B.5 b.040-inch notch in test block. No cracks are allowed. If the probes are changed. 4. steps 4. a. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 4-48 .7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 4. 4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. Particular attention shall be given to the weld joints.TM 1-1520-256-23 b. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 4.

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 4-19. Cargo Door Retainers and Retainer Strap 4-49

TM 1-1520-256-23 4.20.3.3 Access. Not applicable. 4.20.3.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 4.20.3.5 Inspection Procedure. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. paragraph 1.4.7 and Table 1-5. Inspect area of concern. See Figure 4-20. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method,

4.20.3.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. 4.20.4 Backup Method. None required.

4.20.5 System Securing. Clean the steps to remove inspection media. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI, paragraph 1.4.16. The steps, if removed, require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.21 PARATROOP STATIC LINE FITTING AND COMPRESSION TUBE (ET). 4.21.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Index No. 21). A paratroop static line cable may be installed on the center of the aft cabin bulkhead. This installation consists of a cable, a compression tube, attach plates, attach fitting, and attaching hardware. 4.21.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify any cracks found visually on the attach fitting and the compression tube. No cracks are allowed. 4.21.3 4.21.3.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Primary Method. Eddy Current. NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

Figure 4-20. Passenger Step

4-50

TM 1-1520-256-23 4.21.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the fitting and/or the compression tube shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.21.3.3 Access. Access is obtained through cabin doors. 4.21.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 4.21.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19ell. Frequency F1 -200 KHz F2 -off HdB -57.0 VdB -69.0 Rot -56° Probe drive -mid LPF -100 HPF -0 H Pos - 80% V Pos -20% b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.) 4.21.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 4-21. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.21.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 4.21.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.

4-51

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 4-21. Paratroop Static Line Fitting and Compression Tube 4.21.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. 4.21.4 Backup Method. None required.

4.21.5 System Securing. The part(s) inspected, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.22 JACK AND MOORING FITTINGS (MT). 4.22.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Index No.22).Two forward jack pads are located forward of the front cross tube at each side. Two aft jack pads are located behind aft cross tubes. The jack fittings provide a mounting point for the mooring fittings. 4.22.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the jack fittings or the mooring fittings. No cracks are allowed. 4.22.3 Primary Method. Magnetic Particle.

4.22.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.)

4-52

TM 1-1520-256-23 a. b. c. d. e. f. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Refer to paragraph 1.4.8.1.2 and Figure 1-6. 4.22.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. If required, the mooring fittings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.22.3.3 Access. Not applicable. 4.22.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 4.22.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method, paragraph 1.4.8. 4.22.3.6 Inspection Procedure. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 4-22. a. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. b. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. c. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. d. Inspect for cracks using the black light. 4.22.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. 4.22.3.8 Demagnetization. With the switch remaining in the AC position, place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 4.22.4 Backup Method. None required.

4.22.5 System Securing. Clean the moor fittings thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI, paragraph 1.4.16. The mooring fittings, if removed, require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4-53

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 4-22. Jack and Mooring Fittings 4-54

TM 1-1520-256-23 4.23 STANDARD CREW SEAT (ET). 4.23.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Index No. 23). Seats are adjustable, non-reclining type, mounted on tracks fixed to the cabin floor. Defects. Inspect forward and aft fittings, seat back attach fittings, and tubes for cracks. No cracks are allowed. Primary Method. Eddy Current. NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

4.23.2 4.23.3 4.23.3.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

4.23.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the seat shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.23.3.3 Access. Access is obtained through the crew door. 4.23.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 4.23.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19ell. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos -200 KHz -57.0 -69.0 -56° -mid -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2) (3) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 17.)

4-55

TM 1-1520-256-23 4.23.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 4-23.

a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.23.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 4.23.3.5 b.(1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 4.23.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. 4.23.4 Backup Method. Fluorescent Penetrant, refer to paragraph 1.4.7.

4.23.5 System Securing. The seat, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.24 MISSION OPERATOR SEATS (ET). 4.24.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Index No. 24). The mission operators' seats are adjustable, non-reclining, swivel based with webbing on back. Each seat is equipped with a lap safety belt and inertiareel harness. 4.24.2 Defects. Inspect the four mounting pads, mounting plate, and seat back and bottom assemblies for cracks. No cracks are allowed. 4.24.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

4.24.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) a. Eddy Current Inspection Unit b. Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz c. Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°1/2 inch drop d. Cable Assembly e. Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) f. Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 g. Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8 4.24.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the seat shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4-56

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 4-23. Standard Crew Seat 4-57

TM 1-1520-256-23 4.24.3.3 Access. Access is obtained through the cabin door. 4.24.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 4.24.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-1 9el. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos -200 KHz -57.0 -69.0 -56° -mid -100 -0 -80% -20% F2 -off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.) 4.24.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 4-24. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal liftoff. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.24.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 4.24.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 4.24.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3. 4.24.4 Backup Method. Fluorescent Penetrant, refer to paragraph 1.4.7.

4.24.5 System Securing. The seat, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.

4-58

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-24. Mission Operator Seats 4-59 .

d. 4. on the right hand side. The engine mounts shall be thoroughly cleaned. c. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually on the engine mounts. 4. both have pillow blocks with hinged bearing caps. through e. The bipod support. c.25.4 Preparation of Part. corrosion.1 NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B.2 and Figure 1-6.8. paragraph 1. 25). Inspect for cracks using the black light.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 4.25.25.3. d.3. e.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Welded areas shall be a primary concern.2 Defects.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. paragraph 1. and tripod support.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Refer to paragraph 4. Refer to paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle. If required. 4. f.3. a. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 4-25. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3 Primary Method.4.25.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Access is through the engine cowls. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.25.3. 4.3. 4. These supports are attached to fittings on the service deck.25 ENGINE MOUNTS (MT). A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. b.) a.4.8.3.3 Access.25.25. f. 4. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.4. (Figure 1-4. on the left hand side. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. e. for positions 2 through 12.1. etc. 4-60 . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the engine mounts shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.25. Repeat steps a. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.6 Inspection Procedure.25.8. Index No. Item 6 and 7) 4. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.3. No cracks are allowed. The forward support tube has a rod end bearing for mounting to forward trunnion. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. sites of mechanical damage.25. The engine is suspended at three points by supports made of steel tubing. 4.

Engine Mounts 4-61 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-25.

3 Access.2 and Figure 1-6.26.26. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Magnetic Particle. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.25. Access is through the engine cowls.4 Preparation of Part.26. paragraph 1.8. 26).3. e.1 NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 4. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3.3.4 Backup Method. Item 6 and 7) 4.4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.) a. (Figure 1-4.26. paragraph 1.3. If required. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. if removed. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.2 Defects. 4. b. d.3 Primary Method. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4.8 Demagnetization. 4-62 . 4. 4. The forward engine mount fittings (trunnions) are located on the forward section of the engine which attach the engine to the forward engine mount assembly. place the probe/yoke legs % in the same position used for magnetizing.26.25. 4.1. Index No. 4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. Secure the engine cowls as required. 4.4. sites of mechanical damage. etc.1 Description (Figure 4-1. 4.25. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.26. the engine mount fittings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. The engine mounts.3.4. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Refer to paragraph 1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.8.26.4. f. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.26.25. Clean the inspection areas thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3.26 ENGINE MOUNT FITTINGS (MT).3.5 System Securing. corrosion. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. 4. None required. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the engine mount fittings. c. No cracks are allowed. The aft engine mount fitting (trunnion) is located on the aft section of the engine which attaches the engine to the aft engine mount assembly.3. 4.16. paragraph 1.4. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.

Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.26.27.1 NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.8. Index No. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.1 Description (Figure 4-1.3. 4. c. None required.4 Backup Method. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the deck fittings. 4. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 4.3.3. the bipod. Inspect for cracks using the black light.3. refer to Table 1-8 4-63 . f.3 Defects.5 System Securing. Refer to paragraph 4.27. f.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.4. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3. for positions 2 through 5.26. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. No cracks are allowed. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.8 Demagnetization.2 4.26. through e. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. With the switch remaining in the AC position. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. d. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. paragraph 1. and the tripod supports are attached to the helicopter by fittings on the service deck. The engine mount fittings.16. 4.27. The forward engine support tube. 4. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 4. 4.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.27. Clean the inspected areas thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. Magnetic Particle. if removed. b.26. e. Secure the engine cowls as required.26.27 ENGINE DECK FITTINGS (MT). Demagnetize before moving to the next position. c. e. 27). b. Primary Method. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 4-26. 4. a.26. d.) a. Repeat steps a.6 Inspection Procedure.

Engine Mount Fittings 4-64 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-26.

Items 6 and 7) 4.3. Refer to paragraph 4.4. Clean the inspected areas thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.6 Inspection Procedure. b. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure.5 NDI Equipment Settings.27.27. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. f. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 4. The deck fittings. through e.4. for all other positions. a.27.27. e.27. (Figure 1-4. corrosion. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3. 4. 4.27.3 Access. paragraph 1. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 4. d. Inspect for cracks using the black light.4. None required. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3. 4. c.27. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 4-27. paragraph 1. as required.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.16.27.8 Demagnetization.4 Backup Method. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5 System Securing. Secure the engine cowls as required. sites of mechanical damage. 4-65 .7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. the deck fittings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 4. Repeat steps a. Access is through the engine cowls.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.27. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.27.8. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. etc. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. If required. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.8.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.3. 4.4. if removed.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-27. Engine Deck Fittings 4-66 .

4. b. Access is through the engine cowls. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.28. (Figure 1-4. the pillow blocks shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. f. c. Repeat steps a. NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B.28. etc. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. b. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.28.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Inspect for cracks using the black light.28. 4. Refer to paragraph 4.28. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Primary Method. d.4 Preparation of Part. e. for position 2.28.6 Inspection Procedure.2 4. a. paragraph 1. Pillow blocks are installed on top of each engine mount (bipod and tripod) and are designed to transfer engine vibrations from the engine to the engine mounts. Defects. No cracks are allowed.28.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Magnetic Particle. corrosion. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. sites of mechanical damage. 4. 4. 4-67 .3. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 4-28.3 4.3. e. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.8.28.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 28). Items 6 and 7) 4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. This inspection is to verify any cracks found visually on the pillow blocks.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3 Access. c. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Pillow blocks hold the trunnion bearings to secure the engine.28 PILLOW BLOCKS (MT). f. refer to Table 1-8 4.28.3.1 a. 4. paragraph 1.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Index No.4.4. If 5-' required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. d. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. through e.28.8.3. 4.

paragraph 1. The heat suppressor kit includes an upturned exhaust duct assembly. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.28.4 Backup Method. oil cooler exit shield. 4. if removed. 4.16. the engine side shields. Clean the pillow block thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. and necessary attaching hardware.28. 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-28. 4. 29). Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.5 System Securing.2 Defects.3. Fluorescent Penetrant.8 Demagnetization.28.3 Primary Method.4.1 Description (Figure 4-1. The pillow block. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3.29 EXHAUST TAILPIPE AND DUCT ASSEMBLIES (PT). forward duct assembly.3. 4. 4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. None required.29. No cracks are allowed.29. Pillow Block 4. Index No. This inspection is to verify cracks found visually in the exhaust tailpipe and duct assemblies. Secure the engine cowls as required.29.28. 4-68 . With the switch remaining in the AC position.

(Refer to Appendix B.29. paragraph 1.5 System Securing. rods. threads (especially at the thread transition area).TM 1-1520-256-23 4. 4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.30. AND PINS (MT).29. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3. ROD ENDS.4 Preparation of Part. MIL-I25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.30. corrosion. 4.4.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.30 BOLTS.3. ferromagnetic materials.7 and Table 1-5. If required. d.3 Access. sites of mechanical damage.3. All bolts. 4.30.3. Clean the inspected area to remove inspection media.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . See Figure 4-29. 30). RODS. paragraph 1. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. Secure the tailpipe fairing as required.) a. if removed. Index No. f. rod ends. 4.3. 4. 4. b.3 Primary Method .29. and pins are made of Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4. No cracks are allowed.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. e. Magnetic Particle. TURNBUCKLES. 4. paragraph 1. paragraph 1. The parts that were inspected.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.1 NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B. 4. turnbuckles.16. and pin holes.29.5 Inspection Procedure. Inspect area of concern.30. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (Figure 1-4. the part to be inspected shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Defects. 4. refer to Table 1-8 4-69 . Cracks can occur anywhere on the part in the circumferential direction.4.3.4 Backup Method None required.29. Items 8 and 10). Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.4. c.29. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. etc. See Figure 4-30.29.4.29. Access is through the upper and lower tailpipe fairings. Particular attention should be given to bolt head radii. 4.3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-29. Exhaust Tailpipe and Duct Assemblies 4-70 .

3 Access.31. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 4-30. 31). 4. paragraph 1.1 Description (Figure 4-1. Clean the inspected part thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.30. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Magnetic-Particle Method. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the part shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Eddy Current. 4. Not applicable.31 TAILBOOM AND FUSELAGE ATTACH FITTINGS (ET). 4. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 4.5 NDI Equipment Settings .4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The part requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. and the tail rotor. tail rotor drivetrain components. paragraph 1.2 and Figure 1-6.3 Primary Method . Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. The tailboom is a semi-monologue structure that supports the elevator.3.4. b. No cracks are allowed.5 System Securing. 4.8 Demagnetization. With the switch remaining in the AC position.8.8.4.30.4.3.3. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.31.30. 4-71 . 4.30.30. Refer to paragraph 1.30. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3. a.4 Backup Method None required.3.3. Index No. Four attachment fittings are provided for installation of the tailboom on the forward fuselage assembly. c.31. 4.2 Defects.4. 4. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tailboom and fuselage attach fittings and surrounding areas.1. 4. paragraph 1. 4.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. paragraph 1.3.16. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 4. 4. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.30. 4.30.30.

Bolts. Rod Ends. and Pins 4-72 . Rods.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-30. Turnbuckles.

f. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. .008.3 Access.3. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. 100 KHz-500 KHz.0 . e. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. and 0. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.4 Preparation of Part.6 Inspection Procedure. (Refer to Appendix B. 4.5 NDI Equipment Settings . paragraph 1.56° . Not applicable.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.31. refer to Table 1-8 4. straight. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.4.4.31. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.020.100 -0 .80% -20% F2 .200 KHz . b. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.11 and Figure 4-31. paragraph 1. 0. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.) 4. right angle.mid . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.31.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .3.) a.11.3.0 .040-inch notch in test block. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.3. Move probe over all three notches in test block. shielded surface.4. a.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.31.31. 4. paragraph 1. three-notched aluminum (0. 4.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter.69. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the tailboom shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. g.3. shielded surface.31.4. d.57. 4-73 . c. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. NORTEC-1 9eII.

3.31. 4-74 . 4. steps 4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 4. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.31.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. c.3. (1). The tailboom requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-31.31.31.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. If the probes are changed.3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.4 Backup Method None required. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Tailboom and Fuselage Attach Fittings a.5 System Securing. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. b.31.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.5 b. (2). 4. Inspect the part.

4. shielded surface. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.100 -0 .80% -20% F2 .020. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.200 KHz . Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. paragraph 1. Index No.32 ELEVATOR ASSEMBLY SUPPORT FITTINGS (ET).3 Primary Method .32.32.3. The elevator assembly support fittings secure the elevator horn assembly to the elevator assembly.) a.32. e. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 4. c. right angle. g.0 .008.mid . 32 ). refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.5 NDI Equipment Settings . 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the elevator control assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 4. 4.69.4 Preparation of Part. a. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Eddy Current. Move probe over all three notches in test block.11.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 4. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the fittings. straight. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.040-inch notch in test block.2 Defects. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. No cracks are allowed.4. 4.32.3 Access.3. f.56° . NORTEC-1 9eII. and 0.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .1 Description (Figure 4-1. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Not applicable.3.32.0 . d.57. b. 4.32.) 4-75 . 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. (Refer to Appendix B.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 0. . shielded surface.4.32.3.32.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. refer to Table 1-8 4. three-notched aluminum (0.

1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. paragraph 1. Figure 4-32.32.32.32. 4. paragraph 1.32. refer to paragraph 1.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The elevator control assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .4. (1). Mark and record the inspection results as required by b. 4.32.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.4 Backup Method Fluorescent Penetrant. If the probes are changed.7. c. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.32.5 System Securing. steps 4. 4. (2). Elevator Assembly Support Fittings 4-76 .6 Inspection Procedure.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3.11 and Figure 4-32 a. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.4. Inspect the part.5 b. Refer to Eddy Current Method.

33. d.3. Index No. Eddy Current.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. and 0.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.3 Primary Method . 33 ). shielded surface. refer to Table 1-8 4. A control arm on the horn assembly. b. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Elevator Horn Assembly 4-77 . 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. c. e. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the horn assembly. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Figure 4-33.1 Description (Figure 4-1. which is mounted to the elevator.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .2 Defects. (Refer to Appendix B.020. No cracks are allowed. straight. 4. 0. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the horn assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.) a. shielded surface.33. provides attachment for linkage from the fore-aft cyclic control system at the swashplate for rotational movement of the elevator. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 4. 4. Particular attention shall be given to shaded areas in Figure 4-33. right angle.008. 4.33. f.2 Preparation of Helicopter.33 ELEVATOR HORN ASSEMBLY (ET). g.3.33.33. three-notched aluminum (0.

3. a.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.80% -20% F2 .3. NORTEC-1 9eII.mid .33. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.4.3. 4.3. 4-78 . paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .11. If the probes are changed.3. The horn assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Preparation of Part.33.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.040-inch notch in test block. 4.0 .0 . 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method.33.(1). Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. steps 4.3 Access. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 4.33.33.4.4 Backup Method Fluorescent Penetrant. . paragraph 1. paragraph 1.5 NDI Equipment Settings .3.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. c. Inspect the part.) 4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. b.7.4.11 and Figure 4-33.57.3. 4.100 -0 .56° .6 Inspection Procedure.5 System Securing. refer to paragraph 1. Not applicable.69. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.3.4. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.5 b.33.33. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.200 KHz . (2).33.33. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. a.

Item 13) 4. Access is through the intermediate gearbox cover. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.4. shielded surface. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.57. Eddy Current.80% -20% F2 . (Figure 1-4. sites of mechanical damage. straight.3 Access. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.34. 0.3.34 INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX SUPPORT INSTALLATION (ET). NORTEC-1 9eII.0 .3.0 . c.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.100 -0 . the intermediate gearbox shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Primary Method . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3. No cracks are allowed.11. b. and 0. 4. 4.69.34.34.3. e.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .34. a. 100 KHz-500 KHz. If required. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) Null probe on test block. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.4.34.5 NDI Equipment Settings .1 Description (Figure 4-1. d.3. 4.34.040-inch notch in test block.) a.4.34. 4.34.008. right angle. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Index No. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 34). paragraph 1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. (Refer to Appendix B.020.) 4-79 . 4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. paragraph 1. corrosion.200 KHz .mid . refer to Table 1-8 4. . The 45 degree intermediate gearbox is mounted on the intermediate gearbox support at the base of the vertical fin. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. f.4 Preparation of Part.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the intermediate gear-box support installation.2 Defects. g. 4. etc. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. three-notched aluminum (0. shielded surface. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.56° .

Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1. steps 4. Inspect the part. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.34. (1).1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Secure the intermediate gearbox cover as required. paragraph 1.3. if removed.34. Intermediate Gearbox Support Installation 4-80 . (2). Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 4. 4.34. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. 4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method None required.5 System Securing. a. The intermediate gearbox.11 and Figure 4-34. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by b. If the probes are changed. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.34.3.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. c.3.5 b. Figure 4-34.TM 1-1520-256-23 4.34.34.4.6 Inspection Procedure.

longerons. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. 4. The tailboom structure attaches to the fuselage.35.200 KHz . Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4. spars.3. e. and 0.35 TAILBOOM STRUCTURE (ET).3 Access. f.020. b. 4. d. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.35. sites of mechanical damage. doors. 4. corrosion. a.008.040-inch notch in test block.) 4-81 . and skin.3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.35. 4.3 Primary Method .040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. the tailboom shall be removed and disassembled in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Defects. shielded surface.11. NORTEC-1 9eII. right angle. etc.0 .80% -20% F2 .69. (Refer to Appendix B.56° .) a. three-notched aluminum (0.mid .57. 35 ).3. g. Move probe over all three notches in test block.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. 4. The tailboom is the entire structure aft of the fuselage. including the ventricle fin. 4. 4. stiffeners. . and fairings. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. paragraph 1. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. 0. straight. stringers.2 Preparation of Helicopter.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . c. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 100 KHz-500 KHz. refer to Table 1-8 4. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 for applicable access panels.5 NDI Equipment Settings .35. ribs. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.4 Preparation of Part.1 Description (Figure 4-1. If required. No cracks are allowed.35. Eddy Current. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.0 . 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.35. paragraph 1.35.4.100 -0 . shielded surface. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Index No.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tailboom structure including bulkheads.3.35. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.

020.4 Backup Method None required.4.3 Primary Method .3. straight.3. shielded surface. No cracks are allowed. sites of mechanical damage. 4. 4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 4. The tailboom. 4. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. paragraph 1. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3. 4. (2). and fairings as required. 0. b.36.36. 4. Eddy Current.) a. refer to Table 1-8 Mark and record the inspection results as required by b.36. if removed and disassembled. doors.35.3.35. g. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.36. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.5 System Securing. and 0.5 b. c. 100 KHz-500 KHz. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. corrosion. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Index No. 4-82 .3.11 and Figure 4-35. If the probes are changed.2 Defects. The 90 degree gearbox support fitting is mounted at the top of the vertical fin and supports the gearbox that drives the tail rotors. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.36 NINETY DEGREE GEARBOX SUPPORT FITTING (ET). steps 4. three-notched aluminum (0. paragraph 1. d.35. right angle.35.35. 4. requires assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Inspect the part. 4. f. (1).6 Inspection Procedure. 36). e. 4.35.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. the 90 degree gearbox shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. a. etc. Secure access panels.36. shielded surface. If required.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.008.3. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. c. Refer to Eddy Current Method.1 Description (Figure 4-1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. (Refer to Appendix B.3. This inspection is to verify any cracks found visually on the support fitting.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .

Tailboom Structure 4-83 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-35.

100 -0 . The 90 degree gearbox. paragraph 1. steps 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method.57.4 Backup Method None required. paragraph 1. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.11 and Figure 4-36.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3. paragraph 1. 4.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. a.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. if removed. 4. If the probes are changed.3.80% -20% F2 . Mark and record the inspection results as required by b. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.36.36.3.4.36.36.69.5 b.5 System Securing.200 KHz . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.0 .3. 4. (2).6 Inspection Procedure.3.4 Preparation of Part.36.11. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.mid .4. c. Secure the tail rotor chain cover as required. paragraph 1. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. a.36. Inspect the part. .36. 4.36.3.36.5 NDI Equipment Settings .4.TM 1-1520-256-23 4. NORTEC-1 9eII.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.0 . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4. Access is through the tail rotor chain cover. (1).040-inch notch in test block.3 Access. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 4-84 .3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Item 29) 4.56° . Move probe over all three notches in test block.) 4. (Figure 1-4.

3 Access.3. 4. paragraph 1.5 Inspection Procedure.3. 4. 4.37.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-36. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.1 Description (Figure 4-1. MIL-I25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.08 and fin STA 22. 37 ). Fluorescent Penetrant. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3. 4.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the vertical fin shall be prepared in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Index No.3 Primary Method . 4.37. paragraph 1.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.37.2 Defects.08 to the rib area at fin station 22.2 Preparation of Helicopter. After crack has been stop drilled. 4-85 . If cracks are found. Inspect area of concern.4.7 and Table 1-5. locate the exact end of the crack. check crack again to be sure that no portion of the crack extends beyond the stop drill hole.37.4 Preparation of Part. Area of interest is where the left hand upper skin attaches to the stiffener at fin station 5.37. 4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . 4.37. Not applicable.37.37 VERTICAL FIN (PT).4. (Refer to Appendix B.3. 4. Ninety Degree Gearbox Support Fitting 4. See Figure 4-37.4.37.37.37. Check for cracks in the ribs and stiffeners between fin STA 5.

4 Backup Method None required.37.38. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. paragraph 1.) Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4-86 .16.3.3. Vertical Fin 4.4.5 System Securing. 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-37. Index No.38.38. 4.38 LANDING GEAR CROSS TUBES (UT).3 Primary Method.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . 4. (Refer to Appendix B.1 Description (Figure 4-1. The landing gear assembly has two arched aluminum cross tubes secured to the fuselage structure by four padded caps.3.37. Cross tubes are fitted with bearing straps at fuselage attachment locations. 4.37.38. 4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . Inspect the cross tube for cracks in an area approximately three inches wide around each side of the bearing support plate attachments (bearing straps). 4. Clean the inspected area to remove inspection media. 4. The vertical fin shall be repaired as required in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 38). paragraph 1. Ultrasonic.2 Defects.

3. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. BNC to Microdot Reference Block.2 Preparation of Helicopter. f. 4. 60°shear wave. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the landing gear assembly removed from the helicopter in accordance with applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Preparation of Part.3. Not applicable.00 ms (PULSER) 500 ohm 1000 PF AUTOLOW See Note 1 (RECEIVER) 5 MHz 0% FULL-W OFF ENGLISH INCH 4-87 .040 EDM notches) Consumable Materials. b.3 Access. rough and flaking paint and overspray may require smoothing with a Scotch Brite pad. and 0.00 in 0.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.0 in 124. refer to Table 1-8 4. e. paragraph 1. However. 0. Paint removal is not necessary. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.020. three-notched aluminum (0.DEFAULT SETTINGS) DIALOG UNIT (BASICS) GAIN RANGE MTL VEL D-DELAY P-DELAY DAMPING POWER PRF-MOD PRF-VAL FREQ REJECT RECTIF DUAL 40db 5. 1/4 x 1/4 inch element Cable Assembly.4.38. a. 4. c. Ultrasonic Inspection Unit Transducer.3.3.38.38.0 in/ms 0.5 NDI Equipment Settings .008. Make the following initial settings on the USD 15S: (SETUP .38. d.

OFF OFF See Note 3 0 See Note 2 See Note 3 See Note 3 See Note 3 4-88 .OFF (3) Not used . Couple transducer to reference block as shown in Figure 4-38 with the sound path parallel to the long axis of the tube.4.leave at default values b. The CRT display should appear similar to those shown in Figure 4-38.TM 1-1520-256-23 (GATES) (MEAS) (KEYS) (ANGLE) (DAC) DAC-MOD DAC-REC A-START DAC-ECH NOTE (1) When pulse rep frequency is in an automatic mode the value is electronically determined. Set up on test block as follows: NOTE The ideal reference block is a section of UH-1 cross tube.) Also. (1) Attach transducer to cable and cable to ultrasonic unit. move unwanted shoe noise off screen and use range control to position the rivet hole signals at mid-screen.12. setup may be made using the reference block three-notched aluminum. (2) Not used . These equipment settings may be stored in memory to facilitate setup. Refer to Ultrasonic Method. Position transducer approximately 1-1/2 inches from a good hole and manipulate transducer to obtain a reflection. which has the same thickness as the tube wall. the objective is to manipulate the transducer to obtain two reflections of equal amplitude. it is important to note the position and distance of the transducer from the good hole in the reference block so that the transducer may be positioned correctly on parts that do not respond appropriately. rejected for cracks. to where the signal is again barely detectable.disable by selecting logic . move the transducer circumferentially and note the amount of transducer movement (distance) from when the signal is first detected. Rivet holes on the in-service components may be misdrilled or damaged and frequently will not give clean split signal shown by the reference block. These are trapped signals from the top and bottom of the hole. (A hole may have to be drilled in some rejected cross tubes in order to provide a good hole. Therefore. This will provide a rough measuring guide for an uncracked hole. having both cracked and uncracked holes. Now. With the delay control. paragraph 1. Now. Adjust gain to obtain amplitude of approximately 50 percent FSH. through maximum amplitude.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-38. Landing Gear Cross Tubes (Sheet 1 of 2) 4-89 .

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-38. Landing Gear Cross Tubes (Sheet 2 of 2) 4-90 .

e. 39). three-notched aluminum (0. The landing gear assembly requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Manipulate the transducer circumferentially.) a. b.39 SKID TUBE SADDLES (ET). Each skid tube is fitted with two saddles with sockets for forward and aft cross tubes. position transducer on back of the reference block (notches down) so that the ultrasonic signal is trapped by the end of the block.4. Typically.38. As experience is gained with this inspection. right angle. 4.39. Couple the transducer to the cross tube at the area to be inspected. If the reference block is used. Index No.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.020. d. 4. Eddy Current.040-inch deep notch and adjust gain level to approximately 50 percent FSH.16. Repeat the inspection for the remaining holes. Adjust gain to compensate for paint and surface finish differences between reference block and the cross tube requiring inspection.38.7. This inspection is to verify cracks found visually on the saddles surrounding areas of the skid tubes or the cross tubes. Move the transducer circumferentially and note the additional amount of transducer movement (distance) obtained from the cracks. straight. 4. 4. No cracks are allowed. Transducer movement more than 1/4 inch greater than from a good hole and indication is still present on CRT are cause for rejection.3. The landing gear assembly consists of two skid tubes attached on ends of the arched cross tubes which are secured to the fuselage structure. setup may be made using holes in the test part. Use delay to position this peaked signal at mid-screen. 0. range and delay only. shielded surface. paragraph 1.008. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. "Peak" out the first reflection from the 0. and 0. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 4.5 System Securing. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 100 KHz-500 KHz.4. By knowing the size of the cracks in the reference block and the differences in transducer movement (distance) between the uncracked and cracked a rough estimate of crack size may be made. refer to paragraph 1. 4. 4. paragraph 1. 4. Locate and peak out signal from one of the rivet holes. Note transducer travel distance and observe CRT for signals indicative of crack.38. This block will permit setup of gain.040 EDM notches) 4-91 . Mark the points at which the amplitude of the crack signals are just detectable (0 percent to 5 percent FSH). The landing gear assembly requires cleaning to remove inspection media.4 Backup Method Fluorescent Penetrant.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .3. c.38. shielded surface. 4.39. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.6 Inspection Procedure.3 Primary Method .3. (Refer to Appendix B.TM 1-1520-256-23 (2) Position transducer at a cracked hole and note signal from cracks.39.2 Defects.3. the reflection from the cracks (especially large cracks) will be larger than the signal from the hole.1 Description (Figure 4-1.39.

(2).4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.3. paragraph 1. steps 4. Refer to Eddy Current Method.100 -0 . Not applicable. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.39.) 4.mid .040-inch notch in test block. paragraph 1.39.39.69.39. c. a. 4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the skid tube saddles removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Teflon Tape. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 4.4.0 . . If the probes are changed. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 4. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.56° . b. NORTEC-1 9eII. 4-92 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.57.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.0 .5 b. a.200 KHz . paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 4.6 Inspection Procedure. (1).3. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. g.4.3.39.3. Move probe over all three notches in test block.4 Preparation of Part. Inspect the part.39.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.11 and Figure 4-39.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.80% -20% F2 . refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3 Access. 4.11.39.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 f.3.

Skid Tube Saddles 4-93 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 4-39.

4.5 System Securing. manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method None required.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .3.39. 4.39.3.39. paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by The skid tube saddles require installation in accordance with the applicable technical 4-94 .TM 1-1520-256-23 4.

14 5.10 5.1 CONTENTS.4 5.18 Figure Number 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 Nomenclature Non-Self-Purging Particle Separator. 5-1 .Metal Lines and Fittings Engine Oil Tank Support Engine Oil Cooler Engine Oil Cooler Turbo Blower Oil Separator Engine External Oil Filter Head and Bowl Power Lever Control Rods Power Lever Torque Tube Power Lever Controls Cambox Assembly Power Lever Control Mounting Brackets and Plates NOTE: *Indicates Flight Safety Part.16 5. GENERAL. and components listed in Table 5-1.Air Induction System Air Particle Separator Self-Purging .3 5.5 5.TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION V ENGINE GROUP 5.Air Induction System Inlet Screen Latch Assembly Self-Purging . 5.17 5. The index number for each item may be used to locate it in Figure 5-1.13 5.6 5. Engine Group Inspection Index Index Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 *14 *15 16 17 18 Inspection Method PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT MT MT ET ET PT Paragraph Number 5.8 5.7 5. The engine group inspection items covered in this section are those items of the UH-1 helicopter series gas turbine engine.15 5. Engine Group Inspection Index.12 5.2 5. Table 5-1.11 5.Air Induction System Improved Particle Separator (IPS) Air Induction System Exhaust System Clamp Tailpipe and Heatshield Oil System . model T53-L-13B. Corresponding inspection figures and applicable text paragraphs are listed opposite each item.9 5.

Engine Group 5-2 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-1.

4.3 Primary Method . 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .4 Backup Method None required.AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT). Removal of the upper assembly half permits maintaining the main driveshaft and inspecting the engine inlet. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-3 .5 System Securing. paragraph 1. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on any metal part of the system.2 Defects. 5.3. the air induction system shall be removed and disassembled in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The lower half mounts the air cleaner which collects particles removed from the engine inlet air and ejects them overboard. 5. 5.2. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Inlet air then travels through a separator where remaining fine particles are circulated and stored in the separator. 5. 2). Secure the upper and side filter covers as required.3.3. 5.2. paragraph 1. Fluorescent Penetrant.4 Preparation of Part. The air induction system.7 and Table 1-5. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. sites of mechanical damage. 5. Access is through the upper and side filter covers. 5. This procedure can also be used to locate the exact ends of cracks to facilitate stop drill repairs. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.2.16.2. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.2. (Refer to Appendix B.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. requires assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The air particle separator is an inertial type separator consisting of an upper and lower assembly.2.1 Description (Figure 5-1.4.3 Access.4.2. Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media.2.3. 5.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. If required.2. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.5 Inspection Procedure.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .2 NON-SELF-PURGING PARTICLE SEPARATOR . corrosion. Index No. paragraph 1. etc.2. paragraph 1. Inspect area of concern. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.2. 5. See Figure 5-2. if removed.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed system using this procedure. 5.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-2.Air Induction System 5-4 . Non-Self-Purging Particle Separator .

5.3 Access.2 Defects. The upper and lower stainless steel wire woven screen assemblies are held together by latches.3. The particle separator inlet screen prevents engine damage from large foreign objects being injected into the engine intake.5 System Securing. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Fluorescent Penetrant. 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . (Refer to Appendix B. 5. paragraph 1.3.4 Preparation of Part.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 5. paragraph 1. 3).TM 1-1520-256-23 5. See Figure 5-3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.1 Description (Figure 5-1.3.3 Primary Method . 5.3. Access is through the upper and side filter covers.3 INLET SCREEN LATCH ASSEMBLY SELF-PURGING . paragraph 1.4.3.3. Secure the upper and side filter covers as required.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-5 .3. Index No.4.AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT).3.3.4.4 Backup Method None required. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. No cracks are allowed.3.3.7 and Table 1-5. Inspect area of concern. paragraph 1.16. 5. 5. 5.3. 5. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. This inspection is to verify cracks found visually on the latch assembly.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3.5 Inspection Procedure. 5. 5. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.3.3.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . Clean the latch assembly to remove inspection media.

Inlet Screen Latch Assembly Self-Purging .Air Induction System 5-6 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-3.

Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media. corrosion. Removal of the upper assembly half permits maintaining the main driveshaft and inspecting the engine inlet.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .3 Access.3 Primary Method . requires assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Inlet air then travels through a separator where remaining fine particles are filtered out and carried overboard through air frame plumbing.5 System Securing.4.1 Description (Figure 5-1.4.4. 5.16. paragraph 1. sites of mechanical damage. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-7 . 5. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Refer to Fluorescent . See Figure 5-4.3. The air induction system.4. This procedure can also be used to locate the exact ends of cracks to facilitate stop drill repairs. 5. particularly in areas of inlet vanes in both the upper and lower assembly halves.3.4 Backup Method.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed system using this procedure. None required.4.AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT).4. if removed. Helicopters have a sand and dust separator that is an inertial type separator consisting of an upper and lower assembly.4. 5.4. Access is through the upper and side filter covers.4.4. Fluorescent Penetrant. (Refer to Appendix B.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . 4). The lower assembly half mounts the air cleaner which collects particles removed from the engine inlet air and ejects them overboard. 5.4 Preparation of Part.7 and Table 1-5. 5.3.4.3. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. Index No.4.5 Inspection Procedure.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. etc.3.4 AIR PARTICLE SEPARATOR SELF-PURGING .4. If required. paragraph 1. 5. paragraph 1. 5. 5. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on all metal surfaces to include weld cracks.4. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Inspect area of concern. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Secure upper and side filter covers as required. 5. paragraph 1. the air induction system shall be removed and disassembled in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.2 Defects.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 5. Penetrant Method.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-4. Air Particle Separator Self-Purging .Air Induction System 5-8 .

(Refer to Appendix B.4 Backup Method None required. Access is through the transmission fairing and upper engine cowl. Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media. 5. Inspect area of concern. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the structures or welds of the upper or lower halves. 5.3 Primary Method. 5.4. 5. If required. etc. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5. It is an inertial type system consisting of an upper and lower assembly. 5).5.5.5.2 Defects. The air induction system. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . 5. corrosion.3.5. and bleed air connector.4. The upper half is attached to the lower half and engine firewall and contains vortex generator tubes which separate dust and foreign objects from incoming air and eventually ejects them through rear vertical slots.1 Description (Figure 5-1. the air induction system shall be removed and disassembled in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 System Securing. The lower assembly is attached to the fuselage. The IPS is a self-purging particle separator air induction system. 5. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-9 .3. sites of mechanical damage. (Figure 1-4.3. paragraph 1. the inner bellows. Secure the transmission fairing and upper engine cowl as required.4 Preparation of Part.3.5. 5. Fluorescent Penetrant. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.5 IMPROVED PARTICLE SEPARATOR (IPS) AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (PT). paragraph 1.5. This procedure can also be used to locate the exact ends of cracks to facilitate stop drill repairs. Removal of upper assembly allows detailed examination of main driveshaft and engine inlet.5 Inspection Procedure. See Figure 5-5. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Index No.16. if removed. 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.5. requires assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.5. paragraph 1. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.5. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. paragraph 1.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed system using this procedure.7 and Table 1-5.5.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.4.4. 5.3.3. Items 2 and 6) 5. 5.3 Access.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-5. Improved Particle Separator (IPS) Air Induction System 5-10 .

6. 5. 5.3.3. paragraph 1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .6.3 Access. paragraph 1.6.6. paragraph 1.6.4. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.6. Fluorescent Penetrant. 5. Inspect area of concern.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4. 5.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.6.3.16.6 EXHAUST SYSTEM CLAMP (PT).3.1 Description (Figure 5-1. No cracks are allowed.4. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. etc. if removed. See Figure 5-6.3.4 Backup Method None required.7 and Table 1-5.4. The exhaust system clamp is used to attach the tailpipe to outer diffuser flange of engine. Mark and record the inspection results as required by Figure 5-6.6.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 5. The exhaust clamp. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.6. Access is through the upper and lower tailpipe fairing. Index No. If required. the clamp shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6).4 Preparation of Part. Clean the clamp to remove inspection media. (Figure 1-4. corrosion. 5. 5.2 Defects.5 Inspection Procedure. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 5.3.5 System Securing.3. Items 8 and 10) 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the clamp. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.6. Exhaust System Clamp 5-11 . 5. Secure the upper and lower tailpipe fairings as required. sites of mechanical damage. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.6.3 Primary Method . 5. (Refer to Appendix B. paragraph 1.

5. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Access is through the upper and lower tailpipe fairings. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Items 8 and 10) 5. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the tailpipe and the heatshield.1 Description (Figure 5-1.7.7. Inspect area of concern. This procedure can also be used to locate the exact ends of cracks to facilitate stop drill repairs. paragraph 1. the tailpipe shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.7. (Refer to Appendix B. 7).3. 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results . paragraph 1.3.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.4.4.3.7. paragraph 1. 5. See Figure 5-7. If required. sites of mechanical damage. It is clamped on outer diffuser flange and directs hot gases aft and slightly up away from tailboom. Index No.7.2 Defects.7. 5.3 Access.3. Fluorescent Penetrant. Mark and record the inspection results as required by Figure 5-7. Tailpipe and Heatshield 5-12 .5 Inspection Procedure.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 5.1 NDI Equipment and Materials .032-inch corrosion resistant steel. corrosion. 5. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.7.3 Primary Method . condition N-155. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4. The heatshield protects the airframe from tailpipe heat damage. 5.3.3.4 Preparation of Part. etc. The tailpipe is constructed of 0. (Figure 1-4. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3.7. AMS5532.7 TAILPIPE AND HEATSHIELD (PT).7 and Table 1-5. 5.7. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.

Clean the tubing and fittings to remove inspection media.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. etc.3. 5. if removed. 5.4 Backup Method None required. Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media.16. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.1 NDI Equipment and Materials . Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-13 . requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Secure the upper and lower tailpipe fairings as required. corrosion. paragraph 1.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results .3. paragraph 1. Items 2 and 4) 5. valves. the metal tubing and fittings shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. Flexible hose is used in low-pressure systems where components are subjected to vibration.8.4. Fluorescent Penetrant. The metal tubing and fittings.5 Inspection Procedure. sites of mechanical damage.8. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3. paragraph 1.5 System Securing. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on any metal tubing or fitting. If required. The oil system plumbing consists of flexible hose.8. No cracks are allowed.8. 5. 5. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.7. 5. (Figure 1-4. paragraph 1.3 Primary Method .8 OIL SYSTEM . if removed.4. 5.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed parts using this procedure.3 Access. (Refer to Appendix B.8. 5. Inspect area of concern.8.8.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 5. and connector fittings. The tailpipe assembly. Metal tubing is used in high-pressure or critical systems.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 5. Index No. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.7. Access is through the transmission fairing and engine cowl. metal tubing. See Figure 5-8.4 Preparation of Part. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.8.3. 5.4.5 System Securing.4.2 Defects. paragraph 1.4.4 Backup Method None required.8.8. Secure the transmission fairing and engine cowl as required.1 Description (Figure 5-1.METAL LINES AND FITTINGS (PT). 5. 5.16. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 8).7 and Table 1-5.8.

Metal Lines and Fittings 5-14 . Oil System .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-8.

9.3 Primary Method.9. 5.5 System Securing. Engine Oil Tank Support 5-15 .3.9. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 9).3. The engine oil tank support requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the tank support (removed from firewall) at mounting points.3.9.9. Index No. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. Inspect area of concern. paragraph 1. Figure 5-9.16.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. None required. Refer to Post Cleaning and .3. Not applicable.9.2 Preparation of Helicopter.9 ENGINE OIL TANK SUPPORT (PT). paragraph 1.4. paragraph 1.2 Defects.3. No cracks are allowed. 5. 5. Clean the support to remove inspection media. 5.9.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.4 Backup Method.4. 5. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the engine oil tank support removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 5.4. Fluorescent Penetrant.4 Access. 5. 5.7 and Table 1-5. 5.9. Mark and record the Inspection results as required by paragraph 1.9.9. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.1 Description (Figure 5-1. See Figure 5-9. (Refer to Appendix B. 5.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3. 5. The engine oil tank is secured by straps to a padded support on right side of forward firewall.3.5 Inspection Procedure.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Preparation of Part.9.

4.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 5. shrouds. 5. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the oil cooler.3. The engine oil cooler. (Figure 1-4. and welds. ducts. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.3 Primary Method.4. Access is through the lower tailpipe cover.3. Item 10) 5.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3. etc. Cooling air flow is provided by a turbo blower driven by bleed air taken from engine diffuser housing. Inspect area of concern.1 Description (Figure 5-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.10.10.10. Fluorescent Penetrant.4 Backup Method. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3.10.10.10.3. 5.10. 5. if removed. Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed cooler using this procedure.4.5 Inspection Procedure.10.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 5.2 Preparation of Helicopter.10. castings.7 and Table 1-5.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. No cracks are allowed. Engine Oil Cooler 5-16 . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. paragraph 1. sites of mechanical damage.3 Access. corrosion.4 Preparation of Part. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.16. Secure the lower tailpipe cover as required. 10). the engine oil cooler shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (Refer to Appendix B. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The oil cooler for engine oil is mounted in bottom of fuselage behind engine and is connected into the oil return line through a thermal bypass valve. paragraph 1. None required.4.10. Figure 5-10. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. 5. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 5.5 System Securing. paragraph 1. See Figure 5-10.2 Defects.10 ENGINE OIL COOLER (PT).10. Index No. 5. 5. Particular attention should be given to detecting cracked flanges. MIL-I25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. If required. 5.

2 Preparation of Helicopter.5 Inspection Procedure. Figure 5-11.11.1 Description (Figure 5-1. If required. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Access. 5.3.11. 5. 5. (Figure 1-4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the Installed turbo blower using this procedure. Fluorescent Penetrant. Item 10) 5.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Cooling air is provided by a turbo blower driven by bleed air taken from engine diffuser housing.3.3.11. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the welds or in the fan and turbine assembly of the turbo blower. Inspect area of concern. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3. etc.11. 5.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 5. (Refer to Appendix B. Index No.TM 1-1520-256-23 5.11.4. paragraph 1. Access is through the lower tailpipe fairing.11. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.3 Primary Method. MIL-I25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.11.2 Defects.3.4.4 Preparation of Part. No cracks are allowed. sites of mechanical damage.7 and Table 1-5. corrosion.11. 5. 5.11 ENGINE OIL COOLER TURBO BLOWER (PT). See Figure 5-11. the turbo blower assembly shall be removed and disassembled in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. 11).4. Engine Oil Cooler Turbo Blower 5-17 . Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.

5 System Securing. sites of mechanical damage.12. Inspect area of concern.4 Preparation of Part. Index No. Fluorescent Penetrant. the oil separator shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (Refer to Appendix B.7 and Table 1-5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.11.2 Preparation of Helicopter. No cracks are allowed. etc. 5. requires assembly and installation in accordance with the applicable technical_ manuals listed in Table 1-1. The oil separator.3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. The separator has magnets in its chip detector that senses ferrous metal chips.12.4.16. 5.3.3.4. particularly at ports and mounting holes. 5. Access is through the left lower engine cowling. 12). Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 5.12.12. If required.12.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 5.12. paragraph 1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.12.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. 5.5 System Securing.3.12. 5-18 .1 Description (Figure 5-1. 5.3.12. paragraph 1. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. 5.4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4 Backup Method. paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5. 5. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.11.12. corrosion.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.16. paragraph 1.4 Backup Method. None required. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually. Clean the inspected areas to remove inspection media. See Figure 5-12. (Figure 1-4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3.3 Primary Method. Secure the left lower engine cowling as required. A cyclonic oil separator and monitor is mounted on a bracket assembly on the left side of the forward firewall of the engine compartment.5 Inspection Procedure. if removed.4.2 Defects. 5. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.12 OIL SEPARATOR (PT).12. 5. Secure the lower tailpipe fairing as required. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5. if removed. paragraph 1. The engine oil cooler turbo blower.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. None required. Item 7) 5.11.3 Access. paragraph 1.

Item 7) 5. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. See Figure 5-13.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Inspect area of concern. 13). The oil filter is mounted on a bracket on the firewall of the engine compartment.7 and Table 1-5. Oil Separator 5.3. No cracks are allowed. (Refer to Appendix B. If required.13. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.13. 5. 5. left side.3 Access. 5.13.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-12. Index No.13. 5.13.13. sites of mechanical damage. 5. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually on the filter head and bowl. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4 Preparation of Part.13 ENGINE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER HEAD AND BOWL (PT). the filter head and bowl shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (Figure 1-4. 5-19 .4. Access is through the left lower engine cowling.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.1 Description (Figure 5-1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3.5 Inspection Procedure.4.4.13.13. paragraph 1.2 Defects.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.3 Primary Method. 5. corrosion. 5. paragraph 1. The filter is encased in the filter bowl which is screwed onto the filter.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3. Fluorescent Penetrant. etc.

5. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5.4.13.1 Description (Figure 5-1 .14.2 Defects.14. Clean the filter head and bowl to remove inspection media.3 Primary Method.14 POWER LEVER CONTROL RODS (MT). paragraph 1. 5. Engine External Oil Filter Head and Bowl 5. BlackLight 5-20 .13. Magnetometer c.) a. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. A mechanical linkage system consists of power lever control rods that provide manual control of power lever on fuel control unit. paragraph 1. 5.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B.3.13. if removed. 14).16. Index No.14. Refer to Post Cleaning and' Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 5.5 System Securing. 5. The filter head and bowl. No cracks are allowed. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually on power lever control rods.14. Magnetic Particle. Secure the lower left engine cowling as required. 5.3. None required.4 Backup Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-13.3. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.

TM 1-1520-256-23 d. 5.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. a.8. Obtain access to linkage aft of cabin through openings in lower side of fuselage and by opening engine compartment cowling on left side.14.14. Obtain access to forward linkage by removing access doors along center of cabin floor and on structural pylon island. b.14. corrosion. 5.6 Inspection Procedure.3. Repeat steps a.3 Access. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.14. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. f.4 Preparation of Part. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 5-14. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. paragraph 1. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. e. etc.14. refer to Table 1-8 5.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.14. Power Lever Control Rods 5-21 . Inspect for cracks using the black light.3.4.3. c.3. Refer to paragraph 5. Figure 5-14. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. 5. f. for positions 2 and 3.8.3. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4. paragraph 1. 5.5 NDI Equipment Settings. the power lever control rods shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. paragraph 1. sites of mechanical damage. through e. e.14. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 5. If ' required. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Mark and record the inspection results as required by d.3.3.

5. refer to Table 1-8 5. Index No. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 5.14.6 Inspection Procedure. Magnetic Particle. the power lever torque tube shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed In Table 1-1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.15.14. Clean the power lever control rods thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. paragraph 1. 5.3 5. 5. 5. Secure all doors and cowlings as required. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Primary Method.1 5.15 POWER LEVER TORQUE TUBE (MT).4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4. d.4 Backup Method. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 5-15.8 Demagnetization.3. b. paragraph 1. 15). require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. if removed.2 Preparation of Helicopter.15. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.15.15.3 Access.4 Preparation of Part. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.15.5 System Securing. paragraph 1. a. The power lever torque tube is a pivoting attach point between the control stick and the fuel control unit. 5.3. 5. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.16. c. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.15.4.4. 5.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure.3. e. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. etc. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually on the power lever torque tube. With the switch remaining in the AC position. b. NDI Equipment and Materials (Refer to Appendix B. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.) Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3.15. sites of mechanical arrange corrosion.3. None required. No cracks are allowed. f. The control rods.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Defects. 5. If required.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. 5.14. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.3. 5-22 .15. Obtain access by removing access doors along center of cabin floor.1 Description (Figure 5-1. c.8.1 a. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.

Clean the power lever torque tube thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 5.2 Defects.3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. This inspection is for bellcranks. Inspect for cracks using the black light.15. Power Lever Torque Tube d.4.3. Index No. Refer to paragraph 5. 5. With the switch remaining in the AC position. if removed.15.1 Description (Figure 5-1. The power lever torque tube. None required.4 Backup Method. paragraph 1. Demagnetize before moving to the next position.16. f. 5. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually on power lever control parts.16 POWER LEVER CONTROLS (ET). and serrated washers in the power lever control system. Repeat steps a.16.15.3. 16).8. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.5 System Securing. 5. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5. through e.16. No cracks are allowed. 5. e.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-15.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 5.15. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.15.8 Demagnetization. for positions 2 and 3. paragraph 1. 5-23 . Secure access doors as required. control levers.

The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.off HdB .11 and Figure 5-16. the part to be inspected shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.20% Refer to Eddy Current Method.008.0 VdB . three-notched aluminum (0. shielded surface. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Eddy Current.16.16. Refer to Eddy Current Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz.mid LPF . d. e.100 HPF -0 H Pos . 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. straight. Primary Method. paragraph 1. f. c. paragraph 1.11. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 5. Frequency F1 . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.56° Probe drive . g.57. NORTEC-19ell. refer to Table 1-8 5. 5. Set up on test block as follows: (1) Null probe on test block. (3) Move probe over all three notches in test block.16.3 5. Obtain access to forward controls by removing access doors along center of cabin floor for controls aft of the cabin through openings in lower side of fuselage and by opening engine compartment cowling on left side. paragraph 1.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 5.3 Access. b.4 Preparation of Part.16. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.4.020.16. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. right angle.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. corrosion.1 a. (2) Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.200 KHz F2 .3. NDI Equipment and Materials.69.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.3. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.5 NDI Equipment Settings a.16.6 5-24 .3. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. sites of mechanical damage.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 5. shielded surface.040-inch notch in test block.3. If required. 0. (Refer to Appendix B. b.) Inspection Procedure. and 0. etc.16.80% V Pos .3.4.3.0 Rot .4.

3.16. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 5. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Inspect the part.16.3. 5.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. (2). (1). Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. paragraph 1.5 b.16.16. steps 5. Secure all doors and cowlings as required.3. None required.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-16. b. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Power Lever Controls a. 5. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The parts inspected. 5-25 . If the probes are changed.4 Backup Method.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. if removed. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5. c.3.16.5 System Securing.

17. shielded surface. 5. a cam.17. Probe. 100 KHz-500 KHz c. refer to Table 1-8 g.56° Probe drive . Access is through the left lower engine cowling. 5.57. NORTEC-19eIl. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually on cambox assembly parts. three-notched aluminum (0.17. right angle.17.17).) b. corrosion. the part to be inspected shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. and 0. (Refer to Appendix B.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.17. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.100 HPF -0 H Pos . paragraph 1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.17. To stabilize RPM as engine load fluctuates. and a slider.5 a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.80% V Pos -20% Refer to Eddy Current Method.020.2 Defects.69.040-inch notch in test block. Teflon Tape.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4.17. Eddy Current.3 Primary Method. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 5.4. Item 7) 5. No cracks are allowed. The cambox assembly consists of a housing.17. straight. NDI Equipment Settings. Probe.3.040 EDM notches) f. Eddy Current Inspection Unit b. If required. refer to Table 1-8 5.2 Preparation of Helicopter.0 Rot .1 Description (Figure 5-1. 5-26 .3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.TM 1-1520-256-23 5. shielded surface. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.11 and Figure 5-17. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. 5. Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 VdB . 5. 5. Aircraft Marking Pencil.3. Cable Assembly e.4. 90° 1/2 inch drop d.17 CAMBOX ASSEMBLY (ET). Frequency F1 -200 KHz F2 -off HdB .3.11. Move probe over all three notches in test block. paragraph 1.4 Preparation of Part.3 Access. 100 KHz-500 KHz. (Figure 1-4.3. sites of mechanical damage. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.) a.008.mid LPF .6 Inspection Procedure. a bellcrank. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4. mechanical control linkages translate motion from a collective pitch control through the cambox to the fuel control governor lever. Reference Block. 5. Index No.3. paragraph 1. etc.17. 0.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-17. Cambox Assembly 5-27 .

steps 5.7 and Table 1-5.3. and to locate exact ends of cracks to facilitate stop drill repair. 5. (Refer to Appendix B.5 System Securing. the part to be inspected shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.18.18.4 Preparation of Part. Inspect the part. None required. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.18 POWER LEVER CONTROL MOUNTING BRACKETS AND PLATES (PT).3.3.4 Backup Method. sites of mechanical damage.17. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. if removed. (1).18. This inspection can also be used to detect hidden cracks in gouges and dents. 5.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. 5. 5.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3.3 Primary Method.18. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Defects. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. 5. The power lever control mounting brackets and plates are positioned throughout the forward fuselage and engine compartment area to support linkages. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. If the probes are changed.5 Inspection Procedure. If required.5 b. c.18.4.3.17.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Obtain access to aft of cabin through openings in lower side of fuselage and by opening engine compartment cowling on left side. paragraph 1. 5. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 5. 5. 5. 5. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.17. and levers required for maintaining fuel control integrity. Fluorescent Penetrant.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.18. This inspection is to verify any crack indications found visually in the mounting brackets and plates. (2). Inspect area of concern. paragraph 1. before and after repair.17.18. corrosion.17.3. paragraph 1. paragraph 1.18. 5.3. 5. Index No. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. The part that was inspected.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 5.3. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 5.3 Access. etc. 18).3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Secure the left lower engine cowling as required.4. See Figure 5-18. Obtain access to forward mounting brackets and plates by removing access doors along center of cabin floor and on structural pylon island. Mark and record the inspection results as required by b.3. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. bellcranks. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.4.1 Description (Figure 5-1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by 5-28 .3.18.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 5-18. Power Lever Control Mounting Brackets and Plates 5-29 .

TM 1-1520-256-23 5.18.4 Backup Method. None required.

5.18.5 System Securing. Clean the inspected part to remove inspection media. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI, paragraph 1.4.16. The inspected part, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access doors, openings, and cowlings as required.

5-30

TM 1-1520-256-23 SECTION VI FLIGHT CONTROL GROUP 6. GENERAL.

6.1 CONTENTS . The flight control group inspection items covered in this section are those items of the UH-1 helicopter series flight control and related hydraulic systems. The parts and components are listed in the Flight Control Group Inspection Index (Table 6-1). Corresponding inspection figures and applicable text paragraphs are listed opposite each item. The index number for each item may be used to locate it in Figure 6-1. Table 6-1. Flight Control Group Inspection Index Index Number 2 3 4 5 6 7 *8 *9 10 11 12 *13 14 15 16 *17 *18 Inspection Method PT ET PT PT PT PT MT PT PT PT PT MT PT MT PT ET ET Paragraph Number 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 Figure Number 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18

Nomenclature Hydraulic System Components Hydraulic Pump Assembly Ground Test Connections Relief Valve, Bolt, and Fitting Pressure Switch Solenoid Valves Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic (Control) Clevis Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Tube Assembly (Cyclic Control) Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic (Control) Housing Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Cyclic Control) Cylinder Caps Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic (Control) Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective (Control) Clevis Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Collective Control) Tube Assembly Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Piston Rod Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Bearing Housing Collective Control System Bellcrank Collective Control System Lever Assembly

6-1

TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 6-1. Flight Control Group Inspection Index - Continued Index Number *19 *20 *21 22 23 24 *25 *26 *27 28 *29 30 *31 *32 *33 *34 *35 *36 37 *38 39 40 *41 *42 Inspection Method ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET ET PT MT PT MT PT PT MT PT ET MT MT ET ET Paragraph Number 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.27 6.28 6.29 6.30 6.31 6.32 6.33 6.34 6.35 6.36 6.37 6.38 6.39 6.40 6.41 6.42 Figure Number 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42

Nomenclature Collective Control System Support Collective Control System Control Tubes Tube and Lever Assembly Support Assembly, Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Starboard) Support Assembly, Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Port) Mixing Lever Assembly - Cyclic Controls Cyclic Control System Control Tubes Cyclic Control System Bellcranks and Levers Cyclic Control System Supports Adjuster Assembly Tail Rotor Control Quadrant Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Sprocket Guard Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Control Tube Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Housing Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Retaining Nut Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Sprocket Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Bearing Retainer Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Spacer Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill - Control Nut Tail Rotor Control Tubes Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder - Piston Rod Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder Adapter Tail Rotor Support Assembly Tail Rotor Arm Assemblies

6-2

TM 1-1520-256-23 Table 6-1. Flight Control Group Inspection Index - Continued Index Number *43 44 *45 *46 *47 *48 *49 *50 *51 Inspection Method ET MT ET ET ET ET ET ET ET Paragraph Number 6.43 6.44 6.45 6.46 6.47 6.48 6.49 6.50 6.51 Figure Number 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51

Nomenclature Tail Rotor Bellcrank Assembly Tail Rotor Cylinder and Support Assembly Hardware Tail Rotor Control System - Bellcranks Tail Rotor Control System - Levers Elevator Control System - Control Tubes Elevator Control System - Bellcranks Elevator Control System - Levers Elevator Control System - Supports Elevator Control System - Bellcranks, Levers, and Supports - Bearing Replacement

NOTE: *Indicates Flight Safety Part.

6-3

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-1. Flight Control Group (Sheet 1 of 5) 6-4

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-1. Flight Control Group (Sheet 2 of 5) 6-5

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-1. Flight Control Group (Sheet 3 of 5) 6-6

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-1. Flight Control Group (Sheet 4 of 5) 6-7

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-1. Flight Control Group (Sheet 5 of 5) 6-8

TM 1-1520-256-23 6.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS (PT).

6.2.1 Description (Figure 6-1, Index No. 9). This inspection is applicable to all unpainted check valves, baffles, plugs, tubes, fittings, and nuts contained within the hydraulic system to verify cracks found visually. This inspection can also be used to verify any indications found on painted surfaces providing the paint is only removed from the immediate area of interest. 6.2.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic system components and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.2.3 Primary Method. Fluorescent Penetrant. 6.2.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 6.2.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the component(s) shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.2.3.3 6.2.3.4 Access. Not applicable. Preparation of Part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method,

6.2.3.5 Inspection Procedure. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. paragraph 1.4.7 and Table 1-5. Inspect area of concern. See Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2. Hydraulic System Components 6-9

The hydraulic pump is a variable-delivery axial-piston unit mounted on a geared trim pad at right side of transmission accessory drive adjacent to the rotor tachometer generator.2 Defects. c. 6. b. paragraph 1. Eddy Current.3. 6.16. shielded surface.2.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.200 KHz F2 . refer to Table 1-8 Consumable Materials.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.3. straight.3.3.3. pump lubrication. No cracks are allowed. 6.off HdB . d.0 VdB .57. Clean the identified component(s) to remove inspection media.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. NDI Equipment Settings.2. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3 HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY (ET). right angle. g. 6.1 Description (Figure 6-1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4.020. if removed. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. refer to Table 1-8 6. etc.4 Preparation of Part. Four external ports of the hydraulic pump are provided for connecting suction. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic pump assembly and surrounding areas.2. 0.4. sites of mechanical damage.5 System Securing.69. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4. The component(s).3. 6.3. 6. corrosion. Item 3) 6. f. Frequency F1 . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Index No.3. e.0 6-10 . 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.5 a. 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3. 6. Access is through the right pylon door. If required.1 a. (Figure 1-4.3 Access. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. paragraph 1. three-notched aluminum (0.4 Backup Method. (Refer to Appendix B.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 3). 6.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. the hydraulic pump shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.) Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. and 0.3.3. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.3. None required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.3 Primary Method. shielded surface. and for seepage drain.008. NDI Equipment and Materials.3.3. NORTEC-19eI". h. pressure.

3. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Move probe over all three notches in test block.80% V Pos -20% Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.3. b.11 and Figure 6-3. c. Inspection Procedure.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.mid LPF .040-inch notch in test block. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.6 a.TM 1-1520-256-23 Rot .) b. Figure 6-3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 6.4.56° Probe drive . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Inspect the part. paragraph 1. Hydraulic Pump Assembly 6-11 .100 HPF -0 H Pos .

6.3. the ground test connections shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 Inspection Procedure.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. No cracks are allowed.3 Primary Method.3. If required.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table< =f 1-7. sites of mechanical damage.4.4 Backup Method. MIL1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. The hydraulic pump. (Refer to Appendix B.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. etc. Item 7) 6.3. Index No. 6. corrosion.3.3. if removed.1 Description (Figure 6-1. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.4. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4. 6.4 Backup Method.3. 6-12 . paragraph 1.4.5 System Securing.2 Defects.16. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4.3. Inspect area of concern. 6. Secure the right pylon door as required.7 and Table 1-5.5 System Securing.4. paragraph 1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4.3. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. steps 6.5 b.3 Access. (1). The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the ground test connections and surrounding areas.3. 6.3. (Figure 1-4. (2). A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4. Clean the ground test connections to remove inspection media.4.4. 6. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 6. cap assembly. 4). lower engine cowling. See Figure 6-4.3. 6. Fluorescent Penetrant.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3. 6. None required.4. The ground test connections. and brackets providing the paint is removed only from the immediate area of interest. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.4. 6. This inspection is to verify any indications found visually on the coupling halves. The ground test connections are used to connect the hydraulic test stand to functionally check hydraulic and flight control systems.4.3. 6. Secure the right side lower engine cowling as required. if removed.4 GROUND TEST CONNECTIONS (PT). None required.3. Access is through the right side.4 Preparation of Part. 6.4. paragraph 1. 6.4. If the probes are changed.3.

and surrounding areas. sites of mechanical damage. 6. bolt. acts as a safety device that monitors system pressure. Not applicable.5 RELIEF VALVE.5. 6-13 . 6.4. Ground Test Connections 6. Fluorescent Penetrant. the identified components shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. If required.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-4. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 6.5.4 Access. located on the forward side of the cargo hook lift beam. paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed. corrosion. bolt. Index No. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the relief valve.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. and fitting providing paint is removed only from the immediate area of interest.1 Description (Figure 6-1. BOLT. (Refer to Appendix B. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5.3. etc.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.5. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. This inspection is used to verify any crack indications found visually on the relief valve. 5).2 Defects.3. fitting. 6.5.5.5.3 Primary Method. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Preparation of Part. 6. A relief valve.3. AND FITTING (PT).2 Preparation of Helicopter.3 6. 6.4.

3 Primary Method.6. None required. 6. 6). Particular attention shall be given to the threaded area.16. 6. The identified component(s). Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. 6.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.6 Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. 6. (Refer to Appendix B.6.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the pressure switch and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed.4. Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 Inspection Procedure.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6.5 System Securing. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Index No. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. 6.3.4 Backup Method.6 PRESSURE SWITCH (PT). The hydraulic pressure switch is used in the hydraulic system pressure line to sense the system pressure.5. Fluorescent Penetrant. paragraph 1. paragraph 1. Figure 6-5.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Bolt.5.3.5. See Figure 6-5.6. Clean the identified component(s) to remove inspection media.2 Defects. 6.5. 6. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.6. and Fitting 6-14 .3.4. Relief Valve. Inspect area of concern.7 and Table 1-5. if removed.

4. Clean the pressure switch to remove inspection media.6.6. Preparation of Part.3. paragraph 1. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Inspect area of concern.6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.4 Access. if removed.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.6.16.2 Preparation of Helicopter.6.3. 6. 6.4. and fairings as required. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.3.6.5 Inspection Procedure.4 Backup Method. 6. the pressure switch shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. See Figure 6-6.3. Figure 6-6.6. doors. The pressure switch. and fairings.5 System Securing. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.4. sites of mechanical damage. 6. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. Secure all applicable access panels.3.3. Pressure Switch 6-15 . Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3 6.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. paragraph 1. doors. etc.7 and Table 1-5. 6. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. None required.4. corrosion. If required.

A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. corrosion.7.3 Primary Method. Preparation of Part.4 Access.7 and Table 1-5. One is located on the forward side of the cargo lift beam and the other (on helicopters with armament provisions) is located on the aft side of the cargo lift beam. Figure 6-7.7. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.1 Description (Figure 6-1. No cracks are allowed. 7).) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. See Figure 6-7. Inspect area of concern. sites of mechanical damage. Two solenoid valves are used.3. 6. 6.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. paragraph 1.7. If required. 6. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the solenoid valves and surrounding areas. 6.2 Preparation of Helicopter.2 Defects.4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. 6. 6.7.7 SOLENOID VALVES (PT). 6. Index No. paragraph 1.3.4.3. the solenoid valves shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7.3.3 6.7. (Refer to Appendix B.4. etc.7. Fluorescent Penetrant. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.5 Inspection Procedure. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.3. Solenoid Valves 6-16 .7. Not applicable.

3. c.3.1. paragraph 1. 6. 6. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. Magnetic Particle. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. paragraph 1.8. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.7.8. 6.3. 6. 6.4 Preparation of Part. The solenoid valves.3. d. if removed. b. a. Refer to paragraph 1.3. Position required for this inspection Is illustrated in Figure 6-8. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (Refer to Appendix B. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.8.4.8. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4.8.8 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) CLEVIS (MT). Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.8. c. 6. 6.8. Index No.8.1 Description (Figure 6-1. The hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (cyclic control) clevis is attached to the tube assembly which allows for attachment of the hydraulic cylinder to the support assembly. b.2 Defects. 6. e.3.8. paragraph 1. 6. 6. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 8). 6-17 .4. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.4. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the clevis. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Clean the solenoid valves to remove inspection media. None required.7.4 Backup Method. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.7.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.6 Inspection Procedure. 6.5 NDI Equipment Settings.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.8.5 System Securing. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the clevis removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.8. d. Not applicable.3 Primary Method.3 Access.16. Inspect for cracks using the black light.) a. f. No cracks are allowed. 6.3.2 and Figure 1-6.

8.8.3 Primary Method. 6. The clevis requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 6. Clean the clevis thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.8.4 Backup Method.3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Index No. Fluorescent Penetrant.2 Defects.9. 6. 6. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tube assembly. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.9 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER TUBE ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) (PT). Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Clevis 6. 6-18 .4.16. No cracks are allowed.8. Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3.9. 9).3. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. The hydraulic servo cylinder (cyclic control) tube assembly connects the cockpit controls to the collective control surfaces. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 6. None required.5 System Securing.9. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-8.8 Demagnetization.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6.7 1. 6.

10 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) HOUSING (PT).2 Preparation of Helicopter. if removed. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the housing.2 6. None required. the tube assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.10. 6. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4 Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Item 3) 6.5 Inspection Procedure.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. paragraph 1.5 System Securing.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.10.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Access is through the pylon doors.4. (Refer to Appendix B. No cracks are allowed. If required.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. The tube assembly.4. Secure the pylon doors as required. re-' quires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. Index No.9. Refer to 6. corrosion. 6.9. Fluorescent Penetrant.9. See Figure 6-9. Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B. MIL-I25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 6.10.9. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4 Backup Method.3. corrosion. 6. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. sites of mechanical damage.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Primary Method. Figure 6-9. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3 Defects.3. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Tube Assembly (Cyclic Control) 6-19 . 6.9.4.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3. 6.3. Clean the tube assembly to remove inspection media.3. 10).9. If required. Inspect area of concern.3.10. The hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (cyclic control) housing supports the bearing and piston rod assembly. (Figure 1-4. the housing shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.10.7 and Table 1-5. 6. paragraph 1. etc.3 Access.3. sites of mechanical damage. etc.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 6.3.9. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.16.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 6.4.9. 6. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection: Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.

See Figure 6-10.6 6. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.10. (Refer to Appendix B.10. (Figure 1-4.10.3 Access. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. 6. 11). 6.11. etc. 6. and fairings. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the caps.5 Inspection Procedure.3. paragraph 1.4 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.10.3 Defects. 6. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4. doors. Item 3) 6.4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Figure 6-10. Mark and record as required by paragraph' 1.4. Fluorescent Penetrant. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Housing 6-20 . MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-86. sites of mechanical damage. Primary Method. if removed. No cracks are allowed.11. paragraph 1.11 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER (CYCLIC CONTROL) CYLINDER CAPS (PT): 6.5 System Securing.10.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4.3. Inspect area of concern.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The housing. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the caps shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3 Access.3. None required. Secure pylon doors as required.11.4.3. 6.16.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.11.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. If required. 6.3.2 6.11. Backup Method. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Index No. Access is through the pylon doors.11. paragraph 1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.10. The hydraulic servo cylinder (cyclic control) cylinder caps retain the various packings and seals to prevent leakage of the cylinder. corrosion. 6. Clean the housing to remove inspection media.1 Description (Figure 6-1.3.7 and Table 1-5.

3. Backup Method.3 Defects. paragraph 1.3 Access.12 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (CYCLIC CONTROL) (PT).1 NDI Equipment and Materials.11.4. 6. 6.12.4 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.11. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4. Clean the caps to remove inspection media. MIL-125135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. doors.5 System Securing. 12). require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4 Preparation of Part. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.12. 6. No cracks are allowed.3. Inspect area of concern. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (Figure 1-4.7 and Table 1-5. (Refer to Appendix B.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.3. 6.12. paragraph 1.12. See Figure 6-11.4.3. 6.12.11. and fairings as required.11. None required. 6.12. etc.6 6.16. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 6. 6.11. Two hydraulic cylinder assemblies are incorporated to reduce effort required for fore and aft. and lateral control and to reduce feedback or forces from main rotor.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. the hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (cyclic control) shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The caps.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the cylinder assembly. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Cyclic Control) Cylinder Caps 6-21 . Primary Method. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.4. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. paragraph 1. Items 3 and 24) Figure 6-11. If required.5 Inspection Procedure. 6. Access is through the pylon doors. corrosion. Fluorescent Penetrant. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.2 6.3.3. Secure all applicable access panels. sites of mechanical damage. if removed. Index No.1 Description (Figure 6-1.

Not applicable.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.13. The hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (cyclic control). Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.2 Defects. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. 6. d.4 Preparation of Part. See Figure 6-12. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the clevis.2 and Figure 1-6.3 Primary Method.4.3. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.13.3. 6. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.12. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.4. 6. Inspect area of concern. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. paragraph 1. No cracks are allowed. paragraph 1.12.1.13.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. None required. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. 6. paragraph 1.16.13. 6. Clean the hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (cyclic control) to remove inspection media.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Backup Method. if removed.13.8.12. Index No. 6-22 . 6.8.3.13.7 and Table 1-5.4.4. e. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. (Refer to Appendix B. 6. The hydraulic servo assembly (collective control) clevis is attached to the tube assembly which allows for the attachment of the hydraulic cylinder to the support assembly.4 Preparation of Part.4 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.5 Inspection Procedure. b. 6.3. paragraph 1. Refer to paragraph 1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4. 6.4. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the clevis removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4. 6.12. c.) a. 6.3. Secure the pylon doors as required. 13).6 6.13.3 Access.12. f.5 System Securing.13 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) CLEVIS (MT).4. 6.13.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. paragraph 1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Magnetic Particle.3.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-12. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) 6-23 .

With the switch remaining in the AC position.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. 6. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.13. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Clevis 6-24 . The clevis requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Clean the clevis thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. _ Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1.3. 6. 6. Figure 6-13. d.3.3.8 Demagnetization.5 System Securing.3. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.13.13. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 6.4 Backup Method. Current should be applied for a no more than five seconds. c. b. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. None required. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.13. a.13.16. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-13. Inspect for cracks using the black light.4.

6. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.16. doors. If required.14.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. paragraph 1. None required.2 6.1 Description (Figure 6-1.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1. 14). Clean the tube assembly to remove inspection media. etc.4.3 Access.7 and Table 1-5. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tube assembly. 6.14.14. 6-25 . See Figure 6-14. Index No. and fairings as required.14.3. 6. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4 Preparation of Part.3. and fairings. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.14. 6.3. the tube assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 Inspection Procedure. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.3 Defects.4. 6.3.5 System Securing. The tube assembly.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. corrosion.14. 6. 6.14. doors.14 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) TUBE ASSEMBLY (PT). 6. No cracks are allowed.3. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Collective Control) Tube Assembly.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Fluorescent Penetrant. if removed. Figure 6-14.14. (Refer to Appendix B. Primary Method.4 Backup Method.14. Secure all applicable access panels. 6.4. sites of mechanical damage. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.14.14. Inspect area of concern. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.4.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. The hydraulic servo cylinder (collective control) tube assembly connects the cockpit controls to the collective control surfaces.

8. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Not applicable. 6. a.3.3. b.15. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the piston rod removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 15).3. b.15.6 Inspection Procedure.15. c. 6.4 Preparation of Part. 6.2 and Figure 1-6.1 Description (Figure 6-1.3. (Refer to Appendix B. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Magnetic Particle. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. 6.5 NDI Equipment Settings. f. 6.15.3 Primary Method.15.1.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (collective control) piston rod and surrounding areas.15. 6. No cracks are allowed. Refer to paragraph 1. 6. Index No.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4. d. 6. e.2 Defects. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Access. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.8. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-15. 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.15. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. d. 6-26 . paragraph 1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3.15.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Inspect for cracks using the black light.15.15. c.4.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.15 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) PISTON ROD (MT).4. The hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (collective control) piston rod is contained within the cylinder assembly at one end and attached to the tube assembly at the other. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. paragraph 1.4. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.3. 6.3.) a. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.

Clean the piston rod thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. The piston rod requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6-27 . Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.4. The hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (collective control) bearing housing supports the bearing and piston rod assembly.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-15.8 Demagnetization.15. None required.2 Defects.16.15. Index No.1 Description (Figure 6-1.3.15. 16). 6.16. 6.4 Backup Method.3 Primary Method. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Piston Rod.16 HYDRAULIC SERVO CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (COLLECTIVE CONTROL) BEARING HOUSING (PT).16. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the hydraulic servo cylinder assembly (collective control) bearing housing and surrounding areas.16.16.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Fluorescent Penetrant. No cracks are allowed. paragraph 1. 6. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 6. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 6. 6.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 6. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 6. (Refer to Appendix B.5 System Securing.

16. 6.7 and Table 1-5. 6. etc.4. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system bellcrank and surrounding areas.17.16.3.) a. Index No. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.008. 6.16. No cracks are allowed.4. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.4. 6. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 6. and 0. shielded surface. Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Bearing Housing. c.16. See Figure 6-16.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6. straight.17. Eddy Current.3 Access.16. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.4 Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B. 17). Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.17 COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANK (ET). Access is through the pylon doors.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. If required.5 System Securing. 6-28 . b. sites of mechanical damage.4. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. refer table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. the bearing housing shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. e. shielded surface.3.16.16.2 Preparation of Helicopter. three-notched aluminum (0. f. refer to Table 1-8 Figure 6-16.16. paragraph 1. (Figure 1-4. paragraph 1. paragraph 1. if removed. right angle. d. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3. None required. Various bellcranks are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface. Items 3 and 24) 6. corrosion. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.17. 100 KHz-500 KHz.17.3.5 Inspection Procedure.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 6.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.3.020.1 Description (Figure 6-1.2 Defects.4 Backup Method. g. 6.3 Primary Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method. The bearing housing. Inspect area of concern. Secure pylon doors as required.3. 6. Clean the bearing housing to remove inspection media.3. 0. 6.

Mark and record as required by paragraph . paragraph 1.17. If the probes are changed.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. a. NORTEC-19e . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. b.4 Preparation of Part. and fairings.80% . sites of mechanical damage. paragraph 1.11 and Figure 6-17.17. a.) 6. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.69. Inspect the part. 6.6 Inspection Procedure. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.17.56° .3.20% F2 . Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. (1).5 NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Refer to Eddy Current Method. 6.3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4.17. (2). (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.3.4.0 .3.17. 6-29 . Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. If required.200 KHz . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.4. Move probe over all three notches in test block.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.5 b.040-inch notch in test block. steps 6. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.3.3. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. 6.17.off b.3 Access.1. paragraph 1.11.4. c.100 -0 .mid . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . 6. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. corrosion. doors. etc. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.57.17.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.0 .17.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.

and fairings as required.17. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 6.18. right angle. straight.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. doors. 6.18. three-notched aluminum (0.3 Primary Method.5 System Securing.18 COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM LEVER ASSEMBLY (ET).17. (Refer to Appendix B. None required. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. if removed.18. 6. g. and 0.008. f. Index No.2 Defects. d. The bellcrank. 6. 6.1 Description (Figure 6-1.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. 6.18. No cracks are allowed. 6. 0.020. 18). shielded surface. Secure all access panels. b. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Collective Control System Bellcrank. refer to Table 1-8 6-30 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-17. Eddy Current. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas.) a. shielded surface. e. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Backup Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz. c. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.3. Various levers are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface.

Move probe over all three notches in test block. 6-31 .5 NDI Equipment Settings.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . 6. corrosion. doors.6 Inspection Procedure. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.3 Access.3.4.57. sites of mechanical damage.040-inch notch in test block.mid . Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. b.80% . (2).3.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.18. a. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.56° .1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.18.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 6. etc.4.18.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.0 . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.200 KHz .4 Preparation of Part.3. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. 6. Refer to Eddy Current Method. and fairings.) 6. NORTEC-19e .3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.18. paragraph 1.18.69. If required.20% F2 .18.0 . If the probes are changed. Inspect the part.3.4.11.5 b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. (1). paragraph 1.off b.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.18. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.11 and Figure 6-18. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Refer to Eddy Current Method.100 -0 . a. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. c. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. steps 6.

shielded surface. Index No. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph .19. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.2 Defects.3. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1. The collective control system supports are airframe mounted and provide a pivot point for levers and bellcranks.18. 6.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. straight.) a.19 COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM SUPPORT (ET). Collective Control System Lever Assembly. The lever assembly. None required.19. right angle.18. shielded surface. (Refer to Appendix B.18. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly 6-32 . if removed. 6.5 System Securing.19. 6. 6. and fairings as required. b.3. c.19. doors. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. Secure all access panels. 6.3. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6. Eddy Current.4 Backup Method.3 Primary Method. d.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-18. No cracks are allowed. 19). 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.

Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .56° . Reference Block. and 0.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.3. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.11. If required.19. doors.80% .040 EDM notches) f.20% F2 . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. refer to Table 1-8 g.4. Move probe over all three notches in test block.0 . a.19. 0.100 -0 .57. paragraph 1. Aircraft Marking Pencil. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.11 and Figure 6-19. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.19.3 Access.3.4.19. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. refer to Table 1-8 6.4. 6.off b.69. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. b. c.0 . three-notched aluminum (0.4.6 Inspection Procedure.4 Preparation of Part. paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 e. a. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. 6-33 .020. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.) 6.200 KHz .040-inch notch in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 6. corrosion. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.2 Preparation of Helicopter.mid . etc. Teflon Tape. NORTEC-19e .19. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.008.3. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. sites of mechanical damage. 6. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. and fairings. Inspect the part.

6. 6.5 System Securing. Adjustable and nonadjustable control tubes are used in the collective control system. None required. doors. Secure all access panels. and fairings as required.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.1. (Refer to Appendix B.20.5 b.19. steps 6. Index No.3. The nonadjustable type is fitted with bonded and riveted clevis ends.3. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas.2 Defects. 6. if removed. (1).7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. (2). 6. 6.20 COLLECTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL TUBES (ET).3. No cracks are allowed. The support. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.) 6-34 .20. Collective Control System Support. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph . 6. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.19.19.3 Primary Method.4 Backup Method.19.19.1 Description (Figure 6-1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Eddy Current.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-19. 20). 6. If the probes are changed.20. The adjustable type has a threaded clevis end and lock nut which secures the clevis end.3.20.

20. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. shielded surface. c. 100 KHz-500 KHz. right angle.56° . a.4. three-notched aluminum (0.008. corrosion. Inspect the part.4. 6.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. d. c. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. sites of mechanical damage.20. 6. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.20. 6-35 .4. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. a.4 Preparation of Part.5 NDI Equipment Settings.mid . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. NORTEC-19e . b.200 KHz . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Refer to Eddy Current Method. g.3.6 Inspection Procedure. If required. 6.020. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.0 .3. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. paragraph 1. f.) 6.4. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. and 0. refer to Table 1-8 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.3 Access. and fairings.80% .3. Move probe over all three notches in test block. etc.040-inch notch in test block.11 and Figure 6-20. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. doors. shielded surface.20.100 -0 .off b.3. e.57.3. paragraph 1. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.20. straight. b. 0.0 .20% F2 .69.

6. Secure all access panels. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas.20. 6.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. Eddy Current. These are segments of linkage between cyclic control sticks and swashplate control horns.21.20. if removed.21. doors.20.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. 21). Mark and record as required by paragraph .3.3. 6. 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-20.3. (2). No cracks are allowed.20.3 Primary Method. 6.21 TUBE AND LEVER ASSEMBLY (ET). The control tubes. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. If the probes are changed. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.1.5 System Securing.5 b. 6-36 .21.20.3. (1). None required.2 Defects. Collective Control System Control Tubes. and fairings as required.4 Backup Method. 6. steps 6.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Two control types and lever assemblies are mounted under the floor and forward of the pilot seats. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.

4. three-notched aluminum (0.20% F2 .TM 1-1520-256-23 6. shielded surface. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 6. e. f.56° .21.80% .3. paragraph 1. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. 6-37 . 6.040-inch notch in test block. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. paragraph 1.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. b.11 and Figure 6-21. a. Inspect the part. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . NORTEC-19e .57. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. c. d. straight.off b. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. paragraph 1.3. etc.4 Preparation of Part. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 100 KHz-500 KHz. and 0. sites of mechanical damage. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3 Access.0 . the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. c. 6.3.11.21.) 6. doors.020.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.6 Inspection Procedure. and fairings.3. (Refer to Appendix B.0 . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. If required.4. corrosion.3. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. refer to Table 1-8 6. 0.200 KHz . a. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.008. Move probe over all three notches in test block.21.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.21.69. shielded surface.4.) a. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. g.21. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. b. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.21.mid .100 -0 . right angle. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Refer to Eddy Current Method.

1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6.3. The tube and lever assembly.21. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. No cracks are allowed. None required.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. doors. and below transmission assembly) is provided for support of the cyclic and collective cylinder assemblies.22. If the probes are changed.3. The support is attached to the cabin structure and top side of cargo lift beam. Secure all access panels. 6. 6.4 Backup Method.21. (2). Index No.3 Defects. 6.2 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-21. and fairings as required. Primary Method.21. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the support assembly.1. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph .5 System Securing. 6. 22). requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The support assembly (located starboard side. if removed. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (STARBOARD) (ET).3. 6-38 . steps 6. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.22.22 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY. Eddy Current.21. (1).5 b.21.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.22. Tube and Lever Assembly.3.

6.) a. shielded surface.80% .3.5 NDI Equipment Settings.11.2 Preparation of Helicopter. b. paragraph 1. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. three-notched aluminum (0. 6-39 .3. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. (Refer to Appendix B.3. c. etc. (Figure 1-4. shielded surface. paragraph 1.020. Inspect the part. 6. sites of mechanical damage.57. Item 4) 6.100 -0 . If required.4.off b.22. Refer to Eddy Current Method.4 Preparation of Part. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.22.008.) 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 0. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. right angle. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. d. e.4. Access is through the pylon door.6 Inspection Procedure.11 and Figure 6-22.mid .22. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. f.040-inch notch in test block.3. straight. NORTEC-19e . Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. corrosion.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. refer to Table 1-8 6.56° .22.20% F2 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.22.0 . Refer to Eddy Current Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. and 0. a. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.22. Move probe over all three notches in test block.4.4. paragraph 1. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.0 .3 Access.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. c.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.69.200 KHz .3. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3. a. g. b. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .

5 System Securing. Mark and record as required by paragraph . None required.3.22.) 6-40 . steps 6. The support assembly (located port side and below transmission assembly) is provided for support of the cyclic and collective cylinder assemblies. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the support assembly. Index No. Primary Method.22.23. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (PORT) (ET). (Refer to Appendix B. doors.22. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.3.4 Backup Method. 6. No cracks are allowed. if removed.22. 6. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6. and fairings as required.3 Defects.1 Description (Figure 6-1. The support is attached to the cabin structure and top side of cargo lift beam.1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3. 6. 23). Eddy Current.3. Support Assembly.23.23. 6.22. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (2).TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-22. If the probes are changed.23. (1).5 b.23 SUPPORT ASSEMBLY.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 6.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. The support assembly.2 6. 6. Secure all access panels. Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Starboard).

TM 1-1520-256-23

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.23.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.23.3.3 Access. Access is through the pylon door. (Figure 1-4, Item 3) 6.23.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 6.23.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 - 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6.23.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-23. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

6-41

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-23. Support Assembly, Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Port).

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.23.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.23.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.23.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.23.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.23.5 System Securing. The support assembly, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access panels, doors, and fairings as required. 6.24 MIXING LEVER ASSEMBLY - CYCLIC CONTROLS (ET).

6.24.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. 24). The mixing lever assembly consists of bellcranks, matched links, and support. It is mounted on the right main beam below the cabin floor area. 6.24.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.24.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

6.24.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.)

6-42

TM 1-1520-256-23

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.24.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.24.3.3 Access. Access is through the pylon door. (Figure 1-4, Item 42) 6.24.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 6.24.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 - 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6.24.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-24. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

6-43

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-24. Mixing Lever Assembly - Cyclic Controls.

6-44

TM 1-1520-256-23

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.24.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.24.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.24.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.24.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.24.5 System Securing. The mixing lever assembly, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access panels, doors, and fairings as required. 6.25 CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL TUBES (ET).

6.25.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. 25). Various levers are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface. 6.25.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.25.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

6.25.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.25.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.25.3.3 Access. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels, doors, and fairings. 6.25.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 6.25.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 F2 - off

6-45

TM 1-1520-256-23

Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos

- 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20%

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6.25.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-25. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

Figure 6-25. Cyclic Control System Control Tubes.

6-46

TM 1-1520-256-23

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.25.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.25.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.25.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.25.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.25.5 System Securing. The control tubes, if removed, require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access panels, doors, and fairings as required. 6.26 CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANKS AND LEVERS (ET).

6.26.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. 26). This inspection is applicable to all bellcranks and levers contained within the cyclic control system. 6.26.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.26.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

6.26.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.26.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.26.3.3 Access. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels, doors, and fairings. 6.26.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4.

6-47

TM 1-1520-256-23

6.26.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 - 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6.26.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-26. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.26.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.26.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.26.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.26.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.26.5 System Securing. The bellcrank, if removed, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access panels, doors, and fairings as required.

6-48

TM 1-1520-256-23

Figure 6-26. Cyclic Control System Bellcranks and Levers.

6-49

TM 1-1520-256-23 6.27 CYCLIC CONTROL SYSTEM SUPPORTS (ET).

6.27.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. 27). Various levers are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface. 6.27.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.27.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

6.27.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.27.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications, sites of mechanical damage, corrosion, etc.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. If required, the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.27.3.3 Access. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels, doors, and fairings. 6.27.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 6.27.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 - 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6-50

TM 1-1520-256-23

6.27.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-27. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.27.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.27.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.27.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.27.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.27.5 System Securing. The supports, if removed, require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Secure all access panels, doors, and fairings as required.

Figure 6-27. Cyclic Control System Supports.

6-51

TM 1-1520-256-23

6.28

ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY (ET).

6.28.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Index No. 28). Various levers are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface. 6.28.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. No cracks are allowed. 6.28.3 Primary Method. Eddy Current.

6.28.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. (Refer to Appendix B.) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe, straight, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe, right angle, shielded surface, 100 KHz-500 KHz, 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block, three-notched aluminum (0.008, 0.020, and 0.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape, refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil, refer to Table 1-8

6.28.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the adjuster assembly removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.28.3.3 Access. Not applicable. 6.28.3.4 Preparation of Part. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI, paragraph 1.4.4. 6.28.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. a. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit, NORTEC-19e . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos - 200 KHz - 57.0 - 69.0 - 56° - mid - 100 -0 - 80% - 20% F2 - off

b. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.)

6-52

TM 1-1520-256-23

6.28.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method, paragraph 1.4.11 and Figure 6-28. a. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. b. Inspect the part. c. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.

NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.28.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. If the probes are changed, steps 6.28.3.5 b. (1), (2), and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. 6.28.3.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Mark and record as required by paragraph - 1.3. 6.28.4 Backup Method. None required.

6.28.5 System Securing. The adjuster assembly, requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.

Figure 6-28. Adjuster Assembly.

6-53

040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. The tail rotor control quadrant is located in the upper forward section of the tailboom. 6. 6.3.0 .3 Access. refer to Table 1-8 6.3 Primary Method. and 0. sites of mechanical damage. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. right angle.80% . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 6. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . b. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.3. Eddy Current. c. shielded surface. 6. 6.008. (Figure 1-4. The quadrant is utilized to interconnect the push-pull tubes and the tail rotor control cables. paragraph 1.29 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL QUADRANT (ET). Move probe over all three notches in test block.3.) 6-54 . Access is through the vertical fin driveshaft cover. paragraph 1.56° .29. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.29. NORTEC-19e .off b. etc. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Item 14) 6. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.2 Defects.) a.040-inch notch in test block. corrosion. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. shielded surface.4.0 .200 KHz .1 Description (Figure 6-1.29. three-notched aluminum (0.29.29. Index No.mid .4. g. 6.57. straight.020.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. a. Refer to Eddy Current Method.69.29. d. 29). This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the collective control system lever assembly and surrounding areas. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. f.2 Preparation of Helicopter. e. If required.4 Preparation of Part.11. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.29. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. 0.29.100 -0 . No cracks are allowed.20% F2 . the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. (Refer to Appendix B. 90°½ inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.

6.3.29.29. The control quadrant. if removed. Figure 6-29. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. (2). Tail Rotor Control Quadrant.5 b.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.6 Inspection Procedure. 6. None required.29. If the probes are changed.3.3.29. steps 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph .1. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. Inspect the part.4. a.29.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.5 System Securing.11 and Figure 6-29. b.3.29. (1). c. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 6.4 Backup Method. 6-55 .3. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. Secure the vertical fin driveshaft cover as required.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.

4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.30.30.16. See Figure 6-30.4 Preparation of Part. 6.3. The tail rotor control tube and quill sprocket guard are attached to the quill housing which is used to cover the sprocket and control chain.30. 6. 30).5 Inspection Procedure.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.30. 6.30.30 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL . No cracks are allowed. 6. Fluorescent Penetrant. 6. 6.30.3.3.2 6.7 and Table 1-5.30. None required. 6. Primary Method. paragraph 1. Clean the sprocket guard to remove inspection media.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. paragraph 1.3. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and sprocket guard removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Not applicable.4. (Refer to Appendix B. 6. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.4 Backup Method.3. 6.3 Defects. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.5 System Securing.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3 Access.4.Sprocket Guard 6-56 . The sprocket guard requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.30.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7.30.30. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. Inspect area of concern. Figure 6-30.SPROCKET GUARD (PT). Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.30.1 Description (Figure 6-1.3. Index No.3. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the tube assembly. 6.

Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. paragraph 1.31.8. Index No.16. 6.2 6. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. b.5 NDI Equipment Settings. 6.31. 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.1.31.4. Magnetic Particle. The piston rod requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. a.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. No cracks are allowed. b. (Refer to Appendix B. d. paragraph 1. 6. 6.31. Not applicable.5 System Securing.8 Demagnetization. paragraph 1. Refer to paragraph 1. 6. Defects may occur anywhere on the control.1 Description (Figure 6-1. d. f.3.) a.31. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. 31). The tail rotor control tube extends through a hollow rotor driveshaft to a pitch control crosshead and links which are connected to the tail rotor.4 Backup Method.3.4.3 Defects.3 Access. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.31.3.3.31. 6.31. Inspect for cracks using the black light.3.31. 6.4.6 Inspection Procedure. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.31. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-31. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3.3. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. c.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3.8. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the control tube removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. 6. e. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. c.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.3.31 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL . None required. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.2 and Figure 1-6.4 Preparation of Part.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6.31. 6-57 . 6. Clean the control tube thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.4.31. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.CONTROL TUBE (MT).31. Primary Method. 6.

2 6.HOUSING (PT).32 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL . Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . Primary Method. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. 6. 6.32.Control Tube. 6.3.32. Fluorescent Penetrant. 6-58 . sites of mechanical damage. etc.32.4 Preparation of Part.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the housing. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.3 Defects. Index No.32.5 Inspection Procedure. Inspect area of concern.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6. 6.3.32.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4. No cracks are allowed.3 Access. paragraph 1.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-31.32. paragraph 1. 6.3.32. 6. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. corrosion. See Figure 6-32.7 and Table 1-5.4. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The tail rotor control tube and quill housing contains the control quill assembly which attaches off the control tube. Not applicable. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 32).32. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. (Refer to Appendix B. 6. If required.

Magnetometer c.Housing.33 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .3. Clean the sprocket guard to remove inspection media. (Refer to Appendix B.1 Description (Figure 6-1. The tail rotor control tube and quill retaining nut secures the sprocket to the control nut.2 6.3 Defects. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the retaining nut.33. 6. Black Light 6-59 . Primary Method. 33).3. 6.) a.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-32.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. None required.32.3. 6.33. paragraph 1.33. 6. No cracks are allowed.33. 6.32. The sprocket guard requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. Magnetic Particle.5 System Securing. Index No.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.32. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4 Backup Method. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. 6. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .RETAINING NUT (MT).4.16. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.

5 NDI Equipment Settings.3.6 Inspection Procedure. Figure 6-33. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-33.33.4. refer to Table 1-8 f. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. paragraph 1. f. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3. paragraph 1. e. Through e.3 Access. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. for position 2. 6. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles e.8.3. Not applicable. refer to Table 1-8 6. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.3.33. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. Repeat steps a. Consumable Materials. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.Retaining Nut. a. Aircraft Marking Pencil. 6-60 .33.8.33. Refer to paragraph 6.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. b. d. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 6. c. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the retaining nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.33.4. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .33.4 Preparation of Part.3. 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 d. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4. 6.

) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. The tail rotor control tube and quill sprocket is attached to the control nut which turns the control chain.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Fluorescent Penetrant.8 Demagnetization. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the sprocket. 6.4 Backup Method.3.3 Defects. 6. 6.16. None required.3.34 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .3. 6. If required.1 Description (Figure 6-1.34.33.34. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. 6.34. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4.34. Index No.34. paragraph 1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.4 Preparation of Part. etc.34. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 6.3. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. paragraph 1. With the switch remaining in the AC position. 6.34. (Refer to Appendix B.34. Not applicable.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. corrosion.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.4.2 6.3. Clean the control tube thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. 6. Inspect area of concern. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.4. None required. 6-61 .SPROCKET (PT).TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Clean the sprocket to remove inspection media. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. paragraph 1. MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.5 System Securing.5 Inspection Procedure.4. The retaining nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The sprocket guard requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. 6. 6.3. 6. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.5 System Securing.3.3. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. sites of mechanical damage.3.33. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.33.3 Access.4.34.16.4 Backup Method. Primary Method.34.33. See Figure 6-34.7 and Table 1-5.3. 6. No cracks are allowed.34. 34).

35.4.3. No cracks are allowed. 6. 6.BEARING RETAINER (PT).35. paragraph 1.4. 6.35. The tail rotor control tube and quill bearing retainer are attached to the quill housing retaining the duplex bearings. 6. 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-34. See Figure 6-35. etc.35. 35). sites of mechanical damage. 6-62 .3. Primary Method. (Refer to Appendix B.) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. 6.5 Inspection Procedure.3 Access. 6.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the sprocket.35. Item 14) 6.3.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Fluorescent Penetrant.35.1 Description (Figure 6-1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . MIL-I-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8.3 Defects. and seals within the quill housing.7 and Table 1-5.35. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. the bellcrank shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1. Inspect area of concern.2 6. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.35 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL . spacer. Access is through the vertical fin driveshaft cover. corrosion.4 Preparation of Part.4.3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.Sprocket.3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.35. If required. Index No. (Figure 1-4.

Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-35.35. Magnetic Particle.36 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL . Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . 36).2 6. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. 6.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4 Backup Method. 6. Clean the sprocket to remove inspection media.36.3.SPACER (MT). Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke b. The tail rotor control tube and quill spacer are contained within the quill housing separating the duplex bearing from the seal. None required.36. Defects may occur anywhere on the surface of the spacer.36.16. 6. Black Light 6-63 . Index No.3 Defects.35. (Refer to Appendix B.36. The sprocket guard requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.3.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6. paragraph 1. 6.) a. 6.35. 6. Primary Method.5 System Securing.4.Bearing Retainer. No cracks are allowed. Magnetometer c.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.

Spacer.36. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. 6. refer to Table 1-8 f.3. 6. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.TM 1-1520-256-23 d. a. refer to Table 1-8 6.4. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the retaining nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. paragraph 1.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3.3 Access.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Aircraft Marking Pencil. 6-64 .36. Not applicable. Position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-36. Inspect for cracks using the black light. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . d.8. Consumable Materials. 6. b.36.6 Inspection Procedure.4 Preparation of Part.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 6.36. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles e. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.36. paragraph 1. c. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Figure 6-36.

8 Demagnetization. See Figure 6-37. MIL-1-25135 level 3 penetrant materials shall be selected from the approved list in Table 1-8. None required.3. Refer to Fluorescent Penetrant Method.37.37. paragraph 1.3 Primary Method. 6.36. Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection.37. 6. The spacer requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. 6. No cracks are allowed. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 6. 6. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the control nut.1 Description (Figure 6-1.2 Defects. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.4.3. paragraph 1. Clean the spacer thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media. paragraph 1.3. With the switch remaining in the AC position.3.4. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.3 Access.37. 6.4. paragraph 1.CONTROL NUT (PT).) Inspection equipment is listed in Table 1-7. Not applicable.3.4.3. Inspect area of concern.3. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.4 Backup Method.6 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. The tail rotor control tube and quill control nut are the bearing surface for the duplex bearings within the control housing and are also the attachment points for the sprocket and control tube. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.16.37.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.4 Backup Method.5 System Securing.37.37.36.5 System Securing.7 and Table 1-5.37 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBE AND QUILL .1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Fluorescent Penetrant. 6-65 . 6.36. None required.16. 6. The control nut requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.5 Inspection Procedure. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the control nut removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. (Refer to Appendix B. 37). 6.37. 6.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 6. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.37.4. Clean the control nut to remove inspection media.37. Index No.3.4 Preparation of Part.37.

6.38 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL TUBES (ET).1 NDI Equipment and Materials.020. refer to Table 1-8 6-66 .040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Index No. 6.2 Defects.3 Primary Method. No cracks are allowed.Control Nut 6. g. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-37.3. (Refer to Appendix B. Eddy Current.1 Description (Figure 6-1. d. and 0. e. 38). shielded surface.38. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.) a. 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz. three-notched aluminum (0. f. shielded surface. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor control tubes and surrounding areas. right angle. 6.38.008. straight. c. 0. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . b.38. The fixed type are fitted with bonded and riveted clevis ends. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Adjustable length control tubes and fixed length control tubes are used in the tail rotor control system. The adjustable type have a threaded clevis end and locknut which secures the clevis end.38.

and fairings.0 .69. c. (2). Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.80% -20% F2 . A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. sites of mechanical damage.11 and Figure 6-38. . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.200 KHz . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. If the probes are changed. 6.mid .) 6. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.11. Inspect the part.3.4. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. 6. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. etc. paragraph 1. 6. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. If required.57. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.040-inch notch in test block. 6-67 . paragraph 1.4.4 Preparation of Part.38.3.5 b.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. the control tubes shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.100 -0 .4.38. NORTEC-1 9eII. corrosion. doors. paragraph 1. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. (1).56° .38.3 Access.4.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.38.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.2 Preparation of Helicopter. a. steps 6.3.38. Refer to Eddy Current Method. a.3.off Refer to Eddy Current Method. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. b.38. Move probe over all three notches in test block.0 .38.6 Inspection Procedure.

Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.5 System Securing. and fairings as required. 6.38. 39).39.) a.39.1 Description (Figure 6-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. An hydraulic power cylinder in tail rotor control linkage is vertically mounted in a support.39.39 TAIL ROTOR HYDRAULIC POWER CYLINDER . c. Secure all access panels. This inspection is applicable to the piston rod. The control tube.38. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light 6-68 . 6. 6. (Refer to Appendix B.3.39. b.4 Backup Method.PISTON ROD (MT). Magnetic Particle. 6. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor hydraulic power cylinder piston rod and surrounding areas. None required.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-38. 6. No cracks are allowed. 6. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. doors.3.38.2 Defects.3 Primary Method. 6. Tail Rotor Control Tubes 6. if removed. Index No.

3. None required. The piston rod. if removed. the piston rod shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. paragraph 1.8. 6-69 . Refer to paragraph 1. With the switch remaining in the AC position.4 Preparation of Part.3. paragraph 1. c. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.4. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure.39. f. etc. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6. 6. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds.3 Access. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time.4.5 System Securing. 6. Access is through the right side general door.3. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch.4. corrosion. sites of mechanical damage.39.1.3.8 Demagnetization. (Figure 1-4.6 Inspection Procedure. 6.39. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Inspect for cracks using the black light.39.8. 6. 6. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3. 6. b. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks.39.4.3. a. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-39. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.39.16. Clean the piston rod thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3. paragraph 1.3.5 NDI Equipment Settings. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. Item 36) 6.39.2 and Figure 1-6.2 Preparation of Helicopter.4 Backup Method. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. Secure the right side general doors as required. If required. d.39.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.39.TM 1-1520-256-23 d. Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials. 6.4. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used. e.

Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-39.Piston Rod 6-70 .

paragraph 1. The tail rotor hydraulic power cylinder adapter is a clevis type adapter threaded into the end of the power cylinder which is the adjustment point for the power cylinder.2 Defects.40. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current. etc. 6. c. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.40 TAIL ROTOR HYDRAULIC POWER CYLINDER ADAPTER (MT).) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using applicable positions of this procedure.4.40. 6. (Figure 1-4. Index No.4.5 NDI Equipment Settings.40. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.6 Inspection Procedure.8.4. f.2 and Figure 1-6. Refer to paragraph 1. If required.40.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Demagnetize before moving to the next position. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. corrosion.3. No cracks are allowed. 6. b. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Repeat steps a. f.40. c. a.40.) a.3 Primary Method. for position 2.4 Preparation of Part. Magnetic Particle.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6.40.3.40.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Access is through the right side general door. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the power cylinder adapter. Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. (Refer to Appendix B. Positions required for this inspection are illustrated in Figure 6-40. through e. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.1. 6. Inspect for cracks using the black light. e. the hydraulic power cylinder adapter shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.40.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 6-71 . Refer to paragraph 6. 6. e.40:3. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. 6. sites of mechanical damage. b.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method. Item 36) 6.4. d.3. 40).8. Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.8.3.3. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. d.3 Access.

None required. No cracks are allowed. Eddy Current. 6.16. The hydraulic power cylinder adapter. Secure the right side general door as required. 6. 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-40. paragraph 1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI. if removed.40. The tail rotor support assembly is attached to station 211 fuselage bulkhead which supports the hydraulic power cylinder assembly. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the support assembly.3. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing.41. Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder Adapter 6.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6.5 System Securing. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.40.3.2 Defects. 6.41. 6-72 . With the switch remaining in the AC position.40.1 Description (Figure 6-1 .3 Primary Method. 41).4 Backup Method.4. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch. 6.41 TAIL ROTOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY (ET).40. 6. Clean the hydraulic power cylinder adapter thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3.8 Demagnetization.41. Index No.

Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 100 KHz-500 KHz.3. (Refer to Appendix B. corrosion.4.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.4. c. g. b.100 -0 .008. refer to Table 1-8 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. a.41. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. paragraph 1. shielded surface. If required. 6.020.5 NDI Equipment Settings.6 Inspection Procedure.3 Access. right angle. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 .2 Preparation of Helicopter.80% -20% F2 .) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. Refer to Eddy Current Method. c.57.4.3. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. . sites of mechanical damage. three-notched aluminum (0. etc.mid . a. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. 6. f.41.3. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. e.) 6.41. shielded surface.4.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. paragraph 1. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.0 .1 NDI Equipment and Materials.11. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. d. paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. (Figure 1-4. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.41. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.41.040-inch notch in test block. Inspect the part. Access is through the right side general door.11 and Figure 6-41. Item 36) 6. 0.200 KHz . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.69.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.3. and 0. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.41.3. 6-73 b. straight.56° .) a. NORTEC-1 9eII. . the support assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.4 Preparation of Part.3.

Tail Rotor Support Assembly 6-74 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-41.

41. 0.3. 6. 6. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.3 Access.3. if removed. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. paragraph 1. three-notched aluminum (0.5 b. 6. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. steps 6.41.) a. (Refer to Appendix B. Secure the right side general door as required.42 TAIL ROTOR ARM ASSEMBLIES (ET). Index No. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the arm assemblies.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.020.42. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.2 Defects. Item 36) 6. etc. corrosion. 6.3.1 Description (Figure 6-1. 6.008. No cracks are allowed.42. Fluorescent Penetrant. e. 6. Eddy Current. 6. straight. If the probes are changed.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.4. (Figure 1-4. refer to paragraph 1.42. 100 KHz-500 KHz.4 Backup Method. 6-75 .1 NDI Equipment and Materials.5 System Securing. and 0. c.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.3. b.3. If required.3. d.41.42. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. The support assembly. 6.3 Primary Method.7.42.4. the arm assemblies shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. The tail rotor arm assemblies attach the hydraulic power cylinder to the support assembly.41.2 Preparation of Helicopter. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. 9. refer to Table 1-8 6. f. right angle.4 Preparation of Part.42. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4.3. Access is through the right side general door. sites of mechanical damage. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3. shielded surface. (1). (2). Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. 42).7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 6.42. shielded surface.41.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.

3. .42.200 KHz .4.11.57.4.69.) 6. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.56° . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.100 -0 . NORTEC-1 9eII. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.42. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. paragraph 1.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.5 NDI Equipment Settings. paragraph 1.80% -20% F2 .040-inch notch in test block.mid .6 Inspection Procedure. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Tail Rotor Arm Assemblies 6-76 . Figure 6-42. a.11 and Figure 6-42. Refer to Eddy Current Method.0 .0 .

3. if removed. The tail rotor bellcrank assembly is a pivot point connecting the hydraulic power cylinder. f.42. Inspect the part. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.43.43.1 Description (Figure 6-1. refer to paragraph 1. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.3. If required. (1).4.2 Preparation of Helicopter.43.3. and control tube.2 Defects. the bellcrank assembly shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.008. 100 KHz-500 KHz. c.42.4 Preparation of Part.020. 6. steps 6. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the bellcrank. b. g. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 6. Fluorescent Penetrant.3 Primary Method. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. paragraph 1. refer to Table 1-8 b. 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.43 TAIL ROTOR BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY (ET).43.5 System Securing.42. (2). (Refer to Appendix B. right angle.3.42.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. and 0. 6. support assembly. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.3.3 Access. No cracks are allowed. e. If the probes are changed. c. 900 1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. and fairings.43. 0. etc. 6.4.3.43. sites of mechanical damage. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. three-notched aluminum (0.3. The arm assemblies. 6. corrosion.4 Backup Method.7.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 43). shielded surface. Secure the right side general door as required. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. straight. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.5 b. d. shielded surface.) a. 6. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.43. 6.42. Index No. 6-77 . 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 a.4. Eddy Current. doors.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6.

43.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1. Figure 6-43.200 KHz .3.57.4.11.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. a. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.) 6.0 .56° .off Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.0 . NORTEC-1 9eII. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.80% -20% F2 . (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. paragraph 1.100 -0 .69. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4.11 and Figure 6-43. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Tail Rotor Bellcrank Assembly 6-78 .mid . Move probe over all three notches in test block.040-inch notch in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method. . Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.43.

5 System Securing.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.43. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. f. 6.4.4 Preparation of Part.43. c. e. Not applicable.4.7. Fluorescent Penetrant.) a.3 Access.1 Description (Figure 6-1. paragraph 1.43.4. 6.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Refer to paragraph 1. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface of the hardware.44.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.3. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the hardware removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.3.44. b. c. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. Inspect the part. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. (Refer to Appendix B. 44).3.43. refer to Table 1-8 NOTE Hand-held magnetic coil may be used.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. (2). 6.3. 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.HARDWARE (MT).8.44 TAIL ROTOR CYLINDER AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY .2 and Figure 1-6. No cracks are allowed.44.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The tail rotor cylinder and support assembly .4. 6. 6.2 Defects. b. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. (1).44. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.1. and fairings as required. Secure all applicable access panels. 6. 6.43. Index No. d.44. if removed. requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 6.3 Primary Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. steps 6. 6.3. doors. refer to paragraph 1. Magnetic Particle. If the probes are changed. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.3. 6-79 . Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe/Yoke Magnetometer Black Light Fluorescent Magnetic Particles Consumable Materials.3. The bellcrank assembly.44.5 b.hardware is used throughout the assembly to secure the various components.3.4 Backup Method.44. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.

Mark and record the inspection results as required by paragraph 1.3 Primary Method.44. Press the test switch and withdraw the probe/yoke from the part for a distance of two feet before releasing the switch.45 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL SYSTEM . Select AC on the AC/DC power switch. 6. 6. refer to Table 1-8 6-80 . 6. Current should be applied for no more than five seconds. f. levers. b. and 0.2 Defects. Place probe/yoke on part in position 1 as shown.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 45). 6.44.008.44. d.44.44. Eddy Current.4 Backup Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz. Press the test switch and apply a light coat of magnetic particle media at the same time. c.16. The supports are airframe mounted and provide a pivot mount for levers and bellcranks. Refer to Magnetic Particle Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.3. 6.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Refer to Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI.020. No cracks are allowed.3.5 System Securing. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually In the tail rotor control system bellcranks and surrounding areas.3. e. c. Remove the media momentarily before removing the current.3.6 Inspection Procedure. shielded surface. The hardware requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Various bellcranks. Index No. paragraph 1. Inspect for cracks using the black light. a. right angle. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 6.45. three-notched aluminum (0.44.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4.8 Demagnetization. paragraph 1.8. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. shielded surface.45. The position required for this inspection is illustrated in Figure 6-44.45. g. With the switch remaining in the AC position.) a. 6. 6. 6. straight. b. (Refer to Appendix B. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.BELLCRANKS (ET). 6.4. d. Clean the hardware thoroughly to remove all residual magnetic particle media.3. 0. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. and supports are incorporated in the tail rotor control system.45. A magnetic field shall be applied to the part perpendicular to the orientation of possible cracks. place the probe/yoke legs in the same position used for magnetizing. None required.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-44.Hardware 6-81 . Tail Rotor Cylinder and Support Assembly .

3. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.) 6.040-inch notch in test block. c. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. doors. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Refer to Eddy Current Method. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.56° .4.80% -20% F2 .4 Preparation of Part. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.0 . corrosion. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. sites of mechanical damage. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. paragraph 1. a. Move probe over all three notches in test block. and fairings. etc.3 Access.57.45.45. (1). Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.45.2 Preparation of Helicopter. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. steps 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. . If required. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 6. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. paragraph 1.69.3.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 6.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.3.4. NORTEC-19eII.mid .5 b.45. paragraph 1. (2).45. a. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.45. 6-82 .0 .3.11.4.200 KHz . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. the bellcranks shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.6 Inspection Procedure.5 NDI Equipment Settings.4. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. If the probes are changed.45. 6. Inspect the part. b.11 and Figure 6-45.3.100 -0 .3.3.

Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. b. require installation in accordance with the applicable-technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 46).46. The bellcranks.46. 6.3 Primary Method.46. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.2 Defects.45. c.3.46. levers.3. None required. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the tail rotor control system levers and surrounding areas.1 Description (Figure 6-1.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-45.) a. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 6.45:5 System Securing.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. if removed.46 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL SYSTEM . shielded surface. right angle. doors.LEVERS (ET). 6.3. 6. 90°1/2 inch drop 6-83 . Various bellcranks.Bellcranks 6. and fairings as required. straight. Eddy Current. and supports are incorporated in the tail rotor control system. 6. The supports are airframe mounted and provide a pivot mount for levers and bellcranks.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. shielded surface. Index No. Tail Rotor Control System . No cracks are allowed. 6. (Refer to Appendix B. Secure the applicable access panels.45.4 Backup Method. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. 6.

3. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. NORTEC-19eII. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.4.4.040-inch notch in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. 6. a. e. refer to Table 1-8 6. paragraph 1.0 .46.100 -0 . 0. sites of mechanical damage. c.4. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.3. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.57. and 0. Cable Assembly Reference Block.008. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.11 and Figure 6-46. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.3 Access.69. three-notched aluminum (0.56° . 6-84 . a.46.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.mid . etc. b. f.5 NDI Equipment Settings. corrosion. Inspect the part. and fairings.6 Inspection Procedure. paragraph 1. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. Move probe over all three notches in test block. Refer to Eddy Current Method.) 6.0 .020.3. g.4.46.200 KHz .040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.80% -20% F2 . Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.TM 1-1520-256-23 d. If required. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.3. 6.11. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.4 Preparation of Part. . the levers shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. 6.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.46. doors.46.

47). Index No.46. if removed.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3. and fairings as required.1 Description (Figure 6-1. If the probes are changed. and supports with standard hardware. Secure applicable access panels. 6. The tubes are connected to bellcranks.47. doors.5 System Securing.47 ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .4 Backup Method.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6.2 Defects. Control tubes (adjustable and nonadjustable) are used throughout the elevator control system.47.46. 6-85 .46. This inspection is to verify crack indications found' visually in the elevator control system control tubes and surrounding areas.3. No cracks are allowed.5 b. 6. 6.3. 6. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.46. Tail Rotor Control System .3.CONTROL TUBES (ET). and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. steps 6. 6. The levers. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. levers.46. None required. (1). (2).Levers NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-46.

g. f. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.200 KHz .47. (Refer to Appendix B. d. b.) a.3 Access.100 -0 . 6. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b.008. corrosion. and fairings. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. 6. doors.56° .4 Preparation of Part. Refer to Eddy Current Method.) 6. right angle.80% -20% F2 . The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.040-inch notch in test block. shielded surface.3. Move probe over all three notches in test block. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Eddy Current.3. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.47.5 NDI Equipment Settings.3. 6. c. refer to Table 1-8 6. shielded surface. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. the control tubes shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. e. If required. three-notched aluminum (0.47. a.0 . 6-86 . Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. paragraph 1.69.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. sites of mechanical damage.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.47. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 100 KHz-500 KHz.2 Preparation of Helicopter. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. .0 . etc.4. straight.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.3 Primary Method. and 0.47. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. 6. paragraph 1.020.47.mid .4. NORTEC-19eII.3. paragraph 1.3.47. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure.11 Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.6 Inspection Procedure.11 and Figure 6-47.4.57.3.4. 0.

Elevator Control System .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-47.Control Tubes 6-87 .

shielded surface. three-notched aluminum (0. 0. Inspect the part. b. levers. 6. 6-88 .48. (2).040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.3 Primary Method.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.47.3. shielded surface.1 Description (Figure 6-1.2 Preparation of Helicopter.3 Access.TM 1-1520-256-23 a. 100 KHz-500 KHz. No cracks are allowed. refer to Table 1-8 b.47.3. Eddy Current. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. (Refer to Appendix B. 6.3. 6.5 System Securing.5 b. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. g.3. Cable Assembly Reference Block. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. etc.47. doors. None required. c.47.47. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1 -1.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. and 0. and fairings as required. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. (1). the bellcranks shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results. 6.48 ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANKS (ET). Secure applicable access panels. straight.48. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. If required. corrosion. right angle. steps 6. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The supports are airframe mounted and provide a pivot mount for levers and bellcranks. 6. f. 90°1/2 inch drop d. 48).008. Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. Index No. e. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. and supports are incorporated in the elevator control system. 6.48. 6. doors. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. Various bellcranks. The control tubes.48.48.3. and fairings. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3.4 Backup Method.2 Defects. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the elevator control system bellcranks and surrounding areas.48. 6.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.020.3. sites of mechanical damage. if removed. 6. 6. If the probes are changed. c.) a.

doors.6 Inspection Procedure. (1).3.4.3. a. NORTEC-19eII. Inspect the part.3. steps 6. 6. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. c.3.3.4 Backup Method.200 KHz .4 Preparation of Part.) 6. 6.mid .4.3. (2). Move probe over all three notches in test block. . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. Refer to Eddy Current Method. a.0 . if removed.48. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.48. paragraph 1.4. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. The bellcranks.5 b. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.48. b. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.80% -20% F2 .4. 6. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 6-89 . and fairings as required.5 System Securing.56° .100 -0 .off Refer to Eddy Current Method.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7.48.5 NDI Equipment Settings.48. Secure all applicable access panels.48.57. paragraph 1.11. None required. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.0 .11 and Figure 6-48.040-inch notch in test block. 6. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.3.69.48.48. paragraph 1. If the probes are changed.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-48.Bellcranks 6-90 . Elevator Control System .

b.49.4.80% -20% F2 . three-notched aluminum (0. a.56° .49. . (Refer to Appendix B.11. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance.5 NDI Equipment Settings.) 6-91 .49. Move probe over all three notches in test block. d. NORTEC-19e .mid .020. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil. right angle.3 Primary Method. the levers shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. 90° 1/2 inch drop Cable-Assembly Reference Block.49. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. refer to Table 1-8 6.0 .4. shielded surface.008. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. 6. g. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. doors. 6. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0. and fairings.2 Defects. 49).4 Preparation of Part. No cracks are allowed. Eddy Current.49. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe.49. 6.4. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.49.3.3 Access. This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the elevator control system levers and surrounding areas. 6.1 Description (Figure 6-1. paragraph 1.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.200 KHz .57. e. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications.49 ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM . If required. 100 KHz-500 KHz.100 -0 . Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels.3.0 . and 0. corrosion.3. 0.off Refer to Eddy Current Method.040-inch notch in test block.2 Preparation of Helicopter. Index No. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos b. etc. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. paragraph 1.) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. c.69. shielded surface. II Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. 6.3. f. Various levers are incorporated in the collective control system to provide movement of its respective control surface. 6.) a.3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. straight. sites of mechanical damage.49.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI.LEVERS (ET). 6.

The levers.3.5 b.3. if removed.Levers 6-92 . a. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. (1).3. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. doors.49.49.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.49. 6.3. and fairings as required. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.4. Figure 6-49.11 and Figure 6-49. If the probes are changed.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4 Backup Method. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. Secure applicable access panels.6 Inspection Procedure. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3.49. c.5 System Securing. Inspect the part. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. None required. b.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. steps 6.49. Elevator Control System . (2). Refer to Eddy Current Method. 6. 6.49.

Index No.0 . refer to Table 1-8 6. paragraph 1. sites of mechanical damage. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. NORTEC-19eII.56° . Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos . doors. No cracks are allowed.4.SUPPORTS (ET). This inspection is to verify crack indications found visually in the elevator control system supports and surrounding areas. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.50. If required.3 Primary Method. the supports shall be removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.50. 6. shielded surface. c. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. d.50.2 Preparation of Helicopter. corrosion.3 Access.0 . Refer to Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2 to locate applicable access panels. 6. 6. straight.4 Preparation of Part. (Refer to Appendix B.2 Defects.100 -0 . Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance. 6. 100 KHz-500 KHz.50. shielded surface. and fairings.50.50.mid . three-notched aluminum (0.50 ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM . 6. e.3.80% -20% F2 . right angle.008. and 0.3.1 NDI Equipment and Materials.50.3. 0. etc.3. The collective control system supports are airframe mounted and provide a pivot mount for levers and bellcranks.57.1 Description (Figure 6-1. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe.5 NDI Equipment Settings. b.TM 1-1520-256-23 6.020. f. 6.) a. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape. g. A partial inspection for cause (visual indications. 50).) may be performed on all exposed surfaces of the installed part using this procedure. a.69.4. 6. Eddy Current.off 6-93 .50.200 KHz .3.

(See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. Inspect the part. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made.3. steps 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 b. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off.) 6.4. Figure 6-50.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.50. Refer to Eddy Current Method.3. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null. paragraph 1. b. c. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6.3. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1.Supports 6-94 . 6. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. If the probes are changed.040-inch notch in test block. a.5 b. Move probe over all three notches in test block.50. paragraph 1. Elevator Control System .3. Refer to Eddy Current Method.4.11 and Figure 6-50. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.50.11.6 Inspection Procedure.3. (1). (2).50.

6.4.51 ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .5 System Securing. No cracks are allowed.2 Defects.) a. three-notched aluminum (0.51. 100 KHz-500 KHz Probe. The part shall be thoroughly cleaned. Frequency F1 HdB VdB Rot Probe drive LPF HPF H Pos V Pos .4 Preparation of Part. Make the following initial settings on the Eddy Current Inspection Unit.51.51. levers.2 Preparation of Helicopter.51.4 Backup Method.51. and supports in preparation for replacement. and 0.5 NDI Equipment Settings.51.3.3 Access.3 Primary Method. 0.BELLCRANKS. refer to Table 1-8 6. straight. 6.4.1 NDI Equipment and Materials. 6.50. and fairings as required.3. The supports. right angle.100 -0 . The helicopter shall be prepared for safe ground maintenance and the identified component removed in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. e.51. g. 100 KHz-500 KHz. 6. shielded surface. a. 51). AND SUPPORTS . NORTEC-19eII. LEVERS.50. Not applicable.0 .3. Eddy Current Inspection Unit Probe. d. 6. require installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1. doors.off 6-95 .69. 90°1/2 inch drop Cable Assembly Reference Block. Defects can occur anywhere on the surface and in the bore.57.0 . None required. Refer to Preparation of Part or Area for NDI. b. if removed.020.3.56° . f.040 EDM notches) Teflon Tape.mid .3.TM 1-1520-256-23 6. Eddy Current. This inspection is applicable after removal of bearings from bellcranks. c. Index No. 6. shielded surface.1 Description (Figure 6-1. paragraph 1.BEARING REPLACEMENT (ET).80% -20% F2 . (Refer to Appendix B. 6. 6.200 KHz . 6. Secure applicable access panels.51.008. refer to Table 1-8 Aircraft Marking Pencil.

11. 6-96 .4. Set up on test block as follows: (1) (2) (3) Null probe on test block.4.6 Inspection Procedure. refer to paragraph 1. (See standard instrument display shown in Figure 1-7. steps 6. Mark and record as required by paragraph 1. a. Refer to Eddy Current Method. paragraph 1. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. Move probe over all three notches in test block. c. Refer to Eddy Current Method. If the probes are changed. Adjust gain to obtain a three block vertical signal when probe is passed over 0.51.TM 1-1520-256-23 b.5 b.3. 6.51.51. Any signal similar to the notches in the test block is cause for rejection. 6.3.7. 6.51.11 and Figure 6-51.040-inch notch in test block. Inspect the part. Place probe on a good area in the inspection location and null.51.51.4 Backup Method. Fluorescent Penetrant.3. Adjust phase as required to obtain horizontal lift-off. The identified component requires installation in accordance with the applicable technical manuals listed in Table 1-1.7 Marking and Recording of Inspection Results.4. paragraph 1. NOTE Either probe identified in paragraph 6. and (3) shall be repeated each time a change is made. b.1 may be used depending primarily on the ease of accessibility and user friendliness.) 6. (2).3.3. (1).5 System Securing.

and Supports . Levers. Elevator Control System .TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure 6-51.Bellcranks.Bearing Replacement 6-97/(6-98 blank) .

10 2.11 2.8 2.9 2.12 2.2 2.15 2.17 2.5 2.7 2.18 Main Rotor Hub Grip Main Rotor Hub Pillow Block Main Rotor Pitch Horn Main Rotor Drag Brace Assembly Main Rotor Blade Bolt Main Rotor Hub Plate Assembly Grip Retention Nut Main Rotor Hub Shield Assembly Yoke Trunnion Strap Fitting Main Rotor Blade(Metal) Main Rotor Blade(Metal) Main Rotor Blade(Metal) Composite Blade Stabilizer Frame Main Bar Rotor Center Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Voids Water Voids Cracks Cracks AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 003 003 003 002 002 003 002 002 002 002 002 003 005 006 005 003 003 Backup 001 Backup 001 Stabilizer Bar Support A-1 .TM 1-1520-256-23 APPENDIX A MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART NONDESTRUCTIVE INSPECTION NDI METHODS/EQUIPMENT 001 Fluorescent Penetrant Method 002 Magnetic Particle Method 003 Eddy Current Method 004 Ultrasonic Method 005 Bond Testing Method 006 Radiographic Method NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.13 2.14 2.6 2.16 2.3 2.4 2. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 2.

TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.26 2.21 2.41 Stabilizer Bar Lever Stabilizer Assembly Bar Tube Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Sleeve Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 003 002 003 003 002 003 003 003 003 003 003 002 002 Backup 001 Damper Lever Arms Rotor Mast Adapter Set Damper Splines Wingshaft Swashplate Inner Ring Swashplate Outer Ring Support Assembly Collective Levers Scissors Assembly Drive Link Collective Assembly Nut.34 2.40 2.25 2. Collective Sleeve Bearing Retention Scissors and Sleeve Hub Tail Rotor Assembly Hub Grip Backup 001 Backup 001 Backup 001 Backup 001 002 Backup 001 002 001 002 002 002 003 003 Backup 001 Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Nut Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Ring Adapter Nut Tail Rotor Hub Yoke Tail Rotor Hub Trunnion Tail Rotor Crosshead Tail Rotor Blade A-2 .39 2.23 2.37 2.33 2.31 2.27 2. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 2.30 2.20 2.28 2.32 2.35 2.29 2.22 2.36 2.24 2.19 2. Retainer Nut.38 2.

18 3.20 Tail Rotor Blade Tail Rotor Blade Main Driveshaft Inner Couplings Main Driveshaft Outer Couplings Main Driveshaft Splined Nuts Main Driveshaft Clamp Sets Main Driveshaft Grease Retainers Main Driveshaft Adapter Bolt Main Driveshaft Engine Adapter Transmission Case (Top) Ring Gear Case Main Transmission Case Transmission Support Case Lift Link Bushing Hole Threaded Fittings Input Drive Quill Wear Sleeve Generator Drive Quill Case Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Quill Case Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Gear Teeth Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Assembly Voids Water Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 005 006 002 002 002 002 001 002 002 002 003 002 003 003 001 001 001 003 003 001 003 A-3 .16 3.43 3.17 3.6 3. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 2.4 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.13 3.11 3.19 3.10 3.42 2.5 3.2 3.15 3.14 3.12 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.3 3.

36 3.33 3.40 3.23 3.25 3. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 3.41 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Forward Coupling Tail Rotor Driveshaft Rear Coupling Tail Rotor Driveshaft Coupling Shaft Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hanger Support Fittings Intermediate Case Intermediate Inner Coupling Gearbox Gearbox Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 002 002 002 003 003 002 002 002 002 Backup 001 Intermediate Gearbox Outer Coupling Intermediate Sleeve Intermediate Pinion Shaft Gearbox Gearbox A-4 .32 Tail Rotor Drive Quill Bevel Gear Teeth Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Spacer Pylon Mount Bolts Fifth Mount Fitting Friction Damper Main Rotor Mast Nut Oil Pump Driveshaft Oil Jets Tail Rotor Driveshaft Tail Rotor Clamps Tail Rotor Hangers Tail Rotor Inner Coupling Driveshaft Driveshaft Driveshaft (Spherical) Support Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 002 002 002 001 002 002 002 001 003 002 002 002 Backup 001 Backup 001 3.31 3.30 3.39 3.38 3.24 3.27 3.21 3.35 3.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.26 3.22 3.34 3.37 3.28 3.29 3.

8 Aft Fuselage Structural Tube Reinforced Floor Mounting Plates and Base Assembly Transmission and Engine Cowling Anti-Collision Light Mount Lift Beam Cap Adjacent Structure and Cracks Cracks 003 003 4. Brace Main 4.46 4.7 4.45 3. Retaining Clip.42 3.44 3.6 Cracks Voids Cracks 003 005 003 Center Service Hanger Bearing Assembly.10 4.43 3. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 3.12 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 003 Friction Damper Support.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER. and Beam Caps 4.3 Tail Rotor Gearbox Case Tail Rotor Gearbox Inner Coupling Tail Rotor Gearbox Outer Coupling Tail Rotor Sleeve Gearbox Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Voids Voids AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 003 002 002 002 002 005 005 Transmission Lift Link Honeycombed Structures with Metallic Covering Honeycomb Structures with Non-Metallic Covering Forward Fuselage Metal Structures Center Panel Service Deck Deck.4 4.11 4. Clip.9 4. and Mount Assembly A-5 .5 4.2 4.

Rod Ends.31 4.25 4.18 4.28 4.16 4.13 4.33 Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 Backup 001 Backup 001 A-6 .19 4.20 4.24 4. UH-1 Series (2) (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM 4.32 4.29 4.15 4.22 4.23 4.21 Friction Damper Mount Assembly Aft Landing Attachments Crew Door Hinges Hinged Panel and Hinges Hinged Panel Assembly Hardware Cargo Door Cargo Door Retainers and Retainer Strap Passenger Step Paratroop Static Line Fitting and Compression Tube Jack and Mooring Fittings Standard Crew Seat Mission Operator Seats Engine Mounts Engine Mount Fittings Engine Deck Fittings Pillow Blocks Exhaust Tailpipe Duct Assemblies and Gear Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks AVIM DEPOT (5) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (6) REMARKS 003 003 003 003 001 003 003 001 003 Backup 001 Backup 001 4.14 4.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.30 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 002 003 003 002 002 002 002 001 002 Backup 001 Backup 001 Bolts.26 4.27 4. and Pins Tailboom and Fuselage Attach Fittings Elevator Assembly Support Fittings Elevator Horn Assembly 4.17 4. Turnbuckles. Rods.

Air Induction System Improved Particle Separator (IPS) Air Induction System Exhaust System Clamp Tailpipe and Heatshield Oil System .8 5.10 5.37 4.9 5.35 4.14 5.38 4.Metal Lines and Fittings Engine Oil Tank Support Engine Oil Cooler Engine Oil Cooler Turbo Blower Oil Separator Engine External Oil Filter Head and Bowl Power Lever Control.39 5.34 4.12 5. UH-1 Series (1) (2) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM AVIM DEPOT (5) (6) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REMARKS REQUIREMENTS 4.2 Intermediate Gearbox Support Installation Tailboom Structure Ninety Degree Gearbox Support Fitting Vertical Fin Landing Gear Cross Tubes Skid Tube Saddles Non-Self-Purging Particle Separator .6 5.15 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 002 002 A-7 .7 5.5 Cracks 001 5.13 5.36 4.Air Induction System Inlet Screen Latch Assembly Self-Purging Air Induction System Air Particle Separator Self-Purging .11 5.3 Cracks 001 5. Rods Power Lever Torque Tube Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 001 004 003 001 Backup 001 5.4 Cracks 001 5.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.

14 Cracks 001 A-8 . UH-1 Series (1) (2) PROCEDURE NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM AVIM DEPOT (5) (6) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REMARKS REQUIREMENTS 5.7 6.3 6.9 Cracks 001 6.10 Cracks 001 6.2 6.16 5.17 5. Bolt.8 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 001 003 001 001 001 001 002 6. and Fitting Pressure Switch Solenoid Valves Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Clevis Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Tube Assembly (Cyclic Control) Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Housing Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Cyclic Control) Cylinder Caps Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Clevis Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Collective Control) Tube Assembly Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 001 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.6 6.5 6.4 6.11 Cracks 001 6.18 Power Lever Controls Cambox Assembly Power Lever Control Mounting Brackets and Plates Hydraulic System Components Hydraulic Pump Assembly Ground Test Connections Relief Valve.13 Cracks 002 6.12 Cracks 001 6.

Sprocket Guard Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .19 6.16 6.Cyclic Controls Cyclic Control System Control Tubes Cyclic Control System Bellcranks and Levers Cyclic Control System Supports Adjuster Assembly Tail Rotor Control Quadrant Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . UH-1 Series (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER (2) COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM AVIM DEPOT (5) (6) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REMARKS REQUIREMENTS 6.18 6.Control Tube Cracks 002 Cracks 001 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 003 003 003 Backup 001 Backup 001 Cracks 003 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 003 003 003 001 Cracks 002 A-9 .25 6.22 6.24 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.29 6.26 6.15 6.27 6.23 6.28 6. Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Port) Mixing Lever Assembly .17 6.21 6. Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Starboard) Support Assembly.31 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Piston Rod Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Bearing Housing Collective Control System Bellcrank Collective Control System Lever Assembly Collective Control System Support Collective Control System Control Tubes Tube and Lever Assembly Support Assembly.20 6.30 6.

Bellcranks Cracks Cracks 001 002 Cracks Cracks 001 001 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 002 001 003 002 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 002 003 001 003 003 002 Backup Backup 001 Backup 001 Cracks Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 003 A-10 .47 6.46 6.37 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.Piston Rod Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder Adapter Tail Rotor Support Assembly Tail Rotor Arm Assemblies Tail Rotor Bellcrank Assembly Tail Rotor Cylinder and Support Assembly Hardware Tail Rotor Control System .Spacer Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .38 6.34 6.33 6.Levers Elevator Control System .48 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .35 6.43 6.Control Nut Tail Rotor Control Tubes Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder .Bellcranks Tail Rotor Control System .44 6.Retaining Nut Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .Control Tubes Elevator Control System .Sprocket Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill . UH-1 Series (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER (2) COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM AVIM DEPOT (5) (6) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REMARKS REQUIREMENTS 6.41 6.42 6.32 6.40 6.39 6.36 6.Bearing Retainer Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .45 6.Housing Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .

Bearing Replacement Cracks Cracks Cracks 003 003 003 Backup 001 A-11/(A-12 blank) .49 6.50 6.TM 1-1520-256-23 NOMENCLATURE OF END ITEMS HELICOPTER.Supports Elevator Control System . Levers. UH-1 Series (1) PROCEDURE NUMBER (2) COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY (3) INSPECT FOR (4) MAINTENANCE CATEGORY AVUM AVIM DEPOT (5) (6) INSPECTION EQUIPMENT REMARKS REQUIREMENTS 6.Bellcranks.Levers Elevator Control System . and Supports.51 Elevator Control System .

of Illinois Tool Works Inc. 956 Brush Hollow Rd. IL 60656 Spectronics Corp. Chicago. 1301 W. Ainsle St. Chicago. Cleveland. Clearwater.O.TM 1-1520-256-23 APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT LISTING Part Number/ Specification National Stock Number Nomenclature Fluorescent Penetrant Method Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Kit Manufacturer MIL-1-25135 Type I. NY 11590-1731 Ultraviolet Products Inc. P. 30th St. of Illinois Tool Works Inc. DBA UVP Inc. Co. 1301 W Ainsle St. 956 Brush Hollow Rd. 1845 E.00-736-5177 Magnetic Particle Method Yoke and Coil Kit YL-61 Magnaflux Div. OH 44114-4438 6635-00-391-0058 B-1 . FL 33575-1917 6635-00-022-0372 Magnetometer 2480 Sterling Mfg. Box 1500 Upland. Level 3 FMI General Services Administration (GSA) 6850-00-703-7406 Black Light UV Kit Spectronics Corp. Method C. Westbury. IL 60656 6635-00-566-5198 Black Light Meter J-221 6695-00-488-5451 Blacklight Bulbs A-A-1765 6240-00-233-3680 Filter UV 6635. Westbury. CA 91778 General Services Administration (GSA) 3901 Magnaflux Div. NY 11590-1731 4920-01-145-3924 Black Light ZB26 6635-00-611-5617 Magnetic Particle Inspection Probe DA200 Parker Research Corp. 5100 Walnut Grove Ave. 2642 Enterprise Rd..

WA 99336 NDT Engineering Corp 7056 S. 5. Kennewick. Coaxial 6 ft 1902474 Staveley Instruments.0/4 Cable Assy. Inc. PA 17044 6635-01-417-5467 Transducer. 421 North Quay St. Inc.0 MHz 60°shear wave. WA 99336 Staveley Instruments. WA 98032 NDT Engineering Corp 7056 S. right angle. 421 North Quay St. 7056 S. Kent. 220TH ST. shielded surface P/100 KHz-500 Khz /A/0. WA 98032 6635-01-419-0694 Reference BlockThree-Notched Aluminum TBS-1 1902510 Reference BlockThree-Notched Titanium SRS-0824T Reference BlockThree-Notched Magnesium SRS-0824M NDT Engineering Corp 7056 S. 421 North Quay St. Kent. 220TH St. 7056 S. 220th St. Kennewick. Kent. straight.TM 1-1520-256-23 Part Number/ Specification National Stock Number Nomenclature Eddy Current Method Eddy Current Inspection Unit Manufacturer NORTEC-19e" Staveley Instruments. WA 98032 MT-905-60 MP-60 NDT Engineering Corp. 220TH St. WA 98032 Reference BlockBlock of Six Conductivity Sample Probe.5/6 Probe. Kent. WA 98032 5995-01-278-1271 CBM-6 Ultrasonic Method Ultrasonic Inspection Unit USD 15S KrautKramer Branson 50 Industrial Park Road Lewistown. 220th St. Kent. 1/4 x 1/4 inch element 6635-01-057-2761 B-2 . shielded surface P/100 KHz-500 KHz /A/90. Kennewick. Inc. WA 99336 NDT Engineering Corp.

040inch thick aluminum skin Test Block.TM 1-1520-256-23 Part Number/ Specification National Stock Number Nomenclature Manufacturer Bond Testing Method . 421 North Quay St. spring loaded BMM-H 9316874 Test Block. WA 98032 Radiographic Method Tripod X-Ray Tubehead Stand PDSANE480 Staveley Aerospace Systems. Kennewick.063Inch thick aluminum skin Cable Assembly. Composite Defect Standard #3 1916453 Test Block. Inc. 421 North Quay St. CA 91311 6635-01-067-6315 B-3 . 7056 S. WA 99336 Staveley Instruments. Kennewick. Mechanical Impedance Analysis S-BM-CPM-P11 9117789 S-MP-4 9317808 Staveley Instruments. Kennewick. Kennewick. Kennewick. 421 North Quay St. Inc. Chatsworth. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0. 421 North Quay St. WA 99336 Probe Holder. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0. Inc. WA 99336 Probe. Inc. WA 99336 Staveley Instruments. 421 North Quay St. Inc. 220th St. WA 99336 Staveley Instruments. Coaxial 6-feet long (1 required) Refer to Appendix C Refer to Appendix C Refer to Appendix C CBM-6 NDT Engineering Corp.Bondmaster 9016600-99 Staveley Instruments. 421 North Quay St.020Inch thick aluminum/fiberglass skin Test Block. WA 99336 Staveley Instruments. Inc. Kent. Composite Defect Standard #1 1916451 Test Block. 6635-01-432-9954 Cable Assembly Kennewick. Aluminum Honeycomb with 0. Inc.

P. 36 Apple Ridge Rd. CT 06813-710 B-4 6210-01-374-4594 6635-01-417-1830 .TM 1-1520-256-23 Part Number/ Specification National Stock Number Nomenclature Manufacturer AIX Warning Light W/Stand X-Ray Unit (LPX-160 water-cooled digital) 153001 3-000-0723 American Industrial X-ray Inc LORAD Corp.O. Box 710 Danbury.

3. Scotchbrite scuff and alcohol/acetone rinse the adhesive side of the aluminum panels. 5. All dimensions /+/-) 1/16 inch. An index order is provided for cross-referencing the number of the item to be manufactured to the figure number which covers fabrication criteria.063 aluminum skin Test block with aluminum honeycomb (0. 1. 5. 4. Break all sharp edges and corners. 4. C. exercise caution applying around inserts. 6.020. Scuff sand the adhesive side of the fiberglass panel. 0. B. 3.063 inch thick) specification QQ-4-250/5 Fiberglass panel 0. All bulk materials needed for manufacture of an item are listed by part number or specification number.020 inch thick.75 or 1. This appendix contains complete instructions for manufacturing nondestructive inspection support accessories in the field. BULK MATERIALS 2024-T3 aluminum panels (0.020 fiberglass skin and a 0. Moderate weight should be applied to the panels throughout the cure cycle.75 or 1. Polyolefin disks (inserts) should be flush with core if not slightly recessed.0 inch) between 0.040 aluminum skin and a 0.0 inch) between a 0. Milling or grinding of core cutouts is preferable over crushing techniques. 2.030 inch thick (High-Density Polyethylene or Polypropylene) Adhesive EA934 or equivalent C-1 . 2.75 or 1. 7.TM 1-1520-256-23 APPENDIX C ILLUSTRATED FIELD MANUFACTURE ITEMS LIST Introduction A.020 skin NOTES 1. Mix adhesives per manufacturer's instructions. D. specification MIL-1-24768/27 Aluminum honeycomb core 0.0 inch thick. 1/8 cell size specification MIL-C-7438-G Polyolefin disks 0. A rotary file or end mill cutter should produce acceptable results.025-0.040 and 0. See Figure C-1. Item Number WS-2 WS-4 Support Accessories Test block with aluminum honeycomb (0.

TM 1-1520-256-23 Figure C-1. Composite Test Blocks C-2 .

.....5 Adjuster Assembly (ET) ...................8.......................................28.....................................4......2 Description ..............................................................................................3.................4........................28.......................................................................................................7.........................5........2 Description ........................................................................................4.....................5 Anti-Collision Light Mount (ET) ..............10................................................2 Description .....14 Backup Method .......................................................................3 System Securing .......................2..................................................2............................6.......................................................................................37...................................14....................................................................................5.........4 Defects ..................................................................10..........................3 System Securing ..............................4..............4....................................................................................2.....................8.............4.............1 Primary Method .......................................................7...37...........4...................5 Index 1 ........................................4...................................................................................................37.....................................................................5 Adapter Nut (MT) ..................7...............................................37 Backup Method .................................3........4..................................................4...........................1 Primary Method ................................4.................5 Aft Landing Gear Attachments (ET) ....................................................................................................................................................14................4..............................................28....................5 Airframe and Landing Gear Group ..............................................................................................3.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3..........4..............................................................................5..........................3 System Securing ....4...................8.....................................3 System Securing ...........................................................................28................................................8................10..........................................4...........................................................................3 System Securing .........................................14........................................................................................28 Backup Method .....................5............................3 System Securing .......................................................................................................................................2 Description ....................................14.....................6..................................................4 Backup Method .................................................4..............4.....................................8......................................................................1 Primary Method ...........2 Description ..1 Primary Method .............................................................................................................37...................4 Air Particle Separator Self-Purging .....................4 Defects .........................................................................................................................4...2.1 Primary Method ...............................28....................................................5........................................Air Induction System (PT) ...........................................................................4........................3..............................2......4.......................................................................................................3 System Securing ................6................................................6..............................................................................4 Defects ...............7 Backup Method ...........1 Primary Method .......10........................................1 Primary Method ..........................6....................................4...................................................4..................................5 Aft Fuselage Structural Tube (ET) .4 Defects ................8 Backup Method .....................................................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-15 3-16 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 2-82 2-83 2-82 2-82 2-82 2-83 6-52 6-53 6-52 6-52 6-52 6-53 4-17 4-20 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-20 4-36 4-37 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-37 4-1 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 4-26 4-28 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-28 A Adapter Bolt (MT) ......7..2 Description ..............................7..............................10 Backup Method ........................37.........2 Description .....4 Defects .....3..................................................................6.............................4...............10.................................................................5.........4 Defects ................................................................................................................................................................................................2............4 Defects ...................14........

.......................6..................................................................................6...5..1 Primary Method ..................................2 Description .............6..................5 Backup Method .....4 Defects ......................5 Collective Control System Bellcrank (ET) .....................19................5.................................................17-4 Defects ........................4 Defects ........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...............................................................................................2 Description .......2 Description .......19...........................................................5....17...................................................................................................................................................................... Rod Ends......................4...................................4...............5 Cargo Door (ET) ..........................2 Description .........................4........3 System Securing .....................................................................17......................1 Primary Method ..................18................6..................................................3 System Securing ..18.......................................................17.....4.....................2 Description ........4............................6 Backup Method .....4.......................................................................4............................................................4..............18 Backup Method .....................................................6.........3 System Securing ...........................................5..................................1 Primary Method ......................................................................5 Index 2 ..................................................................................4..................30.........................................................17................................................................................................4....... Turnbuckles...................................17............1 Primary Method ...........................................2 Description ..................4.6.......................................................................................... Hanger Bearing Brace Assembly.1 Primary Method .....................4.6......................................................................5........................................1 Primary Method ..................17................30.................................. and Pins (MT) .........................................................4....................................4............4.............................4..................18......... Rods..................17...................................5...........................................................4 Defects ....................................................................4.............................................................................................4...19 Backup Method ...17 Backup Method .................5 Center Service Deck Panel (BT) ................................................4....................................................4......4................................................................................................................4..................4.............4...5 Cargo Door Retainers and Retainer Strap (ET) ....................................................................5............................................5....................................................................................30.............................................................................................................3 System Securing ...........................................................30.......................30.6.............................................................3 System Securing ..............................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ...............................19.......30 Backup Method.....................................2 Description ......................................................................................18.............................................................5 Center Service Deck................6....................................................................................................................17.......................................................4.............Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 4-69 4-71 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-71 5-26 5-28 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-28 4-45 4-46 4-45 4-45 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-47 4-47 4-47 4-48 4-16 4-17 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-13 4-15 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-15 6-28 6-30 6-28 6-28 6-28 6-30 B Bolts.............................................17.......................................................................................................6..4................4................................................................................................................................17 Backup Method ................3 System Securing ...........................4................18.............................5..............................................................4 Defects ..........................5.....3 System Securing ....4....................4 Defects .............................................5 C Cambox Assembly (ET) ..........................................................5................................................................................................................................................................................19..................................................................4.4 Defects ......6............................................................19.............................................................................. and Main Beam Caps (ET) ...............................

........................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-34 6-36 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-36 6-30 6-32 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-32 6-32 6-34 6-32 6-32 6-32 6-34 2-62 2-64 2-62 2-62 2-62 2-64 2-69 2-70 2-69 2-69 2-69 2-70 2-36 2-38 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-38 4-37 4-40 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-40 Collective Control System Control Tubes (ET) .....4...............................................................................................5 Collective Control System Support (ET) ............................6.............................4 Defects ...............................................................................................18 Backup Method .............................................................................................................16.......4.....................6...........6................15 Backup Method ............18................................30..................................5 Collective Sleeve Assembly (MT) ...16..........................................2 Description ......................27..3 System Securing ..............................................................2.....................6..............................................1 Primary Method ..............................2 Description ...........................................................................................18.....................................................30.............................3 System Securing .................................................................................................................3 System Securing ...........................1 Primary Method ..................................................6.......4............2........................................5 Composite Main Rotor Blade (BT) .............................4 Defects ..................................................4.........4 Defects ..................................5 Collective Control System Lever Assembly (ET) ......................................20.....................................2..................................4 Defects ...15..3 System Securing ....18...2 Description ..............15...................................................................................................6............................6.........................2................2 Description .............2..............................................................................20.................................................................................30....................................................2..........................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method .............20............6.................................19.........................................................2...........................6................6.................27 Backup Method ......19....6................................................................................1 Primary Method ...................................................................30..........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...............15......................2...........................................................18.......................6........................................................................................................................4 Defects ....................................................6...................................................................27....................16.......................................................................30....................4 Defects .......................................................6............20.........................................................................5 Index 3 .........................................................................................................5 Crew Door Hinges (ET) .................................2................................................6...........................................4............................................................16.................................................................................................................15.................27.............6.........................3 System Securing ................................4 Defects .......................................................1 Primary Method .......19...............................................................2..2................................4.............................................19 Backup Method ..27............................3 System Securing .................30 Backup Method .......................................16 Backup Method ................1 Primary Method ........................................................................................................2..2....................1 Primary Method ..........................................2.................................................................................................20 Backup Method ..........19................2 Description .........................................................3 System Securing ..................................................................2.....................................18.........2.....19...........................................6...............................20...................................................................................................2 Description ..................................5 Collective Levers (ET) ..........2..........................2......................................................6..........................27...................................................15...2 Description ..................................................................................................................16....................................

...................................................2.................21........................................6..................................4...................................2..4 Defects ..............................1 Primary Method ..............................2..........................2 Description ..........29..................4 Defects ..........................................................................................................................23 Backup Method...........6........................................................4....................3 System Securing...........................................................................................................................................25.....2................26.....6.................................6.................................................................1 Primary Method .........................................................2 Description .........................................26................................................................................................................21............................................3 System Securing .......................................26 Backup Method ..................................................................................................25......5 Cyclic Control System Control Tubes (ET) ...........5 Drive Link (ET) ............3 System Securing........6................26......23...........5 Damper Wingshaft Splines (MT) ..............Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-47 6-48 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-48 6-45 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-45 6-47 6-50 6-51 6-50 6-50 6-50 6-51 2-49 2-51 2-49 2-49 2-49 2-51 2-53 2-55 2-53 2-53 2-53 2-55 2-67 2-69 2-67 2-67 2-67 2-69 4-75 4-76 4-75 4-75 4-75 4-76 Cyclic Control System Bellcranks and Levers (ET) ...............27.................................................................................................................2.........1 Primary Method .........................................................................32.........29..................................................................21......................................................................................................................................................................................3 System Securing..........................................................21 Backup Method .........................................................................................................................................32.......27.2......................................................2 Description............................................23....23..............5 Cyclic Control System Supports (ET) ..............................6.....27...................................................................................6.................................................................................................................................................21........................................................................4...............................................................................................5 E Elevator Assembly Support Fittings (ET) ..........6...............2......25..................................2..........32............................4 Defects .....25...............................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.........................1 Primary Method .............................................2........6.................5 Index 4 ..2 Description .6.3 System Securing ..............................4 Defects ..............................................6..6....................................26........26.....................21.......................................27.29..........................................................................4..........6.....................1 Primary Method ..................................................23.........................................27 Backup Method...............................2 Description .......................6.....................2.........................25.......................2 Description .....................3 System Securing ....................2................................................2........................................................................................................29 Backup Method......................6..............4 Defects ....................................2.......................................4......................................29..................4 Defects .....................................................................29................................5 D Damper Lever Arms (ET) .......2.......................................................32 Backup Method ..............................6.........................................................................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ..................................1 Primary Method .................................................................................................................................23...................................................................................................3 System Securing....4...................................................27..................................................2.......6.........................................................................................................................................................................6......2.......................................32............2............................2 Description ............................................................................2..............................25 Backup Method ...........................................................4 Defects ................32..................................................................

....4............4..............................2 Description ..4 Defects .......3 System Securing...........6................................Levers (ET) .......................................................2 Description ................6........................6..........................2 Description..................6...............4..........................................................6......2 Description.....................................6....................................6...................................4..............27...........................................................................................3 System Securing ................6..47...........................50 Backup Method......................................................................................47..............................50...................................................................................6...........................................69.............5 Elevator Control System .....................47.4.......48.........................................................................................................................6..........6................................................. and Supports Bearing Replacement (ET) ...............1 Primary Method ......4 Defects ...........................27....................................................................................................47..............................................i Primary Method ........50..1 Primary Method ........................33....3 System Securing .............47 Backup Method..........................27.............48 Backup Method......................4...............................................4......................4 Defects ............6............6..6....................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.......................................6..6...........1 Primary Method .....................................................47.......................................................................27.................6.....................................................48...6.........4 Defects ..............................6..............................................27 Backup Method .........................................2 Description.................33.......1 Primary Method ..........................1 Primary Method ..........................6.......................................................................................................................49.50...................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Elevator Control System ......................Control Tubes (ET) ...............33................................................................6...........6...........................6....49.........................4.......................................................6.....47................................................................27................................................................6......................................................................48...................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-88 6-89 6-88 6-88 6-88 6-89 6-95 6-96 6-95 6-95 6-95 6-96 6-85 6-88 6-85 6-85 6-86 6-88 6-91 6-92 6-91 6-91 6-91 6-92 6-93 6-95 6-93 6-93 6-93 6-95 4-77 4-78 4-77 4-77 4-77 4-78 4-63 4-65 4-63 4-63 4-63 4-65 Elevator Control System Bellcranks (ET) ........................Supports (ET) ....5 Engine Deck Fittings (MT) ...................50.......................................................................4........................................................................................5 Index 5 ..33.......................50.........5 Elevator Control System ...............................................................................................................6...........................................................................................................................................................................................33......................................................................47......................................................................................5 Elevator Horn Assembly (ET)...................4 Defects ...........47...........................................................................................................................................................................................2 Description.......................6.................................................................................3 System Securing .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................47.........................4 Defects ..............49 Backup Method............................................................................. Levers............4..............................2 Description .5 Elevator Control System .....................................33 Backup Method ........................48...49..................................................47................................................................Bellcranks...............49.4..........................................3 System Securing ...............................................................51 Backup Method...................................6.....................................48.......................................4 Defects .................................................4..............................................................3 System Securing............3 System Securing............6................................................1 Primary Method ......

..................................................5.............................................................................25 Backup Method .........................................................................................................................11....................5.........................5.........4 Defects .......6 Backup Method ........................................................ Exhaust System Clamp (PT) ...............26......26................................................................................................................11....................................................3 System Securing ...........................................................................................................................................................2 Description ..........................................4............................13...............................5................................................................................................................................4...1 Primary Method ..............................................................................................4 Defects ....5 Engine Oil Cooler (PT) .......5..................................................13 Backup Method...............................25..................................4.......................................................................10......25..................................11 Backup Method............................26 Backup Method ...............................5 Index 6 ..5..........................................9...............................................................................................6.....................................................................................................................................................................................9 Backup Method......................................................................................................................................................................................5...........5...............................................................................................................11..................1 Primary Method ...........5..................................................................11..............................3 System Securing...................4..5......................10 Backup Method .........................5..............4.....................2 Description ............................................................................................................................4.......5..............13....10.................................................................................................................5..................................................................................................................................................5.........................................................4 Defects .....................................3 System Securing ...............................................................................5..........................5.........................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..........4.Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 5-19 5-20 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-1 4-62 4-63 4-62 4-62 4-62 4-63 4-60 4-62 4-60 4-60 4-60 4-62 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 B-1 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 Engine External Oil Filter Head and Bowl (PT) ......4......................3 System Securing ..........................................5 Engine Mount Fittings (MT) ........................................................................................................................................25............................................13.....1 Primary Method ...............................................................2 Description...................................................................................................5 Engine Group ........9.....................5............................5..................1 Primary Method ..3 System Securing .............9..........................................................................................................................5....4..........................4 Defects .5.......................5..................................................10.........................2 Description.....................................................................................5 Engine Oil Tank Support (PT) .......................5.............................26.....9...........................................................3 System Securing ......................4..........................................3 System Securing ...................4............5..............5................................................10...........5.........................................5.......................................5.................................................9...................................................5 Engine Oil Cooler Turbo Blower (PT) ..............................................13..........................................6......................4 Defects ......................................................................................................1 Primary Method ..........25....10..........................................5 Engine Mounts (MT) ................................................................2 Description .............................................................4 Defects .....5 Equipment Listing ................................25...............................................................1 Primary Method ....................6.........................................................2 Description ................................................................1 Primary Method ..........................6........................................................................6..............4 Defects .....................4...................11..................13..........5...........................................................2 Description ..................26.....5..26....5.................................

............................................................4.........3 Index 7 ...............12..............................13............................24.......................................................13 Backup Method ................. Retaining Clip.........................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ...............5 F Fifth Mount Support Fitting (PT) ..........................................6 Forward Fuselage Metal Structures (ET) ...............................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 4-68 4-69 4-68 4-68 4-68 4-69 3-46 3-47 3-46 3-46 3-46 3-47 6-1 4-11 4-13 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-13 4-34 4-36 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-36 3-48 3-49 3-48 3-48 3-48 3-49 4-31 4-32 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-32 1-2 1-8 1-6 1-5 1-6 Exhaust Tailpipe and Duct Assemblies (PT) .............3 System Securing ........................................................................13..........................4.3............................4.......................................................................................4......................................................................................................4.........12...........................2 Description ............4 Defects .........................................................5 G General Information ......................................................................................4....................................................................3 System Securing ...................................4.......................................1.........3 System Securing.............4.....................................................4...........................................4......................................................29..................................3.............................................................................................7 How to Use This Manual .......................3 System Securing ................................................................................................................................................................4......................................................24............................................................................................3 System Securing..................................................................................24...4.................................4............................4...........................................................4.......................................................1 Primary Method ............2 Description ...............2 Description ..........................29.......3...............................................................2 Description ........3.............................................................................12..........3.........5 Flight Control Group..3...........4 Defects ....................8 Description ...............TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.....................29..4 Defects .....................................................................................1............. and Mount Assembly (ET) ..25..................................................................................................................2 Description ..4..........................4..............................................13.................5 Friction Damper (MT).......................1 Primary Method .....1 Primary Method .................................3.......................1.................4.......................4....................................1 Configuration ........13........12..29........................................4 Defects .................1..............................................................4.......1.................................................................................................4................1 Primary Method .................................................................................................................25..............................................................24........................2 Description .13.....................1........................................................................4............................1...............................................25..............................5 Friction Damper Support.........................................................................................29........................................1 Primary Method .......................3......4 Defects ...............................................4...4...............12 Backup Method .........................................................................3..........................................4.............................................1.....................................................................1..............................................4.....2 Inspection Item Code ........................................................3...........................................................29 Backup Method...........................................................................................3 System Securing .25..........................................................................4 Defects ................................4 Backup Method ..................4....25...................................4.......................................12...............4......................................................................................................................5 Friction Damper Mount Assembly (ET) ......................3.............. Clip..24 Backup Method .....................24.............................................................25 Backup Method ...........................................3....................................................................................................................

.....................16..1 Primary Method ...........................2..5 Hinged Panel Assembly Hardware (PT) ........................................4.......................................2 Description .....4 Defects '.........5 Ground Test Connections (PT) .4...........................4 Defects ............6....................................................................................................3 System Securing....................................2..........................6 Special Terms........................................17......................................................................4 Backup Method............................................................................1 Primary Method ......17.............................................................................................................................................1.......6.... and Acronyms ...........................1............17 Backup Method...............................................................1 Station...........................................2 Description....................................... and Fin Station Lines .............................................................................................2 Description .....................................2..1...............................................................................3....17.....................................................8...............2.......16 Backup Method ..................................................8........................3................................17....................................................................................................6.16.............................................................................................................4...............3 System Securing......................................................1.......................3............ Water........5 Grip Retention Nut (MT)..................8 Backup Method........17..4.........................17.......4.............2.............................4...................................5 Index 8 ..............................................................................17...............................4........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX......1......................................................8..........................................6....16.5 Honeycomb Structures with Metallic Covering (BT) ...........4..............................................................................................................................................................4 Defects .................................................................4..............1..........................3 System Securing.........................3 System Securing.............1....4..........................................................................9 Use of NDI Symbols ............4.....................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 1-6 1-4 1-8 1-6 1-6 3-32 3-33 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 2-18 2-19 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-19 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 4-40 4-43 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-4 4-7 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-7 Related Publications ......................................4 Defects ...........4..........................................................16..................................................................2...............................................................................2........................................................................4..........................................................................................................6.................................4............................................................................1 Primary Method .............................4.................3 System Securing...........................4..................... Buttock.2............2 Description....................2....................3......................4.....................8.........................................2.............2...................................................16............................................17..........................................................................................1......................4.2 Backup Method........4 Defects ..................................................................4............................6.................................................................................................................................................. Abbreviations................................................................................1........4 Use of Reference Publications .........1 Primary Method .........................................1...................3.............17.......4...4..........4.........................17 Backup Method................................................................1 Primary Method ..................................................................................5 Generator Drive Quill Case (ET) ..2 Description...............3 System Securing............................................................................17......4 Defects .........................................................................................................................................................................................................4......................................................................................................................................................................................................8.........................1 Primary Method ..............................................................3.............................5 H Hinged Panel and Hinges (ET) .2 Description..........................

.......13.......................................................13........1 Primary Method ..................15.........................................6................................3.................................................6...........................3 System Securing ...6...3.........................................................6.......Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 4-7 4-9 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-9 3-36 3-38 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-38 3-35 3-36 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-36 6-10 6-12 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-12 6-27 6-28 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-28 6-22 6-24 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-24 6-26 6-27 6-26 6-26 6-26 6-27 Honeycomb Structures with Non-Metallic Covering (BT) ..................................................................................19..............................6................4 Defects ............6.......................................6.............................2 Description.........................................................................3.....6............................................6..........................................................3...........................................................................................................6...................................................19....................................................3 System Securing ........................................................................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.....................5 Index 9 ................................................................................................4 Ad Defects ..............................................................6.......................19 Backup Method .........................1 Primary Method ...............................3........15....................4.............18 Backup Method ..............4..................15.........2 Description ...........................................4 Defects .....3........................................................3................................6...................................................16 Backup Method .....1 Primary Method ................................................................13 Backup Method ..................................................................................................................................16.......................3 Backup Method ...........6..................19.................................................3...............................................................................3...................................................................................................4.........................................................1 Primary Method .........................4 Defects .........................................3.............................................5 Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Gear Teeth (PT) ........................................................................................3...................................13...........3.................13......................6.................................................................................................................................................................18..19..............................................................16.........2 Description ......................16...........................................................................................................18.....................4.18...6.............................................................................1 Primary Method .....................3...........................................................................................3 System Securing..........1 Primary Method ...............2 Description ..18.........................................................................................6.........................................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Bearing Housing (PT) ......2 Description ....................18................3........................3........................................6....................................................2 Description.................15 Backup Method .................................3......................................3.......5 Hydraulic Pump Assembly (ET) .....1 Primary Method ...........15........................6................................................................................................................................................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Clevis (MT) ............................6..........5 Hydraulic Pump and Tachometer Quill Case (ET) ...............................................................3...................16....................................................................................4..........................................................................................................................6............................6..3............................3 System Securing ........................3....19.....16................................................................................................................................................3...............6............................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Collective Control) Piston Rod (MT) ..4 Defects ................................................................................................6.....................3 Backup Method.................................3 System Securing.4...................3...................6.................................4 Defects ......................................3 System Securing ...........................................................................15....2 Description......................3 System Securing ....13.......................................4 Defects ......................................................................................

......1 Primary Method .......................11.................................6.....3 System Securing................8 Backup Method..........11 Backup Method................................6............................................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-17 6-18 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-22 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-20 6-21 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-21 6-18 6-19 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-9 6-10 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-10 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Clevis (MT) ....11...........................1 Primary Method ...............................................6.......5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Collective Control) Tube Assembly (PT) ......................................................................................6........................................6...............6.........................................................................................................................................................................2..................2 Description...................6..........................................11....................................................................................................................................................9......................................................6........3 System Securing...............................................9 Backup Method.......................................................................................................................................6.....2 Description.........................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Tube Assembly (Cyclic Control) (PT) .....10 Backup Method ............8....................................................................6................................................................6..............2.......................................6............................................................................6..................1 Primary Method ..............2 Description ...............5 Hydraulic System Components (PT) ......1 Primary Method ...............................12 Backup Method....................6.......6.................................................................................6........2.........6...6...........3 System Securing........6...8..............................................2...........................................................................................................................................................9............14......................................................2..................3 System Securing.............................10...................................................................................................................................................................................6...................................................................................................1 Primary Method ...............6......8.....1 Primary Method ...........12......................6............................................6.........14 Backup Method............................................................8........................................................................................................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..........................6.......................10...................................................................2 Description..................................6.........................................................6................................................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder (Cyclic Control) Cylinder Caps (PT) ..6......................4 Defects .........................6......6.................2 Description...............................................11...............................14............10.......................11.....................................................................................2 Backup Method..............................................................2 Description...................6....3 System Securing........................12..................................9.....................................6...............4 Defects ..........................10.........5 Index 10 .........................................................................................................9.......................................................................12.........................................................................12.............................................................................................................6...............14....4 Defects ..........................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) Housing (PT) .......................10.........................................6...........12..........................................................................6...............................................................................................................6.......6..............................2 Description..6....................................4 Defects ..........................3 System Securing...................................................................................9...........4 Defects .......................................................................6....................................................6..............3 System Securing.................5 Hydraulic Servo Cylinder Assembly (Cyclic Control) (PT) ...........6.........14............................................6............6................................................................4 Defects ........................1 Primary Method .....................14.................4 Defects ....8........................

....5.....3....................................................................1 Primary Method ..1 Primary Method .............5 Intermediate Gearbox Inner Coupling (MT) .................................3......................................................38.....................5..TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.......5 Backup Method ..3 System Securing ........................................................................38...........38 Backup Method..............................3..............................................................................................................16....................................................................................39 Backup Method....................3..............................................3 System Securing ..16................................3....37............................................38........2 Description ................................................................................................................3.............................3.....................................1-6.................................37...............3............................................................................3...........................................................................3........................39..........................3......3......................................38.......................................1 Primary Method ........................................................................................39...................................2 Description..5....................16 Backup Method ...........................39...............................................3....................39..............................................................1 Primary Method ............3................................................................................................3.3...........................................................................37.........................................................................4 Defects ............................5 Index 11 C-1 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 3-31 3-32 3-31 3-31 3-31 3-32 3-69 3-70 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-70 3-72 3-73 3-72 3-72 3-72 3-73 3-73 3-74 3-73 3-73 3-73 3-74 3-76 3-78 3-76 3-76 3-76 3-78 ..............................................39..............................5.....................2 Description.................... Improved Particle Separator (IPS) Air Induction System (PT) ........................................................................................................1 Primary Method ..........................37......................................3..................4 Defects ..............................................................41.......................................................................3.5..4 Defects ..5............5 Inlet Screen Latch Assembly Self-Purging .............................5......................3....3......................................................................41 Backup Method ....1 Primary Method ..............................................................4 Defects .............5..................................................37.5..............................................................5....................................2 Description ........................................................................................................3...................3.....................3...........................................................................................................................3 System Securing..............3.....................2 Description ......................................................................................4 Defects ................................3........................................................5...........................................................41.......................................3...1 Primary Method ..............................................16..............................2 Description .............................................3 System Securing ....5............................................................................................................5 Input Drive Quill Wear Sleeve (PT) .............................................................3.....3..........................5...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3...16.....3..3......................................5.............................................................41..............................................................................................5..3....3 System Securing ...................................3 System Securing..........2 Description ......3.....................................3 Backup Method ..................................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number I Illustrated Field Manufacture Items List ..........5 Intermediate Gearbox Case (ET) ..........................................37 Backup Method ..........4 Defects ..........................5 Intermediate Gearbox Outer Coupling (MT) .............3..........................................Air Induction System (PT) ......................5......5............................................................................................................................................................................................41.............................................................................................................................................................................3 System Securing .................................41..........................................3......................................................4 Defects .....38............5 Intermediate Gearbox Pinion Shaft (MT) .........

.3.....................................................................................1 Primary Method ..................................2 Description.........................................................................................................................................11...........................3....4.....3.................................................3................................................5 Introduction ...........................................4...........................................2 Description ...............................................................4................38.....3 System Securing.4 Defects .....................3 System Securing....................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..............4.......................................................................................................1 Primary Method .........................3 System Securing.....................................................3 System Securing..............5 Intermediate Gearbox Support Installation (ET) ..........14.................................................................11..........................................................................................34....................................................................................................................................................22 Backup Method.....................2 Description...4.....................................................2 Description..........3...................................................................................................38 Backup Method.....14...................4 Defects .............................................40............................14.............5 Lift Link Bushing Hole (PT) .....................................................................................................................................................................................4.............................................1 Primary Method ..................................................3 System Securing.............................................3......................4...............................................................................................................1 Primary Method .........................................................................................................................................................................................34..1 Primary Method ......4...........................5...............................4 Defects ...........................................................40.......................3 System Securing ...................................................................3...................................................4......................3..40 Backup Method..............Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-75 3-76 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-76 4-79 4-80 4-79 4-79 4-79 4-80 1-1 4-52 4-53 4-52 4-52 4-52 4-53 4-86 4-91 4-86 4-86 4-86 4-91 4-28 4-31 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-31 3-28 3-29 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-10 3-11 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-11 Intermediate Gearbox Sleeve (MT) ....................................................11.....................4...........4 Defects .......14............................22.........................................................................3................4.............5 Index 12 ..............................................1 Primary Method .........38..................34 Backup Method.........................4.........................................................4.......................................................................................................4..............................34..................................................................................................4....................................................................................11............................................3.........3......................................3.............................11.......2 Description.........1 J Jack and Mooring Fittings (MT) ............................................3 System Securing ...4...............................40..............4..............................5 Lift Beam Cap and Adjacent Structure (ET) ........................................4 Defects ..................................5 Backup Method ..........................40........4 Defects ....................................................38.............................14 Backup Method........................................................34...22..2 Description.......................................40...........4 Defects .......5 M Main Driveshaft Clamp Sets (MT) .5......38.......................................................4........22...................................................................4...................35..............................................................34...3...............14.......................................................................................................................................................4................................................................................................................................3........................11 Backup Method ..............................................................5.............................................................................38....................................22............1 Primary Method .................................................................................4.............................................................................3..............3.5..................................4.............................................................22...........................................................................5 L Landing Gear Cross Tubes (UT) ................2 Description.................................................................................................................................................................................3.....................4....................4.................

...................................................................1 Primary Method ...............5 Main Rotor Blade Bolt (MT) ...3....6.............................................................................9 Backup Method...................................................................3 System Securing ........................ ....................2 Backup Method.....................................1 Primary Method .9......3........................................................................................3...3......................................................5 Main Driveshaft Outer Couplings (MT) .....6..................................................................................................1 Primary Method .3.................................6 Backup Method .........................................................................................2......................................................................................2...........................................................................3...6......................1 Primary Method ...6................................2.........3..........2 Description ...........................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...................................4 Defects ...............................................................................................................................................................2 Description .................9......4 Defects ............3...................9.................................................................................................................................3...................3 System Securing ........................................................................3...3 System Securing.3.3...................................................................................................................37..................................................................................................3................................................................................................4.........................................2...........1 Primary Method ....4 Defects .....................................3..............2.....................................................................................3..1 Primary Method ............2.................................................................................4 Defects ...............................................3 Backup Method ................3.....................................................................................3..................................................................................................7 Backup Method ............................................2 Description ...............................................................3......2 Description ..........................................3..........................................................................2 Description .............Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-16 3-18 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-18 3-11 3-12 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-5 3-6 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-12...........................................3...........................3.......................................................6.........................3.3..............................5 Main Driveshaft (MT) ....................................................9.......................................................................................................................4...3...................................................4.........................................................3 System Securing...................................................................................3...................................................................5 Index 13 ......................................................................................................................................2 Description..........................................7................3.................................................3...............3 System Securing .......................................3 System Securing .3...............6..................6 Backup Method..........................3.....................2....... 3-13 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-6 3-8 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-8 3-8 3-9 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-10 2-13 2-15 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-15 Main Driveshaft Engine Adapter (MT) .............................................................................................................7.............................................................2....................7.9......................................................................................4.............................6......................2 Description .....................2...................3..3..........................................................................................3...........6........................................................................................................................................................................4 Defects .........................4 Defects ...................................................................................5 Main Driveshaft Splined Nuts (MT) .................3.............................................................3..3 System Securing ......................................................................4 Defects ...3...............1 Primary Method .................................................................3.....................5 Main Driveshaft Grease Retainers (PT) .7...............6.............................................................................................................................3................................4 Backup Method ............5 Main Driveshaft Inner Couplings (MT) ...................3....................................................2......3.................4....................2.............

...................3.........2...........................15......7.............14................................................2..5.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Description.....................5 Index 14 .........................2 Description..............................................2.....5...................................2..................2.............14.........2..................................2..............................................3 System Securing..........................................2..........2...................................................3 System Securing ...........................................2...............................................2..................1 Primary Method ..............................................................2.................................2......2...........................................................2............2...............................................................................................................2...........................................2.......13.....13......................13.......................15.............2................3 System Securing.............................................................................................4 Defects .................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.............................15......2......................................2.......5 Main Rotor Hub Grip (ET) ...........1 Primary Method ................................................7 Backup Method......................................................................2.......................................................................5 Main Rotor Hub Pillow Block (ET) ....................................................................................................................................14............15 Backup Method.......................5........................................2 Description .....2...........................................................5 Main Rotor Blade (Metal) (RT) ................................................................5 Backup Method.......................................................................3 Backup Method.3 System Securing............2......................2 Description ..........................................................................................................................2 Description........................2.13 Backup Method ...................................................................1 Primary Method ..........................................................................................................................................4 Defects ...............................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 2-28 2-32 2-29 2-28 2-29 2-32 2-26 2-28 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-28 2-32 2-36 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-36 2-11 2-13 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-13 2-5 2-7 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-9 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-9 2-15 2-18 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-18 Main Rotor Blade (Metal) (BT)..............2..................2..........................................................................14.............................................4 Defects ...2................................................5................................3......................................................1 Primary Method .....................2.................5.........................................................................................................................................................4 Defects .................................................................................................................................................................................................13.........................1 Primary Method ..............................................................................15...2.........................................................................2 Backup Method.....................2..........................................................2...................................14.........................7.....2...................2.............................2 Description....................................5 Main Rotor Hub Plate Assembly (ET) .......................3 System Securing...........................................................2..............................2.......1 Primary Method .....................................................................5 Main Rotor Drag Brace Assembly (MT) ......................................................................................................................................2................................................................15........................................................................................................2..........................................................14 Backup Method..............................................................................2.....2.............7.................................................................................3...................7..............................................................................3 System Securing.............2..................................3.............................13.........4 Defects .5 Main Rotor Blade (Metal) (ET).2..........................2...........4 Defects .........................................2............3.......1 Primary Method ............................2................................................7.....................................................................4 Defects ........................3 System Securing.........................................................2 Description........2......................................................................................2...........

..............................................................................6...12..........4..................................................................................................26....Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 2-19 2-21 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-21 3-49 3-51 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-51 2-9 2-11 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-11 A-1 3-21 3-25 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-25 1-18 4-56 4-58 4-56 4-56 4-56 4-58 6-42 6-45 6-42 6-42 6-42 6-45 4-82 4-84 4-82 4-82 4-82 4-84 Main Rotor Hub Shield Assembly (MT) .....12..................................................................................................................................................................................3 System Securing........................2...................................................................1 Primary Method ...................................................................................4.................................................................................................Cyclic Controls (ET) ................24....................................................................................................36............................................4.2..................36 Backup Method...............................................................4........24.........3...................................................................................................9...........................................................................................................................................................................3......................2 Description........2......................4 Defects ..........................................3 System Securing..4 Defects 6 .........................24...........4 Defects .........................2 Description.................................................................................26......24.........2...........................3..............3 System Securing...........................................9.........................................4 Defects ..............................................4.............................................36.....................26........................................................................3 System Securing ........4 Defects ..........................9 Backup Method....................................12....................3...............................24.........................................................................................................................................................................................................4................................3....................2 Description....................................................1 Primary Method ....................5 Main Rotor Mast Nut (MT) .......................4................................1 Primary Method .........2 Description ........6....4 Defects ..............2............5 N Ninety Degree Gearbox Support Fitting (ET) ....................3..........................................................................................................................24..............................................................................................................3...................................................................................5 Mixing Lever Assembly .......................................................................................................3.......................................................................................4...4............................................9...5 Index 15 .....................................................9..........12 Backup Method...2.....6....2...................................................................................................4...1 Primary Method .......... Main Transmission Case (ET) ..................................................................24.................................36...1 Primary Method ....................24....12.................................................................2 Description ...............................6..............3.....4 Backup Method..........................................................5 Maintenance Allocation Chart ...........................12..............2...............................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...............................................2.........................26......................................................3 System Securing ...................................................................................................................................................4.............................................................................1 Primary Method .............................................................6....24.............................................26 Backup Method ...........................................................4 Defects ..................24..........................24 Backup Method.......................2 Description...............3...............................................................................................................................................................4........................2......................................................3 System Securing.............5 Marking and/or Recording of Inspection Results ............................5 Main Rotor Pitch Horn (ET) ............4........................3.................................................4..............................................4.....4....................................................2............................................................................................3..36...............1........1 Primary Method .......26..................................................................24 Backup Method..................36...............................................................................................................................................3 Mission Operator Seats (ET) ..........................................................4......................2 Description ....................6...........................3 System Securing ............................9.........................................

.1...........28..............................4....................................4.............28..................................1...............4 Defects ....................................1..........................5...............................2..............................2................................................................1 Primary Method .3............4........................28.............31..........5 Nondestructive Inspection Methods ................................10 Selecting the NDI Method ................1.....................................................................3 System Securing.4..........................................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method .........................................................................................................................................................4..........................................................................8 Materials Used for NDI ..3 System Securing..................5........................................................2..............................28.........................1 Radiographic (RT) Method ..........................1...............7 Magnetic Particle (MT) Method ........................................................................1.........2 Description...........................................................................2....................................4.........4 Defects .................1.....4.....1...........................................3 System Securing .......................1..........11 Equipment Used for NDI .........................Air Induction System (PT) ....................................................31 Backup Method...........2 Backup Method.....................4......1........................2.................4...........................................................................................32.........16 Preparation of Helicopter for NDI ..............................................................................14 Fluorescent Penetrant (PT) Method ....................1...........................5 Index 16 ......................................................5 Post Cleaning and Restoration of Part or Area After NDI ..........................2 Ultrasonic (UT) Method .2.......3.......................................................................................4......................................................................................4 Defects ........5 Nut...................32 Backup Method......2..................................................2....................2...............................4...................................32.......4 Acceptance/Rejection Criteria ........................................................................5......................................1.........................32.........1 Primary Method ............................................................3 Preparation of Part or Area for NDI .......................2..........5..............................................9 Eddy Current (ET) Method ........................2....................................................................12 Nut........................................31........31........................................................................................................31..........15 NDI General Safety Precautions ....................................................................................3................................................2 Description..........Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 1-18 1-37 1-20 1-30 1-32 1-37 1-22 1-28 1-37 1-20 1-41 1-19 1-19 1-18 1-31 1-19 1-35 2-73 2-75 2-73 2-73 2-73 2-75 2-70 2-73 2-70 2-70 2-70 2-73 3-53 3-53 3-53 3-53 3-53 3-53 Non-Self-Purging Particle Separator ..................3............4.......2 Description...........................2 Description............................................................4 Purpose of Nondestructive Inspection (NDI) .....................................................................5 O Oil Jets (PT).....1..............13 Bond Testing (BT) Method ... Retainer (MT) ...........2.........................................................................................28....2..................................1......................................................................4 Defects ..............................................................................................................................................................................1.......4..TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..................................................2..................................................3 System Securing ......................................................................................4.......2......1 Primary Method ...................................2............................32...............................................................................6 Demagnetization of Inspection Parts..............3...........................................................4.....3.......................31................1...........4..................1....................................................................................... Collective Sleeve Bearing Retention (MT) ..2...................................................................................................................5......................................................28 Backup Method .................................................................................32...............5.......................

.......................4 Defects ...............................................5...............................................20.................5 Passenger Step (PT) ................................................................................................27................................................................................................................................5 Oil Separator (PT) .........................................27........................................................................................................4 Defects .....2 Description ....................5........21 Backup Method......................................................................................................................................8..............28.................12........................................................27...................................12 Backup Method ...............................................2 Description ....................3................3.................3 System Securing.....3...........................5.............................5.....................................................5...4............................................27..........1 Primary Method .......3 System Securing ......4............................3.4....18.............................................28 Backup Method ..............28...........21.........8...............................1 Primary Method ...........................1 Primary Method ................................2 Description ............................28..................................2 Description ...................................20.....................................................................................................................................................4.....4...................................................................4........................................................4................................................................................12................................3...................................................................................................3 System Securing......................5..4 Defects ..........18...............4 Defects ..................................................4.......................................5 Oil System .....18 Backup Method..4...................................................18....................................................................18........................................................4................4 Defects ..................................................5.......8.......................3 System Securing ................................................................................................4..............................................................................................................................................................4 Defects ....2 Description.........1 Primary Method ....20....................................................................................................................................4.............................................8.................................................28............5 P Paratroop Static Line Fitting and Compression Tube (ET) ...............................................20 Backup Method ................................................21.................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX........................................................................4.......................................................................1 Primary Method ..............4.................................................5................................................................................21....................4...2 Description......................................5 Index 17 .......................3 System Securing ......Metal Lines and Fittings (PT) .................3.........4.......4 Defects .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................4................5..................5 Power Lever Control Mounting Brackets and Plates (PT) ..........................................................................................................................................20...............5................12............5......................27 Backup Method....................................................21..........................5......8 Backup Method.....................................................................................................................5..................27..........................................................................................5..........Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-51 3-53 3-51 3-51 3-51 3-53 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 4-50 4-52 4-50 4-50 4-50 4-52 4-48 4-50 4-48 4-48 4-48 4-50 4-67 4-68 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-68 5-28 5-30 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-30 Oil Pump Driveshaft (MT) ..............5........20..5......................12............................3 System Securing............................................................21..........................12...................5 Pillow Blocks (MT) ....................2 Description ................................1 Primary Method ..............................................3 System Securing .............8.............................................................................5........................................................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method .............................................................18............................4....................................................................5.....28....................................................

.....................................................................5............................................................4 Defects ..........................................................................16...4.............................................................................................................6.........................................................................4 Defects ..............14...........................................................................3 System Securing ..................6......................................................... Bolt.............................................4 Defects ................5........................................4 Defects ...............................5.....................6.......6..6.................................................................................1 Primary Method ....5 Pressure Switch (PT) ........................5...............................................................................................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 5-20 5-22 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-22 5-23 5-25 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-22 5-23 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-23 6-14 6-15 6-14 6-14 6-14 3-44 3-46 3-45 3-44 3-45 3-46 4-21 4-22 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-22 6-13 6-14 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-14 Power Lever Control Rods (MT) .......................23......4 Defects ........................................................1 Primary Method ...........................................5 Power Lever Torque Tube (MT) ........................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX....................................15..........................5...23..3 Pylon Mount Bolts (MT) ...4..............................14.....................................................................4 Defects ..................5.......3 System Securing.........................................5.....3.................3 System Securing.....8 Backup Method...................................................................................................................4.................................3 System Securing.................................2 Description ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................8.....5.......................14..........6...............................................1 Primary Method ..................................5......................................16.................................................15..............1 Primary Method ..........................................................................3.......................23................................8......................5............................................15........8............................5..............5.......6.................................................................................................................................6..........................................................5....................3...........5...................................15 Backup Method ..............5 R Reinforced Floor Mounting Plates and Base Assembly (ET) .........................4..............................................................................................................................................................................23...............................3......................................................................................................4....................................16..........2 Description.................2 Description.................6..........................................................6...............................................................5..............................................3 System Securing...........................................................................................................................23 Backup Method .................5...............6..15.................................................................................................516........6.........................................................5 Backup Method......................................15...................................6...................................5..........................................14..............................................................................1 Primary Method ...............8...........2 Description.................................16 Backup Method ......................................6...........................6...................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ....5..5..............................................................5 Index 18 ....................3.................3................14 Backup Method...5...............2 Description ......................................................5.... and Fitting (PT) ......................1 Primary Method ........................14..4.....................................................6 Backup Method......................4 Defects ...................................................................................2 Description...........................................16..5 Relief Valve......................................................23......................................................................................................................................................................................5........5 Power Lever Controls (ET) .......8................................................................................................................3 System Securing.......2 Description........

............................................2 Description ..............................22.....39...................................................................................................................................................................4 Defects ......4 Defects .......................................33....................22.......................................2 Description .........39..............3 System Securing .....................28 Backup Method .................................................................................................................................................17.......................4............2.................2 Rotor Mast Adapter Set (ET) ........2..............................................................2..........2......................................................................2....................................2......................3 System Securing ..................................................3 System Securing .....................22.............................................................................................................. .................................................................2...................................................................................17...................................................................................................4 Defects ...4 Defects ...........2.....................................................................11 Backup Method .....................................................................33..........................7.........................22 Backup Method...............................................................................................................................................22.....................39..6............2 Description ...................3 System Securing.................................................................................2.......1 Primary Method ................33 Backup Method ................................................4..........................................................................................17 Backup Method ...........................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..................................2..........2 Description............................................................2........................5 Scissors Assembly (ET) ..........5 Solenoid Valves (PT) .........2 Description ...........................................................................2...................................7 Backup Method ...................................28.2.............5 Rotor Group .............................................11................... .................................................................................................28......................17............................................................................................4.....................11...................................................................................4 Defects .......................................................3.........................................11..........................................17......................................4 Defects .....................................7...................................................................2...........................................2.................................................................2 Description ...................................11...................................................4............................2 Description .......3..................................2.....22...4.............................................................. ..................................................33.....7.......................4 Defects ..........................5 Index 19 ..2..................................................6........................................................................................................................................................39.............................................3 System Securing ....3 System Securing .....................6.............2......33.............................................11.................................................................................................................................................................2...........6........................33....................................................................................................................................................................3.....................17.......7......................................................................................................2..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................28......................................1 Primary Method .........................................................................5 Stabilizer Bar Center Frame (ET) ..3...............39 Backup Method .........39......................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-19 3-21 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-21 2-1 2-51 2-53 2-51 2-51 2-51 2-53 2-75 2-77 2-75 2-75 2-75 2-77 2-64 2-66 2-64 2-64 2-64 2-66 4-91 4-94 4-91 4-91 4-91 4-94 6-16 6-17 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-17 2-40 2-41 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-41 Ring Gear Case (MT) ......1 Primary Method ................................5 S Scissors and Sleeve Hub (MT) ................7..........................................................................................................1 Primary Method ..............6.........4..2..1 Primary Method ...............................................................28..3 System Securing.....................3.........2...1 Primary Method ......................1 Primary Method ..............................................................................5 Skid Tube Saddles (ET) ..6...........................................3..............................................................

.2.......................2...2...................................2...........................................................................5 Support Assembly............20..................................................................................2.................................1 Primary Method ..........................18..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12....................................................................3 System Securing ...................5 Strap Fitting (MT) ..........................................1 Primary Method ...........................................................................................................19................................................18 Backup Method ........................12..........................26......20...................................................26........3 System Securing ...........................................................................3 System Securing .........................................................4 Defects ......2.....3 System Securing .................2 Description .........................................5 Standard Crew Seat (ET) ..........................................................1 Primary Method ................2............................1 Primary Method ...............2...............................................12.........................................................................................................18...Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 2-45 2-47 2-45 2-45 2-45 2-47 2-43 2-45 2-43 2-43 2-43 2-45 2-47 2-49 2-47 2-47 2-47 2-49 4-55 4-56 4-55 4-55 4-55 4-56 2-24 2-26 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-26 2-60 2-62 2-60 2-60 2-60 2-62 6-40 6-42 6-40 6-40 6-40 6-42 Stabilizer Bar Lever (ET) ...................................................4 Defects ......26................2 Description ..............................................................4..........2.................................................................................................................................2................................2..................................................4 Defects .....................................23 Backup Method ................................4.............................26..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................23......................................2.....................................................2......................................................................................2..................2......................................................23...............................23......................................................6............18.......................................1 Primary Method ...........4.................................................................................2 Description ...............................................................................2.............................................................................................18.1 Primary Method ....3 System Securing .........................2....6............................................................................23.................2 Description ....................................2..................................................19 Backup Method .............4 Defects ...............2.............................20.......23........................................2.................2 Description ......................................................................2 Description ..............2..6.............23 Backup Method ....................................................................6..................................2......2..............................26...................2.23..........18.................................................2..........................................................................20 Backup Method ................................................................................5 Stabilizer Bar Support (ET) ...........................................................2....5 Support Assembly (ET) ....................................4 Defects ..........................20..................................12 Backup Method .....6...............................................................................................................................................................................................................23...26 Backup Method ......................5 Index 20 .23.........12..2.......2...............4 Defects .4 Defects' ...........................................................4............................5 Stabilizer Bar Tube Assembly (MT) ................................................3 System Securing ...................................................12................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...................................................2....20.............1 Primary Method .3 System Securing .....19......................2.......................4.................................................................23.........................................2 Description ............................19.......................................19.....................................6.23.................................................................................4. Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Port) (ET) ..........................................19..........................................................................

....................................................5 T Tailboom and Fuselage Attach Fittings (ET)....................................6..1 Primary Method ............2................2......4 Defects ........................42.31.......4.35....2.........................35..2................................2 Description ...............................................................................4.22.....................................................................2..TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..........4 Defects ..........................................................22 Backup Method ..........2 Description.....................................................................................4...............................6.............................................................................................25...........................................................2 Description..........................................................................6...........................................24..........................3 System Securing........................1 Primary Method .......................................6..................................................................................................................35..........................................................................4.......................................................3 System Securing ............1 Primary Method .................................................1 Primary Method .................................................2...............................24..................................................................................................5..............................................4 Defects ..................5..........31...............................4............................................4......................5 Tail Rotor Arm Assemblies (ET) ..................42.........1 Primary Method ..........22..............................................................................5 Tailboom Structure (ET).................................................................................25....................31.......................................5 Swashplate Outer Ring (ET) .............................................4 Defects .............................................................................................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-38 6-40 6-38 6-38 6-38 6-40 2-55 2-57 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-57 2-57 2-60 2-57 2-57 2-58 2-60 4-71 4-71 4-71 4-74 4-71 4-74 4-81 4-82 4-81 4-81 4-81 4-82 5-12 5-13 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-13 6-75 6-77 6-75 6-75 6-75 6-77 Support Assembly.......25 Backup Method .24 Backup Method ....................................24...................................................................42 Backup Method ............6.................6.................42.........................................................................................................6.....................................................5......................................3 System Securing...................................................4 Description.................4...................25........1 System Securing........................1 Primary Method ..........................................................5................................... Hydraulic Cylinder Assembly (Starboard) (ET) ...................................................................................................................................31 Defects ...........................22.................7....................................4.....................................2...............2 Description..............................................................................................42........................5......................5 Tailpipe and Heatshield (PT) .......................................................................25..........2........31.................................................35...........................................................................................................................7..........................................3 Backup Method............................6.........5 Swashplate Inner Ring (ET) ..................2 Primary Method .......................................................................................................................................................3 System Securing ....................6................................................35................2............................................................31...6..................................................................................................................................................2................2 Description ........4...................................................................4............4 Defects .........................22..........................................4.............5..4 Defects .............3 System Securing......................................................24.................2................................2 Description..........7.........5 Index 21 ..............................................4...................................7............35 Backup Method......................6..........................................................................................7 Backup Method..6..............................42....................................................................................................................................25.........3 System Securing......2....................................................................................24......................................................................................................22.................................................................................................7.................

.......................................46........................6..................43 Backup Method.................46........................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ...............................................6.............................................2 Description...............2............................................................................................................................................41........................42............................................45......................................................................6..........1 Primary Method .43.........TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX...................43................2..6...................................................2................................................................6.................................................................2..3 System Securing.............................................................................3 System Securing...................42...2 Description..............................................................................................................45 Backup Method........................................................6.................................46.........6...................................................................................2..............................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-77 6-79 6-77 6-77 6-77 6-79 2-93 2-95 2-93 2-93 2-93 2-95 2-90 2-93 2-90 2-90 2-90 2-93 2-95 2-100 2-95 2-95 2-97 2-100 6-54 6-55 6-54 6-54 6-54 6-55 6-80 6-83 6-80 6-80 6-80 6-83 6-83 6-85 6-83 6-83 6-83 6-85 Tail Rotor Bellcrank Assembly (ET) .......6......................................2.............................................................46...................................4 Defects ...........43....................................................................................41............6.2 Description..............................................................2..............5 Tail Rotor Blade (ET) .......2...........................................................................2 Description.....2................................................6.................................................................................................6.....................................3 System Securing............................46 Backup Method.........................................................6..29.....................42 Backup Method................45.....................................5 Tail Rotor Control System ..........6.........................................................................................................................43...6............................................1 Primary Method .....29......6..........6......................................................................................4 Defects .................................................................................41 Backup Method................................................................................................2................................3 System Securing..............................5 Tail Rotor Blade (RT) ............................5 Tail Rotor Control System .5 Index 22 ...................................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ...43.......................3 System Securing.........6................................................................2......2...................................................29........................................................45................5 Tail Rotor Control Quadrant (ET) ............................................................................................................6....................43................................................................................29..................43......................1 Primary Method .......................................................................................................................2...6.........................4 Defects .....3 System Securing..........................2.............6......................................41...............29...............................................Bellcranks (ET) ..6........42..............2 Description..........................................................................................................41........................................45......................................................................................................6..............4 Defects ................................................29 Backup Method...........3 System Securing...4 Defects ......................42..............................43........................................43.............................................................4 Defects ...1 Primary Method ..................6....43 Backup Method....................43...................................5 Tail Rotor Blade (BT) ..2.....................................................................45................................................46..2......................................................2..................................................................1 Primary Method .................................................................................2 Description.......................................................................4 Defects ................................................Levers (ET) ........................................................42.......................................2 Description ......................................6..................................................41...............................2.....................................................................................................................................

................................6............................................................................1 Primary Method ..............6.......Sprocket Guard (PT) .....................................................................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ...........6..............................................4 Defects .............................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ...............................6.........................................................................................30....6.................................................................Control Nut (PT) ...........................................................................6932.......35 Backup Method .....................................6................................30.....................................35....6........................................................6.............................................4 Defects ....4 Defects ....................35............................................32.........6..........3 System Securing.....................2 Description...................31...6...30...................37.....................................6....6.............6..............6......................................................................................................................................................................6......TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..........6..................................................................................................................................................................................6........................................................................................33............31 Backup Method......6.............6.....................................................32 Backup Method ................................................................6...............................6..........2 Description...........................................33......36.........35....................................................36.......37...............................................................................31.............................6.........................................................................................................37........36...............1 Primary Method .........................3 System Securing ....................................6......4 Defects ............36 Backup Method.....................................................................................................6......................................................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ....33 Backup Method....37 Backup Method.........4 Defects .....................................30 Backup Method ......................................................Housing (PT) ............................33..........................6.....................6...................................6....................................................6.................................................35.......6.............................................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ..................................30................................................................6.........6...................................2 Description...............31..................6..................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill ................................................................32.................................2 Description............................................3 System Securing .........................35..........................................6..............37.....................................................................................................................................................4 Defects ......................................2 Description.......................................................................Spacer (MT) ..............6...........................32................Control Tube (MT) ...................Retaining Nut (MT) ......................................................................................Bearing Retainer (PT) ....................................6.................1 Primary Method .......................33..............3 System Securing ....................................33.....Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-62 6-63 6-62 6-62 6-62 6-63 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-65 6-57 6-57 6-57 6-57 6-57 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-58 6-58 6-58 6-59 6-59 6-61 6-59 6-59 6-59 6-61 6-63 6-65 6-63 6-63 6-63 6-65 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-56 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .........2 Description ......................................................32..........................................................................................5 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .............2 Description .....................................................................................36.......................................6............................6....................31.....3 System Securing..........3 System Securing ..............1 Primary Method .................................3 System Securing .......................................................................................................6..................................................31............................................................................................................................1 Primary Method .......................................................4 Defects .........................................................................................................6....................30.....1 Primary Method ....................................6......6......................37...............................................................36........5 Index 23 ................................................1 Primary Method ..............................

..........................3.............................38............................5 Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Spacer (MT) ...............4 Defects ...................40 Backup Method..............................22...............2 Description............................................2 Description..........TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX..............................................................................................2 Description......................................................................................................................................44 Backup Method..................................6...........34......40...........................................3..............Sprocket (PT) ............................6...........................................................................................................3.............................................................20 Backup Method.................................5 Tail Rotor Cylinder and Support Assembly .................6..2 Description..............6....................6..................................................................................................................................6.............................2.............................................4 Defects ...4 Defects ..............................................................3 System Securing.......3.......................................6........5 Tail Rotor Control Tubes (ET) ..................3................................................................................................................20.........................................21 Backup Method........................................20.......................................................................................................................................2 Description........................38..............................................................6...............................................................20...............................................6.....40........................................................20.3......6...................34 Backup Method........................................................................3....................40..5 Tail Rotor Drive Quill Bevel Gear Teeth (MT) .1 Primary Method ........................6...........................................3.............3.........3....6......................................3 System Securing.................................................................6.........38.......................................................6...............1 Primary Method .......5 Index 24 .................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 6-61 6-61 6-61 6-61 6-61 6-61 6-66 6-68 6-66 6-66 6-66 6-68 2-88 2-90 2-88 2-88 2-88 2-90 6-79 6-80 6-79 6-79 6-79 6-80 3-41 3-42 3-41 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-38 3-41 3-38 3-38 3-38 3-41 3-43 3-44 3-43 3-43 3-43 3-44 Tail Rotor Control Tube and Quill .....................................................................................................................................................................................2.........................22........................................................................................5 Tail Rotor Drive Quill Sleeve Assembly (ET) ......................................5 Tail Rotor Crosshead (ET)..................................................1 Primary Method ...........................................................................2...................................................3......6...............................38.........44....................................2....21..........................................................................................................................22.....2 Description........34........................................3 System Securing .22................4 Defects ................................................................3.......................21.....................................34.................................................3 System Securing.................................3.....................3.........44.........38 Backup Method........................................................................34......................................................6...............40.........................................................3 System Securing...........................................................1 Primary Method ...................................................6...............................................3 System Securing..22..........................................................21...................................................................................................................2.....1 Primary Method .........2...................................................................21........4 Defects ....6....3 System Securing.............................3.................................................................................21...........................................................22 Backup Method.................................................................................................................34.............................................Hardware (MT) ...........4 Defects ..............3......................................................38........................................................................20................................................3.............................................4 Defects ................................44.........1 Primary Method ..........3................1 Primary Method ...........................................................................................2 Description.......44...................................................40................................................44..............................................................

..............................................3......3........................................................................................................................................2 Description.......................................................................................3...............................3........................3............3................................................2 Description.5 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Inner (Spherical) Coupling (MT) ................3.................................29.................................................................................................................29.....3..................................................................................32.......3.................................................31 Backup Method..........1 Primary Method ................33.........Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-54 3-56 3-54 3-54 3-54 3-56 3-56 3-58 3-56 3-56 3-56 3-58 3-65 3-67 3-65 3-65 3-65 3-67 3-62 3-63 3-62 3-62 3-62 3-64 3-58 3-60 3-58 3-58 3-58 3-60 3-67 3-69 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-69 3-60 3-61 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-62 Tail Rotor Driveshaft (ET) ........................29.............32 Backup Method....................................................................................................................3....32..................3.................................................................................................................31................5 Index 25 ...........3........................................................................3.....................................1 Primary Method ........................3 System Securing......................36......................................3..............................29 Backup Method ......................................3..................................1 Primary Method ...................................35...........................................................................................................3..........3..........33 Backup Method......33.......................................................................2 Description......................32....................................2 Description...................................30.......3....3..............32...........................................31..............................................................................................................................................................................................................3......................................35.......................36....................31..................................................................30.......31....3....3...............4 Defects ...............................................................................................3....................3...................................................................................33..5 TailRot6r Driveshaft Forward Coupling (MT) .............................................4 Defects ..........................1 Primary Method ....................1 Primary Method ..5 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Clamps (MT) ..........................................................................3.31.......30....3........3........................3.............................3...3 System Securing..............3...........................................36...............................3..................4 Defects ........................................3.....................3.....5 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hanger Support Fittings (ET) .................................................30.......................................35 Backup Method...................................3....................................3 System Securing..............2 Description .........30.................................3......................................................................................................................................................................................................4 Defects ..................................3 System Securing............................................................................................................36.......................................1 Primary Method ......................................4 Defects ............................................................................1 Primary Method ................................................................................30 Backup Method..3 System Securing.............................................................2 Description ............................................33.........................................................................4 Defects .....................................................................................3 System Securing............................................5 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Hangers (MT).................................................................33...........29........................5 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Coupling Shaft (MT) ............3....................2 Description ........................................................................3.............35....29...........3..........................................3 System Securing......................................................................36......................................................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.....3..........3....................................................................35...............................32.......4 Defects ................................................................35...3...........................................................................................36 Backup Method...............3.......................................................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................44.................................................................3........................................35........................................................................................................................................................................................4 Defects ...........................................3..........3.........34.4 Defects ........................................................1 Primary Method .......5 Tail Rotor Gearbox Inner Coupling (MT) ...........3..2 Description ......................................3 System Securing .............3.34...............................................................................2 Description ................................................................................3...........44.....45..............................3......................34.....................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 3-64 3-65 3-64 3-64 3-64 3-65 3-78 3-80 3-78 3-78 3-78 3-80 3-80 3-82 3-80 3-80 3-80 3-82 3-82 3-83 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-84 3-84 3-84 3-85 2-77 2-79 2-77 2-77 2-77 2-79 2-79 2-80 2-79 2-79 2-79 2-80 Tail Rotor Driveshaft Rear Coupling (MT) .........44................................3........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.................3..4 Defects ......................4 Defects .....................................................................................44......................................................3........1 Primary Method .................3..........................................43..............................................................34.....................................5 Tail Rotor Gearbox Case (ET)......................................................................................3 System Securing ...........................................................................................................................3..........................3 System Securing .....43 Backup Method ..............................................................................................35..................................................................3.........................................................................................42...................................4 Defects ..........................................................3......................................................................................................2 Description...............4 Defects .34....2................................3.....................34.................................................................34.........1 Primary Method ..........................................3..............34................................................................35............45 Backup Method ..............................................1 Primary Method ......2 Description..................3 System Securing ...................................................................5 Tail Rotor Hub Grip Assembly (ET) ..5 Tail Rotor Gearbox Sleeve (MT) .........................3..................................................44.......................................................3..................................................................................................2 Description .....................................................................................................5 Tail Rotor Gearbox Outer Coupling (MT) ...............................3 System Securing ...............3..................2.......................................2..43..............42.......................................................................1 Primary Method ..................................................45........................................3.....................................................................................................................34 Backup Method ................................................................................42...............4 Defects ..................3..............................................................................................3 System Securing ...............................................................................................................44 Backup Method ...........................42............3............................................2........42...............35...........35.....3...............................................................................................................5 Index 26 ..................................45..............................................34.................43........................2 Description ...3.....................................34 Backup Method ...................................................................................................................................2.................3..........45..................................................5 Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Nut (MT) ....35 Backup Method ...............................................................................................................1 Primary Method .........................43........................2..42 Backup Method .........3.............................3 System Securing ............................................................................3.....................2 Description ......................................................45.........................................43...........3........................................................................3.....................2.........................2..........................................1 Primary Method .......2....................2............................3.....................................2.......................2.......................................................34................

.....2 Description .........................................3...........36................40............6.................5 Index 27 ........................................................................................................................................................15.................................................39 Backup Method ................................................................................................................................4 Defects ....................................................................................40............................................................38.......38.......................2..................39.........38......41..38.................1 Primary Method ........5 Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder ...........6........................................40.........39.............................................................................................3 System Securing ..4 Defects ...........................15................................................5 Tail Rotor Hydraulic Power Cylinder Adapter (MT) ..................2...................................................................................41.........3 System Securing ....................2 Description ..............................3................15.................................6......1 Primary Method ........6..............Piston Rod (MT) ..........................................................................................1 Primary Method ..........................................................1 Primary Method ........................................1 Primary Method ......1 Primary Method ............39......3......40.....................................................3 System Securing .......................................................................................................39......................2.....................................................................41.41 Backup Method .......................................................................4 Defects ..............................15 Backup Method ...............................4 Defects ...........3..........................6..41.....................................15..............2....................................................2...............................................2...5 Threaded Fittings (PT) ..........................3 System Securing ..........2 Description .......................6.39....................................................................................................................2.............39...........................................2....................................4 Defects ..................39............3 System Securing ..........................................................................6........................2....................................................................39......................................1 Primary Method ..2.............................................................................2 Description ................41......................................................................................................................................................3 System Securing ............................................................................6..................39............................................39..................................................................2............6................................................................36 Backup Method ........................................................6......................................................................6...............2 Description .....................2 Description ................................................................40 Backup Method ..............6.................2..................................................3.........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX............4 Defects .....................................3 System Securing .....................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 2-81 2-82 2-81 2-81 2-81 2-82 2-86 2-88 2-86 2-86 2-86 2-88 2-84 2-86 2-84 2-84 2-84 2-86 6-71 6-72 6-71 6-71 6-71 6-72 6-68 6-69 6-68 6-68 6-68 6-69 6-72 6-75 6-72 6-72 6-72 6-75 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 Tail Rotor Hub Retainer Ring (PT) .............5 Tail Rotor Hub Trunnion (MT) ...........36................................................5 Tail Rotor Support Assembly (ET) .....................................................5 Tail Rotor Hub Yoke (MT) ....................................................................................................................................................................................6..........................................................................................................................................................................38..........................................................39 Backup Method ...6..........................2........................................................3.36.......................................2.....................................................................................................6..................................................40.................2....................2..............................................6...........15...................4 Defects ......................................................38 Backup Method ..............6......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Description ...........................................36...............................2......6......................................2..................36..............................

............................21.............3 System Securing............10.................2......................................................................................................................................................................3...........................................................4..................2...........................................................2.......................10.......................................................................2 Description................................................13 Backup Method...........................1 Steps........4 Defects ...........2..........................................................................................................3 Transmission Lift Link (MT) ..............................5 Transmission/Drivetrain Group ...............Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number 4-24 4-26 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-26 3-18 3-19 3-18 3-18 3-18 3-19 3-1 3-85 3-87 3-85 3-85 3-85 3-87 3-25 3-26 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26 2-23 2-24 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-24 6-36 6-38 6-36 6-36 6-36 6-38 1-12 1-13 1-12 1-13 1-13 1-12 1-13 1-12 Transmission and Engine Cowling (ET) ...................................................................................................................................................4 Defects .................................................................................................................................6..................................................................................9 Backup Method...........9......................................................13...............................................6...11..........................3..................2 Description........................................ and Fairings ...............................................10 Backup Method....... and Walkways ........................3.....................................5 Transmission Case (Top) (ET) ......................................9...................................2 Index 28 .....46...........13........................4 Flight Control Group ...................................................3........................2...............................3 System Securing ...............................2..............3.....................46.................. Doors...............................................21.............................................................11............5 Tube and Lever Assembly (ET) ......................4 Defects ..............6.............................................................................................................10.............................................................................................3 System Securing ................2................................................4 Defects .1 Primary Method ...............1.......................................... Handholds.........6....................................................................................10.............................................5 Trunnion (MT) ..............................4...................................13.....................................................2 Access Panels............2 Description ...........7 Transmission/Drivetrain Group............................1........................................2.....................................................................................................3.....................................3...............................................................................................................2.....................9.......................................3 System Securing.................3..3 System Securing ..............................................................................3.1 Primary Method ............................3................3...............................................................................................................................2.................3..11....................................................................................1 Primary Method ....1 Primary Method ....................................3........2..............4....11..........11.............9................................4 Defects .............................5 Type of Construction ...............................................................................1...................21........................1....................................................4....................................1 Primary Method ...........................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX.................................................................................................3.3.................................3 System Securing ......................................21.....................................................................2.......2 Description....................................................2 Description................................................................4...........................3....4 Defects ......................46........5 Rotor Group ............46 Backup Method .....................................2 Description .........................................................6...................................................................................................................................................1....................46..............................................11 Backup Method .............21...........................................13..................................................................1......................................................................1....................................................................................................................................................................3 Engine Group ...3.......2...........21 Backup Method ............13.............................................46.............................................................10.................................................................4...................................................9......................................................................3...............................6..................................6 Airframes and Landing Gear Group ..........................5 Transmission Support Case (ET) .1...1 Primary Method .......................

.............37.................................................5 Y Yoke (MT) .........................................4...........4.................................................................2................................37.....4 Defects ...............10........................................................37 Backup Method ......................................4...........3 System Securing .......................................4................2 Description ................................4 Defects ...............................................2 Description .....37...........37.........37.1 Primary Method ................2.................................................................................................................1 Primary Method ........................................................10............................................................................................................................Continued Subject Paragraph Number Page Number V Vertical Fin (PT) ................4...................................................2.4........................................................................................................................................................10 Backup Method ...10...................................................2...................................................................TM 1-1520-256-23 INDEX............................................10.............................................................................................3 System Securing ........................................................................................2.............10......5 Index 29/(lndex 30 blank) 4-85 4-86 4-85 4-85 4-85 4-86 2-21 2-23 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-23 .................................................

.

Zip: 77777 7. Table: 8 25. 5. The subject line must be exactly the same and all fields must be included. .These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028 The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. Publication Date: 04-JUL-85 11. City: Hometown 5. Total: 123 27. 9. Text: This is the text for the problem below line 27. Submitter LName: Smith 16. 10. NSN: 5 22. Submitter MName: T 15. 13. 15. Submitter Phone: 123-123-1234 17.army. Change Number: 7 12. Paragraph: 3 20. 3.mil> To: mpmtl/oavma28@st-louis-emh7. and 27. Reference: 6 23. Date Sent: 19-OCT-93 8. Pub no: 55-2840-229-23 9. Address: 4300 Park 4. Submitter FName: Joe 14. St: MO 6. Figure: 7 24. From: Joe Smith 2. Submitter Rank: MSG 13. Pub Title: TM 10. 4. 6. From: "Whomever" <whomever@avma27. Line: 4 21. 16. 8.mil Subject: DA Form 2028 1. Item: 9 26.army. however only the following fields are mandatory: 1. Problem: 1 18. 17. Unit: home 3. Page: 2 19. 7.

.

394 3. decimeters = 10.42 gallons 1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.155 sq.11296 To change ounce-inches centimeters meters meters kilometers square centimeters square meters square meters square kilometers square hectometers cubic meters cubic meters milliliters liters liters liters grams kilograms metric tons To Newton-meters inches feet yards miles square inches square feet square yards square miles acres cubic feet cubic yards fluid ounces pints quarts gallons ounces pounds short tons Multiply by .386 2. ounce 1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.64 gallons 1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.280. inch 1 cu.621 . feet 1 sq.057 . centimeters = 61.18 gallons Square Measure Weights 1 centigram = 10 milligrams = . ounces 1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.35 ounce 1 hectogram = 10 decagrams = 3.473 .573 .609 6.451 .08 feet 1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3.035 ounce 1 decagram = 10 grams = .093 .102 Temperature (Exact) ° F Fahrenheit temperature 5/9 (after subtracting 32) Celsius temperature ° C . inches 1 cu. feet 1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. meters = 1.280 1.349 . centimeters = 15.007062 .471 35.076.035 2.155 10.914 1. inches 1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq.15 grain 1 decigram = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains 1 gram = 10 decigram = .113 1.94 inches 1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39. decimeter = 1000 cu.06 cu.81 fl.028 .2 pounds 1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220. feet 1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .034 2.5 sq.785 28.264 .305 . centimeter = 1000 cu.31 cu. millimeters = .907 1. dekameters = 2. meter = 1000 cu.308 .34 fl.1 short tons 1 sq.76 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. millimeters = .765 29. mile Cubic Measure 1 cu.39 inch 1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.8 feet 1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.46 pounds 1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.47 acres 1 sq.8 feet Approximate Conversion Factors To change inches feet yards miles square inches square feet square yards square miles acres cubic feet cubic yards fluid ounces pints quarts gallons ounces pounds short tons pound-feet pound-inches To centimeters meters meters kilometers square centimeters square meters square meters square kilometers square hectometers cubic meters cubic meters milliliters liters liters liters grams kilograms metric tons Newton-meters Newton-meters Multiply by 2.38 fl. decimeter = 100 sq.356 .836 2. centimeter = 100 sq.205 1. decimeters = 35.946 3.590 . ounces 1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.4 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq.196 .02 cu.454 .The Metric System and Equivalents Linear Measure Liquid Measure 1 centiliter = 10 milliters = .386 sq.764 1.37 inches 1 dekameter = 10 meters = 32.540 . inch 1 sq.405 .315 1.52 ounces 1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.094 . hectometers = .

PIN: 075199-000 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->